Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPROJECT SPECIFICATIONS PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS FOR F.Y.2010 E. SIXTH ST. STORM PUMP STATION IMPROVEMENT CITY OF WATERLOO CONTRACT NO. 716 I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS PLAN AND SPECIFICATION WAS PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT PERSONAL �11ti1H;;i� SUPERVISION AND THAT I AM A DULY LICENSED tin0i N CL II% PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER UNDER THE LAWS OF THE i `q i STATE OF IOWA. =.4 Licensed -.s r-' 94U8 z a ' Iowa ,� -r—/e-00/0 0`` WILLIAM J. SEN DATE Qf� `70"% P.E.NO.9408 MY REGISTRATION RENEWAL DATE IS 12/31/11.nA, PAGES OR SHEETS COVERED BY THIS SEAL: /III 'ZKcep4 Pi+JlJt oz.a (Folder&E 6TH ST PUMP STATION-20101Titie Page,doc) PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS FOR _ F.Y.2010 E. SIXTH ST. STORM PUMP STATION IMPROVEMENT CITY OF WATERLOO CONTRACT NO. 716 I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS PLAN AND SPECIFICATION WAS PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT PERSONAL r pltt15111111NrtryrI,,f SUPERVISION AND THAT I AM A DULY LICENSED FSSIQN PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER UNDER THE LAWS OF THE +p lq\:-Q f STATE OF IOWA. �w . . Fyn DAViD r w_ -� KLINE rr, J•.• PE 19236 3-2_/ IG I A.. DAVID W.KLINE DATE -"43144.ukinol'"' P.E.NO. 19236 MY REGISTRATION RENEWAL DATE IS 12/31/10. PAGES OR SHEETS COVERED BY THIS SEAL: DIV.26 F.Y. 2010 E. SIXTH ST. STORM PUMP STATION IMPROVEMENTS CONTRACT NO. 716 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING AND NOTICE TO BIDDERS 2. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3. FORM OF BID OR PROPOSAL 4. SALES TAX EXEMPTION INFORMATION FORM 5. FORM OF BID BOND 6. NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVITS 7. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE 8. RECIPROCAL RESIDENT BIDDER PREFERENCE AND RESIDENT BIDDER CERTIFICATION 9. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PROGRAM 10. POTENTIAL ITEMS OF WORK FOR MBEIWBE PARTICIPATION SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID REQUEST FORM, LETTER FORM FOR SUBCONTRACTOR QUOTES, MBE/WBE SCOPE LETTER, MBE AND/OR WBE PREBID CONTACT INFORMATION FORM 11. WATERLOO/CEDAR FALLS MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESSES ENTERPRISE CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR'S GUIDE 12. STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS 13. GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS 14. SPECIAL PROVISIONS 15. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 16. SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 of 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTINUED 17. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 2-SITE WORK DIVISION 3-CONCRETE WORK DIVISION 4-MASONRY DIVISION 5-METALS DIVISION 6-NOT USED DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS ❑IVISION 9-FINISHES DIVISION 10-NOT USED DIVISION 11-EQUIPMENT DIVISION 26-ELECTRICAL 18. FORM OF CONTRACT 19. FORM OF PERFORMANCE BOND 20. FORM OF PAYMENT BOND TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2 of 2 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING On Proposed Plans, Specifications, Form of Contract, And Estimate of Cost and the NOTICE TO BIDDERS For the Taking of Construction Bids For the F.Y. 2010 E. SIXTH ST. STORM PUMP STATION IMPROVEMENTS, In the City of Waterloo, Iowa CONTRACT NO. 716 RECEIVING OF BIDS Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Waterloo. Iowa, at her office in the City Hall of the said City on the 21st day of June, 2010, until 4:00 p.m. for the construction of the F.Y. 2010 E SIXTH ST. STORM PUMP STATION IMPROVEMENTS, Contract No. 716, as described in detail in the plans and specifications now on file in the Office of the City Clerk. OPENING OF BIDS All proposals received will be opened in open Council meeting to be held in the Council Chambers in the City Hall in the City of Waterloo, Iowa, on the 21st day of June, 2010, at 5:30 p.m., and the proposals will be acted upon at such later time and place as may then be fixed. PUBLIC HEARING Notice is hereby given that the Council of said City will conduct a public hearing on the proposed plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-described improvement project at 5:30 p.m. on June 21, 2010 said hearing to be held in the Council Chambers in the City Hall in said City. The proposed plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for said improvements heretofore prepared by Wayne Claassen Engineering and Surveying, Inc., Waterloo, Iowa are now on file in the office of the City Clerk for public examination, and any person interested therein may file written objection thereto with the City Clerk before the date set for said hearing, or appear and make objection thereto with the City Clerk before the date set for said hearing, or appear and make objection thereto at the meeting above set forth. SCOPE OF WORK The extent of the work involved is the re-construction of this existing storm water pumping station, including the removal of one pump and the furnishing and installation of two(2) 32,000 gallon per minute (gpm) submersible propeller pumps, controls, piping, building and wet well modifications and such other work that is incidental thereto. NOTICE OF HEARING CONTRACT NO. 716 Page 1 of 5 BEGINNING AND COMPLETION DATES The work under the proposed contract shall be commenced within ten (10) working days after receipt of "Notice to Proceed" and all work except site clean-up shall be complete within 220 calendar days after receipt of said "Notice to Proceed". All remaining clean-up work shall be complete by May 15, 2011. METHOD OF PAYMENT TO CONTRACTOR The Contractor will be paid against bi-monthly estimates in cash on the basis of ninety- five percent (95%) of the work as it is completed and materials delivered and work approved. Final payment will be made thirty-one (31) days after completion of the work and acceptance by the Council. Before final payment is made, vouchers showing that all subcontractors and workmen and all persons furnishing materials have been fully paid for such materials and labor will be required unless the City is satisfied that material, men and laborers have been paid. The Contractor is hereby notified that if the City does not have cash on hand to pay monthly pay estimates, according to Chapter 384.57 of the Code of Iowa, payment may be made by anticipatory warrants issued bearing a rate of interest not exceeding that permitted by Chapter 74A, Code of Iowa. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Plans and Specifications governing the construction of the proposed improvements have been prepared by Wayne Claassen Engineering and Surveying, Inc., Waterloo, Iowa, which plans and specifications and also the prior proceedings of the City Council referring to and defining said proposed improvements are hereby made a part of this notice, and the proposed contract by reference shall be executed in compliance therewith. Plans and Specifications are obtainable by a qualified bidder from the City Engineer upon payment of $25.00. The payment is not refundable. The prime contractor, subcontractors, or suppliers working on the project shall retain their own set of plans and specifications for use on the project. The prime contractor will be supplied with the needed number of reduced sets of plans and specifications at no additional cost. CONTRACT AWARD A contract will be awarded to the qualified bidder submitting the lowest bid. The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids, re-advertise for new bids, and to waive informalities in the bids submitted that might be in the best interest of the City. Bids may be held by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, for a period not to exceed thirty (30) days from the day of the opening of bids for the purpose of reviewing the bids and investigating the qualifications of bidders, prior to awarding the contract. NOTICE OF HEARING CONTRACT NO. 716 Page 2 of 5 By virtue of statutory authority, a preference will be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced with the State of Iowa and preference will be given to local domestic labor in the construction of the improvement. PROPOSALS SUBMITTED The bidder shall submit bids on the items listed in the proposal. The bidder shall clearly write or type the unit bid price and the bid item extension (Unit Price x Estimated Qty) in numerals on the blanks provided. Should there be any discrepancy between the unit bid price and extension, the City of Waterloo shall consider the unit bid price as being the valid unit bid price. BID SECURITY REQUIRED All bids must be accompanied in a separate envelope by a certified or cashier's check drawn on an Iowa bank, or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States, a certified share draft drawn on a credit union in Iowa or chartered under the laws of the United States, or bid bond, (on the form furnished by the City) payable to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in the sum of not less than five percent (5%) of the bid submitted, which certified check, certified share draft or bid bond will be held as security that the Bidder will enter into a Contract for the construction of the work and will furnish the required bonds, and in case the successful Bidder shall fail or refuse to enter into the Contract and furnish the required bonds, his bid security may be retained by said City as agreed upon liquidated damages. If bid bond is used, it must be signed by both the Bidder and the surety or surety's agent. Signature of surety's agent must be supported by accompanying Power of Attorney. PERFORMANCE & PAYMENT BONDS The successful bidder will be required to furnish a 'Performance Bond" and a "Payment Bond" within ten (10) days after forms are presented to him in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City Council and shall guarantee the faithful performance of the contract and the terms and conditions therein contained, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor and protect and save harmless the City from claims of any kind caused by the operations of the contractor. MAINTENANCE BOND Before the Contractor shall be entitled to receive final payment for work done under this contract, it shall execute and file a bond in the penal sum of not less than 100% of the total amount of the contract, same to be known as "Maintenance Bond," and which bond must be approved by the City Council, and which bond is in addition to the bond given by the Contractor to guarantee the completion of the work. Said Maintenance Bond is in addition to pump guarantees that extend beyond this "Maintenance Bond". NOTICE OF HEARING CONTRACT NO. 716 Page 3 of 5 CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM / SUBCONTRACTING The program proposes numerical projections regarding utilization of Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and Women Business Enterprise (WBE) as Subcontractors, vendors and suppliers in the performance of Contracts awarded by the City of Waterloo, Iowa. A goal of at least ten percent (10%) for MBE participation on all City funded construction projects that are estimated at $50,000.00 or more. A goal of at least two percent (2%) for WBE participation on all City funded construction projects that are estimated at $50,000.00 or more. Any project funded in part or in total with federal funds shall follow the respective agencies contract compliance program and goals. The Prime Contractor shall make "good-faith efforts" to meet the Contract Compliance MBE/WBE goals. The MBE/WBE subcontractors, suppliers or vendors must provide the Prime Contractor a reasonably competitive price for the service being rendered or the Contractor is not required to accept their bid. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Time is an essential element of this contract. It is important that the work be diligently pursued to completion. If the work is not completed within the specified contract period, plus authorized extensions, the contractor shall pay to the City Liquidated Damages in the amount of seven hundred fifty dollars ($750.00) per day, for each day, as further described herein, in excess of the authorized time. Days beyond the specified completion date for which Liquidated Damages will be charged will be working days that the contractor does, or could have worked, from Monday through Saturday. Sundays will be counted only if work is performed. Partial working days will be considered as a full working day. Days not chargeable for Liquidated Damages will include rain days, Sunday if no work is done, and legal holidays. Working days will cease to be charged when only punch list items remain to be completed. Punch list items do not include contract bid items or approved change/extra work orders. When the Contractor believes the project to be substantially completed, a written notice stating the same shall be submitted to the Engineer and a request made for a Punch List. If the work under the Contract extends beyond the normal construction season for such work the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in writing a request that working days counted toward the project be suspended until work is resumed the following construction season. This amount is not construed as a penalty. These damages are for the cost to the City of providing the required additional inspection, engineering and contract administration. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Before the work is commenced on this contract, a conference shall be held for the purpose of discussing the contract. The conference shall be attended by the prime contractor, subcontractors and City Officials. NOTICE OF HEARING CONTRACT NO. 716 Page 4 of 5 RECIPROCAL RESIDENT BIDDER PREFERENCE Attention of bidders is called to the requirement of complying with the provisions of the Reciprocal Resident Bidder Preference requirement. Each bidder submitting a bid shall execute and include with the bid, a Resident Bidder Certification in the form herein provided, to the effect that he will not have as employees, Illinois laborers on the work site. SALES TAX EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES Contractors and approved subcontractors will be provided a Sales Tax Exemption Certification to purchase building materials or supplies in the performance of construction contracts let by the City of Waterloo. Published pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 26 of the Code of Iowa and upon order to the City Council of said Waterloo, Iowa, on the day of 2010. CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA BY: Suzy Schares City Clerk NOTICE OF REARING CONTRACT NO. 716 Page 6 of 5 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. EXPLANATIONS TO BIDDERS Any explanation desired by a bidder regarding the meaning or interpretation of the Notice to Bidders, Plans, Specifications, etc., must be requested in writing and with sufficient time allowed for a reply to reach bidders before submission of their bids. Any interpretation made will be in the form of an amendment of the Notice to Bidders, Plans, Specifications, etc., and will be furnished to all prospective bidders. Its receipt by the bidder must be acknowledged in the space provided on the Proposal Form or by letter or telegram received before the time set for opening of bids. Oral explanations or instructions given before the award of the contract will not be binding. 2. EXAMINATION OF PROPOSED WORK Bidders should visit the site and take such other steps as may be reasonably necessary to ascertain the nature and location of the work, and the general and local conditions which can affect the work or the cost thereof. Failure to do so will not relieve bidders from responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty or cost of successfully performing the work. The owner will assume no responsibility for any understanding or representation concerning conditions made by any of its officers or agents prior to the execution of the contract, unless included in the Notice to Bidders, the Specifications or related documents. 3. PREPARATION OF BIDS a. Bids shall be submitted on the forms furnished, or copies thereof, and must be manually signed. If erasures or other changes appear on the forms, each erasure or change must be initialed by the person signing the bid. The bidder has the option to submit a computer-generated spreadsheet in lieu of the portion of the Form of Bid or Proposal, which includes the Bid Item Number, Description, Unit, Estimated Quantity, Unit Bid Price, Total Bid Price, and Total Bid. The computer-generated spreadsheet shall include all of the information listed in that portion of the Form of Bid or Proposal as well as bear the signature of the Prime Contractor submitting the bid. For the bidders who submit a computer-generated spread- sheet, the TOTAL BID (with alternates, if applicable) shall also be indicated in the space(s) provided on the Form of Bid or Proposal. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Fage 1 of 13 b. The Bid Form may provide for submission of a price or prices for one or more items, which may be lump sum bids, alternate prices;- schedule items resulting in a bid on a unit of construction or a combination thereof, etc. When the Bid Form explicitly requires that the bidder bid on all items, failure to do so will disqualify the bid. When submission of a price on all items is not required, bidders should insert the words "no bid" in the space provided for any item on which no price is submitted. c. Unless called for, alternate bids will not be considered. d. Modifications of bids already submitted will be considered if received at the office designated in the Notice to Bidders by the time set for closing of bids. Telegraphic modifications will be considered, but should not reveal the amount of the original or revised bid. e. In preparing his bid, the bidder shall specify the price, written legibly in ink or with the typewriter, at which he proposes to do each item of work. The unit price shall be stated in figures in the blank space provided (i.e., $7.14). In items where unit price is required, the total amount of each item shall be computed at the unit prices bid for the quantities given on the Bid Form and stated in figures in the blank space provided. If the bidder chooses to submit the unit prices, total bid price, and total bid on a computer-generated spreadsheet, all numbers shall be easily legible. f. Any changes or alterations made in the Bid Form, or any addition thereto, may cause the rejection of the bid. No bid will be considered which contains a clause in which the contractor reserves the right to accept or reject a contract awarded him by the city Council of Waterloo. Bids in which the unit prices are obviously unbalanced may be rejected. 4. SUBMISSION OF BIDS a. A bid must be sealed in a separate envelope and marked to indicate its contents and be accompanied by the bid security in a separate envelope. If forwarded by mail, the two envelopes shall be placed in a third and mailed to the City Clerk/Auditor. All bids must be filed with the City Clerk/Auditor of the City of Waterloo at his office in the City Hall before the time specified for closing bids. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 2 of 13 b. Bids received prior to the advertised hour of opening will be securely kept sealed. The officer whose duty it is to open them will decide when the specified time has arrived, and no bid received thereafter will be considered; except that when a bid arrives by mail after the time fixed for opening, but before the reading of all other bids is completed, and it is shown to the satisfaction of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, that the non-arrival on time was due solely to delay in the mails for which the bidder was not responsible, such bid will be received and considered. c. Bidders are cautioned that, while telegraphic modifications of bids may be received as provided above, such modifications, if not explicit and if in any sense subject to misinterpretation, shall made the bid so modified or amended, subject to rejection. 5. LATE BIDS AND MODIFICATIONS OR WITHDRAWALS Bids and modifications or withdrawals thereof received at the office designated in the Notice to Bidders after the exact time set for closing of bids will not be considered. However, a modification which is received from an otherwise successful bidder, and which makes the terms of the bid more favorable to the City of Waterloo, will be considered at any time it is received and may therefore be accepted. Bids may be withdrawn by written or telegraphic request received from bidders prior to the time set for closing of bids. 6. PUBLIC OPENING OF BIDS Bids will be publicly opened at that time and place set for opening in the Notice to Bidders. Their content will be made public for the information of bidders and others interested who may be present either in person or by representative. 7. BID SECURITY REQUIRED All bids must be accompanied in a separate envelope by a certified or cashier's check drawn on an Iowa bank, or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States, a certified share draft drawn on a credit union in Iowa or chartered under the laws of the United States, or bid bond (on the form furnished by the City) payable to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in the sum of not less than five percent (5%) of the bid submitted, which certified check, certified share draft or bid bond will be held as security that the Bidder will enter into a Contract for the construction of the work and will furnish the required bonds, and in case the successful Bidder shall fail or refuse to enter into the Contract and furnish the required bond, his bid security may be retained by said City as agreed upon liquidated damages. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 3 of 13 This Contract Compliance Program does not propose to include any set-aside or quotas, but only flexible goals where "good-faith efforts" are required by the contractor to use MBE/WBE subcontractors. This Program shall not eliminate the need for contractors to continue their "good-faith efforts" in using MBE/WBE subcontractors on City contracts estimated at less than $50,000. The City of Waterloo will make every effort to reduce in-house construction and maintenance work that would be more cost effectively performed by the private sector and, thus, would allow additional bidding opportunities for MBE/WBE firms. The City Contract Compliance Officer shall be advised of all City of Waterloo awarded construction contracts. DEFINITIONS Goals: A flexible numerically expressed objective which contractors are required to make good-faith efforts." The key to the requirement is to make documented efforts. Goals are neither set-a-sides nor a device to achieve proportional representation or equal results. Numerical goals do not create set-a-sides for specific groups, nor are they designed to achieve proportional representation or equal results. Rather, the goal-setting process in affirmative action planning is used to target and measure the effectiveness of affirmative action efforts to eradicate and prevent discrimination. Quota: A flat numerical requirement that the contractor is required to meet in order to obtain the benefit or be in compliance. The numerical goal component of affirmative action programs is not designed to be, nor may it properly or lawfully be interpreted as, permitting unlawful preferential treatment and quotas with respect to persons of any race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The regulations at 41 CFR 60-2.12(a), 60-2.15 and 60-2.30, specifically prohibit discrimination and the use of goals as quotas. (U.S. Department of Labor) INSTRUCT[ONS TO BIDDERS Page 5 of 13 Set Aside: An arrangement in which a particular contract is reserved for competition solely among minority and women business enterprises. Contractor. As used in this document means contractor, subcontractor, supplier, vendor, and professional service provider. Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) Any business, which is at least 51%, owned by one or more minorities and whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more such individuals and is on the current State Unified Certification List, or were listed on the City of Waterloo Certified MBEIWBE Contractors list as of July 1, 2002 Women Business Enterprise (WBE): Any business which is at least 51% owned by one or more women and whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more such individuals and is on the current State Unified Certification List, or were listed on the City of Waterloo Certified MBE/WBE Contractors list as of July 1, 2002 Minority: Any person or persons who are considered as socially and economically disadvantaged because of their identity as a group member without regard to their individual qualities. The groups include: Black American, Hispanic American, Native Americans, Eskimos, Aleuts, and Asian-Pacific Americans. 13 C.F.R. 124- 1.1(c)(3)(ii)(1983). Lowest Responsible Bidder: Bidder who has offered the lowest bid and who has exhibited skill relative to the type of work bid on, judgment, financial responsibility, and evidence of working with the Affirmative Action Employment Program and the Contract Compliance Program. Broker: One buying or selling for others on commission or other fee basis without maintaining a warehouse or other similar inventory storage facility. Mayor's Advisory Committee: Mayor's Advisory Committee for Minority, Female, and Disadvantaged Business Enterprise. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 6 of 13 Good Faith Efforts: The successful bidder shall be selected on the basis of having submitted the lowest responsible bid. The obligation of the bidder is to make good faith efforts. The bidder can demonstrate that it has done so by the following: 1. The Prime Contractor met the project goal - No Action necessary 2. If the Prime Contractor failed to meet the goal, they must submit documentation of good faith efforts. CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM SUBCONTRACTING The program proposes numerical projections or goals regarding utilization of Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and Women Business Enterprise (WBE) as subcontractors in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Waterloo, Iowa. A goal of at least 10%for MBE participation on all City funded construction projects that are estimated at $50,000 or more and projects under $50,000 where applicable at the Contract Compliance Officers discretion. There is at least 2% WBE goal on City funded projects. Any project which is funded solely or in part with Federal funds shall follow the respective agencies_contract compliance program and goals. Any project which is funded solely or in part with State funds shall follow the respective agencies contract compliance program and goals. The City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Program is for City awarded construction contracts only. The prime contractor shall make "good-faith efforts" to meet the Contract Compliance MBE/WBE goals. The MBEIWBE subcontracts must provide the prime contractor a reasonably competitive price for the service being rendered or the contractor is not required to accept the bid. Administrative Reconsideration: As part of this reconsideration, the bidder will have the opportunity to provide written documentation or arguments concerning the issue of whether they made adequate good faith efforts to meet the goals. The bidder will have the opportunity to meet in person with the City of Waterloo's Administrative Reconsideration Committee to discuss the issue of whether they made adequate good faith efforts. The Administrative Reconsideration Committee will forward a written decision on reconsideration to the Mayor and City Council, explaining the basis for finding that the bidder did or did not meet the goal or make adequate good faith efforts to do so. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 7 of 13 Documentation required will include but is not limited to the following: * Making portions of the work available for MBEIWBE subcontracting * Evidence of negotiating with MBEIWBE firms * MBENVBE quotes obtained and non-MBEIWBE quotes used * Reasons agreements were not reached * Follow-up after initial solicitations * Efforts to assist in obtaining equipment, supplies and materials (at competitive prices), bonding, lines of credit, insurance, etc. * Evidence of past compliance or non-compliance by same contractor The Contract Compliance Officer will determine the weight to be given to each item listed above (supported by appropriate documentation) based on overall program goals. RESPONSIBILITIES 1. City of Waterloo A. The City Contract Compliance Officer has the responsibility to assure the City's compliance with Federal, State and Municipal regulations. B. The City Contract Compliance Officer is responsible for maintaining a current directory of certified firms. Certification of MBE/WBEIDBE contractors is through the Iowa Department of Transportation and its Unified Certification Program. Only firms certified based on guidelines prescribed in 49 CFR Part 26 and provisions of this agreement, shall be recognized as certified by the City of Waterloo. C. The City Contract Compliance Officer is responsible for making available a list of future project information notices to MBE/WBE firrns. D. The City Contract Compliance Officer shall send notices to appropriate MBEIWBE firms in the directory of each bid solicitation with opening date. E. The City Contract Compliance Officer will receive MBE/WBE Letter(s) of Intent to Bid and within two (2) business days forward the complete list of MBE/WBE bidders who submitted a Letter of Intent to Bid to prime contractors. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 8 of 13 Ii. Prime Contractors In order to be in compliance with the guidelines of this program, the prime contractor must show good-faith efforts in following the MBE/WBE Contract Compliance Program. Good-faith efforts include, but are not limited to, the following: A. Prime contractors shall send solicitation letters (Form CCO- 3) to appropriate MBENVBE (those certified in directory prepared by City Contract Compliance Officer) at least seven (7) working days prior to bid date. Letters should identify specific items to be subcontracted. A minimum of three (3) disadvantaged business contacts must be made and documented, if there are at least three disadvantaged businesses offering services in the area to be subcontracted (See City of Waterloo MBENVBE Certification List). If less than three (3) are offering the services to be subcontracted, then a contact is required for any that are listed as providing that service. If the Prime Contractor submits a MBENVBE contact not on the City's MBE/WBE list, attach a copy of the MBENVBE/DBE Certifications from another government agency. B. If a prime contract bidder is unable to identify MBENVBE firms to perform portions of the work, the City Contract Compliance Officer should be contacted for assistance immediately. C. Prime contract bidders may solicit MBENVBE proposals by telephone or personal interviews, but all such contacts shall be confirmed by Certified Mail, or subcontract bid request forms (Form CCO-2). D. If any MBENVBE business submitting bids is not selected for subcontract award, documentation must accompany the "MBENVBE Business Enterprise Pre-Bid Contact Information Form" (Form CCO-4 and CCO-4A) on why the MBEANBE was not selected. These reasons could include: a. Not low bid. Copies of the competing bids may be required for verification. b. MBE/WBE did not bid, withdrew bid or non-responsive. c. Documentation of other business-related reason for not selecting the MBE/WBE business for a subcontract. d. Prime contractor self performs work. e. Any other reason relied on by prime. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 9 of 13 The Contract Compliance Officer will determine the weight to be given to each item listed above (supported by appropriate documentation) based on overall program goals. !!!. MBEJWBE Firms A. MBENVBE firms shall be certified by the Iowa Department of Transportation as owners and controllers of their respective businesses, or were listed on the City of Waterloo Certified MBE/WBE Contractors list as of Jury 1, 2002. B. MBE/WBE firms must perform the work on the project; they cannot act as a broker by subcontracting the work out to others. C. Each MBE/WBE firm planning to submit quotes on construction projects with goals, shall submit a Letter of Intent to Bid (Form CCO-5) to the City Contract Compliance Officer seven (7) working days prior to bid opening, listing specific items which the MBE/WBE firm is interested in bidding. If sufficient Letters of Intent to Bid are not received by the City Contract Compliance Officer seven (7) working days prior to bid opening, goals on subject project will be reduced accordingly. Agreements between the bidder/proposer and a MBE/WBE in which the MBE/WBE promises not to provide subcontracting quotations to other bidders/proposers are prohibited. NON-COMPLIANCE OF CONTRACTORS A. Noncompliance exists when the contractor's actions are not consistent with the requirements of the Contract Compliance Program in the areas of employment and subcontracting. B. A bidder's failure to show good-faith efforts to meet project goals or a failure to use certified MBE/WBE firms may be grounds for finding its bid not responsible. C. The Contract Compliance Officer shall submit to City Council his/her recommendation on any non-compliant contract in writing. NOTICE TO PROCEED Notice to proceed on any project with goals wilt not be issued until City Contract Compliance Officer determines the lowest responsible bidder has used good-faith efforts to comply with this Compliance Program and the bid was responsive. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 10 of 13 CONCLUSION This program repeals or revises ail sections of previous Waterloo Contract Compliance Programs. 11. EMPLOYMENT AND BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY To the greatest extent feasible, suppliers, subcontractors, and low income workers owning businesses or living in the Waterloo area must be given priority in supplying materials, bidding for subcontract work, or applying for employment by the contractor on this project. Opportunities for training and for employment arising in connection with this project, shall to the greatest extent feasible be made available to lower income persons residing in the project area. The contract area is the City of Waterloo. The City of Waterloo will require the contractor to document his efforts in securing lower income workers living in the project area and in purchasing supplies from, and awarding subcontracts to, businesses owned by persons residing in the project area. 12. STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS Each bidder shall, upon request of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, submit on the form furnished for that purpose (a copy of which is included in the contract documents), a statement of bidder's qualifications, his experience record in constructing the type of improvements embraced, and his organization and equipment available for the work contemplated; and, when specifically requested, a detailed financial statement. The City of Waterloo, Iowa, shall have the right to take such steps as it deems necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform his obligations under the contract, and the bidder shall furnish the City of Waterloo, Iowa, all such information and data for this purpose as it may request. The right is reserved to reject any bid where an investigation of the available evidence or information does not satisfy the City of Waterloo, Iowa, that the bidder is qualified to carry out properly the terms of the contract. 13. AWARD OF CONTRACT a. Award of contract will be made to that responsive and responsible bidder whose bid, conforming to the Specifications, is most advantageous to the City of Waterloo; price and other factors considered. The intention is to award the contract at any time of opening bids, but the right is reserved to postpone such action for a reasonable time, not exceeding thirty (30) days. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 11 of 13 b. The City Council may, when in its interest, reject any or all bids or waive any informality in bids received. c. The bidder shall submit bids on all the items listed in the proposal and shall state the unit bid price in words in the blank spaces provided beneath the item description. Should there be any discrepancy between the unit bid price in words and listed numeral unit bid price, the City of Waterloo shall consider the unit bid price in words as being the valid unit bid price. A computer-generated spreadsheet as herein provided shall also be acceptable. Proposals requiring mathematical computations to determine unit prices or totals will be rejected. A contract will be awarded to the qualified bidder submitting the lowest total bid as indicated in the NOTICE TO BIDDERS. 14. EXECUTION OF AGREEMENT, BONDS, AND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE a. Subsequent to the award and within ten (10) days after the prescribed forms are presented for signature, the successful bidder shall execute and deliver to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, an agreement in the form included in the contract documents in such number of copies as the City of Waterloo, Iowa, may require. b. Having satisfied all conditions of award as set forth elsewhere in these documents, the successful bidder shall, within the period specified in paragraph "a" above, furnish a surety bond and a payment bond in a penal sum not less than the amount of the contract as awarded, as security for the faithful performance of the contract and terms and conditions therein contained and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all persons, firms, or corporations to whom the contractor may become legally indebted for labor, materials, tools, equipment, or services of any nature including utility and transportation services, employed or used by him in performing the work. The bonds shall protect and save harmless the City from claims and damages of any kind caused by the operations of the contractor and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the contract improvements for the period stated in the Notice of Hearing from and after completion of said improvements and their acceptance by the City. Such bonds shall be in the same form as that included in the contract documents and shall bear the same date as, or a date subsequent to that of the agreement. The current Power of Attorney for the person who signs for any surety company shall be attached to such bonds. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 12 of 13 c. The successful bidder shall, within the period specified in paragraph "a" above, furnish a certificate of insurance for approval in amounts of not less than the amounts specified in the General Specifications for Construction, Section F. No. 4 "Liability Insurance," Pages 14 to 15 of 19 Pages. The certificate of insurance shall be furnished in such number of copies as the City of Waterloo may require. The City of Waterloo shall be named as an "Additional Insured." The contractor shall similarly submit his subcontractor's certificates of insurance in the amounts for approval before each commences work. The contractor shall carry or require that there be Workmen's Compensation Insurance for all his employees and those of his subcontractors engaged in work at the site, in accordance with State Workmen's Compensation Laws. d. The failure of the successful bidder to execute such agreement and to supply the required bond or bonds within ten (10) days after the prescribed forms are presented for signature, or within such extended period as the City of Waterloo, Iowa, may grant, based upon reasons determined sufficient by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, may either award the contract to the next lowest bidder or re- advertise for bids, and may charge against the bidder the difference between the amount of the bid an the amount for which a contract for the work is subsequently executed, irrespective of whether the amount thus due exceeds the amount of the bid guaranty. If a more favorable bid is received by re-advertising, the defaulting bidder shall have no claim against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, for a refund. 15. RECIPROCAL RESIDENT BIDDER PREFERENCE Attention of bidders is called to the requirement of complying with the provisions of the Reciprocal Resident Bidder Preference requirement. Each bidder submitting a bid shall execute and include with the bid, a Resident Bidder Certification in the form herein provided, to the effect that he will not have as employees, Illinois laborers on the work site. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 13 of 13 FORM OF BID OR PROPOSAL F.Y. 2010 E. SIXTH ST. STORM PUMP STATION IMPROVEMENTS CONTRACT NO. 716 CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA Honorable Mayor and City Council Waterloo, Iowa Gentlemen: 1. The undersigned, being a Corporation existing under the laws of the State of , a Partnership consisting of the following partners: , having familiarized (himself)(themselves)(itself) with the existing conditions on the project area affecting the cost of the work, and with all the contract documents listed in the Table of Contents and Addenda(if any), as prepared by Wayne Claassen Engineering and Surveying, Inc., Waterloo, Iowa now on file in the office of the City Clerk, City Hall, Waterloo, Iowa, hereby proposes to furnish all supervision, technical personnel, labor, materials, machinery, tools, appurtenances, equipment, and services, including utility and transportation services required to construct and complete this F.Y. 2010 E. SIXTH ST. STORM PUMP STATION IMPROVEMENTS CONTRACT NO. 716, all in accordance with the above-listed documents and for the unit prices for work in place for the following items and quantities: TOTAL PROJECT LUMP SUM BID $ _ 2. In submitting this bid, the bidder understands that the right is reserved by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, to reject any or all bids. If written notice of the acceptance of this bid is mailed, telegraphed, or delivered to the undersigned within thirty (30) days after the opening thereof, or at any time thereafter before this bid is withdrawn, the undersigned agrees to execute and deliver an agreement in the prescribed form and furnish the required bond and certificate of the insurance within ten (10) days after the agreement is presented to him for signature, and start work within ten (10) days after"Notice to Proceed" is issued. 3. Security in the sum of Dollars($ ) in the form of is submitted herewith in accordance with the INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. 4. Attached hereto is a Non-Collusion Affidavit of Prime Contractor. FORM OF BID CONTRACT NO. 716 Page 1 of 3 5. Attached hereto is a Resident Bidder Certification. 6. The bidder is prepared to submit a financial and experience statement upon request. 7. The Prime Contractor and Subcontractor(s), which have performed an aggregate of $10,000.00 in work for the City in the current calendar year, are prepared to submit an AAP or Update and an EOC, within ten (10) days of notification that the bid submitted is lowest and acceptable. 8. The bidder has received the following Addendum or Addenda: Addendum No. Date 9. The bidder shall list the MBEIWBE subcontractor(s), amount of subcontracts and bid items on the City of Waterloo Minority and/or Women Business Pre-bid Contact Information Form submitted with this Form of Bid or Proposal. The apparent low Bidder shall submit a list of all other Subcontractor(s) to be used on this Project to the City of Waterloo by 5:00 p.m. the business day following the day Bids on this Project are due along with the Non-Collusion Affidavits of All Subcontractor(s).The Contractor shall submit information on subcontractors on "SUBCONTRACTOR REQUEST AND APPROVAL" Form to be provided by City prior to approval of contract. The subcontractors listed on this proposal and/or submitted to the Contract Compliance Officer cannot be changed except for the following reasons: 1) The City of Waterloo does not approve the subcontractors. 2) The subcontractors submit in writing that they cannot fulfill their subcontracts. 10. The bidder has filled in all blanks on this proposal. Those blanks not applicable are marked "none"or"NA". 11. The bidder has attached all applicable forms. 12. The Owner reserves the right to select alternates, delete line items, and/or to reduce quantities prior to the award of a contract due to budgetary limitations. FORM OF BID CONTRACT NO. 716 Page 2 of 3 INFORMATION NEEDED FOR IOWA CONSTRUCTION SALES TAX EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE CONTRACTOR NAME: ADDRESS: (Check One) PRIME SUBCONTRACTOR FEDERAL ID#: PROJECT NAME: PROJECT CONTRACT NO.: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: _ El Brickwork 0 Landscaping ❑ Carpentry 0 Painting ❑ Concrete 0 Paving ❑ DrywaIl-Plaster-Insulation 0 Plumbing O Electrical 0 Roofing-Siding-Sheet Metal ❑ Excavation/Grading ❑ Windows ❑ Flooring 0 Wrecking-Demolition ❑ Heavy Construction ❑ Other (Please specify) ❑ Heating-Ventilating-Air Cond. FORM OF BID OR PROPOSAL F.Y. 2010 E. SIXTH ST. STORM PUMP STATION IMPROVEMENTS CONTRACT NO. 716 CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA Honorable Mayor and City Council Waterloo, Iowa Gentlemen: 1. The undersigned, being a Corporation existing under the laws of the State of , a Partnership consisting of the following partners: having familiarized (himself) (themselves) (itself) with the existing conditions on the project area affecting the cost of the work, and with all the contract documents listed in the Table of Contents and Addenda (if any), as prepared by Wayne Claassen Engineering and Surveying, Inc., Waterloo, Iowa now on file in the office of the City Clerk, City Hall, Waterloo, Iowa, hereby proposes to furnish all supervision, technical personnel, labor, materials, machinery, tools, appurtenances, equipment, and services, including utility and transportation services required to construct and complete this F.Y. 2010 E. SIXTH ST. STORM PUMP STATION IMPROVEMENTS, Contract No. 716, all in accordance with the above-listed documents and for the unit prices for work in place for the following items and quantities: TOTAL PROJECT LUMP SUM BID 2. In submitting this bid, the bidder understands that the right is reserved by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, to reject any or all bids. If written notice of the acceptance of this bid is mailed, telegraphed, or delivered to the undersigned within thirty (30) days after the opening thereof, or at any time thereafter before this bid is withdrawn, the undersigned agrees to execute and deliver an agreement in the prescribed form and furnish the required bond and certificate of the insurance within ten (10) days after the agreement is presented to him for signature, and start work within ten (10) days after "Notice to Proceed" is issued. 3. Security in the sum of _ Dollars ($ ) in the form of is submitted herewith in accordance with the INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. 4. Attached hereto is a Non-Collusion Affidavit of Prime Contractor. FORM OF BID CONTRACT NO. 716 Page 1 of 3 5. Attached hereto is a Resident Bidder Certification. 6. The bidder is prepared to submit a financial and experience statement upon request. 7. The Prime Contractor and Subcontractor(s), which have performed an aggregate of $10,000.00 in work for the City in the current calendar year, are prepared to submit an AAP or Update and an EOC, within ten (10) days of notification that the bid submitted is lowest and acceptable. 8. The bidder has received the following Addendum or Addenda: Addendum No. Date 9. The bidder shall list the MBE1WBE subcontractor(s), amount of subcontracts and bid items on the City of Waterloo Minority and/or Women Business Pre-bid Contact Information Form submitted with this Form of Bid or Proposal. The apparent low Bidder shall submit a list of all other Subcontractor(s) to be used on this Project to the City of Waterloo by 5:00 p.m. the business day following the day Bids on this Project are due along with the Non-Collusion Affidavits of All Subcontractor(s). The Contractor shall submit information on subcontractors on "SUBCONTRACTOR REQUEST AND APPROVAL" Form to be provided by City prior to approval of contract. The subcontractors listed on this proposal and/or submitted to the Contract Compliance Officer cannot be changed except for the following reasons: 1) The City of Waterloo does not approve the subcontractors. 2) The subcontractors submit in writing that they cannot fulfill their subcontracts. 10. The bidder has filled in all blanks on this proposal. Those blanks not applicable are marked "none" or"NA". 11. The bidder has attached all applicable forms. 12. The Owner reserves the right to select alternates, delete line items, and/or to reduce quantities prior to the award of a contract due to budgetary limitations. FORM OF BID CONTRACT NO. 716 Page 2 of 3 (Name of Bidder) (Date) BY: Title Official Address: (Including Zip Code): I.R.S. No. FORM OF BID CONTRACT NO, 716 Page 3 of 3 BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, as Principal, and as Surety are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF WATERLOO , Iowa, hereinafter called "OWNER." In the penal sum Dollars ($ ) lawful money of the United States, for the payment -- of which sum will and truly be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors,jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. The condition of this obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted the accompanying bid dated the day of , 20 , for F.Y. 2010 E. SIXTH ST. STORM PUMP STATION IMPROVEMENTS, Contract No. 716. NOW, THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate, (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the form specified and shall furnish a bond for his faithful performance of said contract, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid, Then this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect; it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated. By virtue of statutory authority, the full amount of this bid bond shall be forfeited to the Owner in liquidation of damages sustained in the event that the Principal fails to execute the contract and provide the bond as provided in the specifications or by law. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its bond shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid or execute such contract; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety, have hereunto set their hands and seals, and such of them as are corporations, have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their proper officers this day of A.D. 2010. Principal (Seal) By (Title) Witness (Seal) Surety By Witness Attorney-in-fact NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF PRIME BIDDER State of _ J )ss County of , being first duly sworn, deposes and says that: — 1. He is (Owner, Partner, Officer, Representative, or Agent) , of , the Bidder that has submitted the attached Bid; 2. He is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the attached Bid and of all pertinent circumstances respecting such Bid; 3. Such Bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Bid; 4. Neither the said Bidder nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in — any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any other Bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham Bid in connection with the Contract for which the attached Bid has been submitted or to refrain from _ bidding in connection with such Contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion or communication or conference with any other Bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in the attached Bid or of any other Bidder, or, to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of the bid price or the bid price of any other Bidder, or to secure through any collusion, conspiracy, connivance, or unlawful agreement any advantage against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, or any person interested in the Proposed Contract; and 5. The price or prices quoted in the attached Bid are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the Bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant. y (Signed) Title Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of _, 201_ Title My commission expires NON—COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF SUBCONTRACTOR State of ) ss: County of ) , being first duly sworn, deposes and says that: 1. He is (Owner, Partner, Officer, Representative, or Agent) , of hereinafter referred to as the "Subcontractor;" 2. He is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the subcontractor's proposal submitted by the subcontractor to , contract pertaining to the project in • (City or County and State) 3. Such subcontractor's proposal is genuine and is not a collusive or sham proposal; 4. Neither the subcontractor nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any other bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham proposal in connection with such contract or to refrain from submitting a proposal in connection with such contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by unlawful agreement or connivance with any other bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in said subcontractor's proposal, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of the price of prices in said subcontractor's proposal, or to secure through collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement any advantage against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, or any person interested in the proposed contract; and 5. The price or prices quoted in the subcontractor's proposal are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant. (Signed) Title — Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 201 . Title —. My commission expires EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE (As provided in Executive Order No. 11246) All contractors, subcontractors, vendors and suppliers of goods and services doing business with the City and value of said business equals or exceeds ter thousand dollars ($10,000.00) annually agree as follows: 1. The contractors, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, creed, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or physical handicap, political opinions or affiliations. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier will develop an Affirmative Action program to ensure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, creed, color, sex, national origin, religion, economic status, age, mental or physical disability, political opinions or affiliations. Such actions shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Employment b. Upgrading c. Demotion or Transfer d. Recruitment and Advertising e. Layoff or Termination f. Rates of Pay or Other Forms of Compensation g. Selection for Training including Apprenticeship 2. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, creed, color, sex, national origin, religion, economic status, age, mental or physical disabilities, political opinion or affiliations. 3. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier or his/her collective bargaining representative will send to each labor union or representative of workers which he/she has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising said labor union or workers' representative of the contractor's commitment under this section. 4. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will comply with all published rules, regulations, directives, and order of the City of Waterloo Affirmative Action Program Contract Compliance Provisions. 5. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will furnish and file compliance reports within such time and upon such forms as provided by the Affirmative Action Officer. Said forms will elicit information as to the policies, procedures, patterns, and practices of each subcontractor as well as the contractor himself/herself and said contractor, subcontractor, vendor and EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE PAGE 1 OF 2 PAGES supplier will permit access to his/her employment books, records and accounts to the City's Affirmative Action Officer, for the purpose of investigation to ascertain compliance with this contract and with rules and regulations of the City's Affirmative Action Program—Contract Compliance Provisions relative to Resolution No. 24664. 6. In the event of the contractor's non-compliance with the non-discrimination clauses of this contract or with any of such rules, regulations and orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated or suspended in whole or in part and the contractor may be declared ineligible for further contracts in accordance with procedures authorized by the City Council. 7. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will include, or incorporate by reference, the provisions of the non-discrimination clause in every contract, subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by the rules, regulations or orders of the City's Affirmative Action Program, and will provide in every subcontract, or purchase order that said provisions will be binding upon each contractor, subcontractor, or supplier. 8. We, the undersigned, recognize that we are morally and legally committed to non-discrimination in employment. Any person who applies for employment with our company will not be discriminated against because of race, creed, color, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or physical disabilities. (Signed) (Appropriate Official) (Title) (Date) EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE PAGE 2 OF 2 PAGES RECIPROCAL RESIDENT BIDDER PREFERENCE In response to Illinois' law concerning resident preference and in accordance with Section 73A.21 of the Iowa Code, all non-federal-aid public imrovement projects, which include road construction, shall be performed by a qualified resident bidder. The resident bidder has been further defined as follows: To be a qualified resident bidder, the person, corporation, partnership, or firm shall not have, as employees, Illinois laborers on the work site of a non-federal-aid project within Iowa. An Illinois laborer is any person who has resided in Illinois for at least 30 days and intends to become or remain an Illinois resident. This applies to all labor on the project, whether skilled, semi-skilled, or unskilled; whether manual or non-manual. This also applies to work subcontracted by or to the resident bidder on a non-federal-aid project within Iowa. The resident bidder may place on such work no more than three residents of Illinois who are his regularly employed executive and technical experts. As noted, this definition gives a preference as to whom the contractors or subcontractors can employ. The contractor shall provide the City with a certification that he is a qualified resident bidder according to the above definition. The Certification shall be submitted with the contractor's bid. A copy of the form of "Resident Bidder Certification" is included in the Contract Documents. If it is determined that the contractor does not meet this qualification after he begins work, a shutdown notice shall be issued and the voiding of the contract shall begin unless the contractor becomes qualified. DJG/cs 01/13/97 RESIDENT BIDDER CERTIFICATION CONTRACT NO: PROJECT NAME: DATE OF LETTING: To be a qualified resident bidder, the person, corporation, partnership, or firm shall not have, as employees, Illinois laborers on the work site of a non-federal- aid project within Iowa. An Illinois laborer is any person who has resided in Illinois for at least 30 days and intends to become or remain an Illinois resident. This applies to all labor on the project, whether skilled, semi-skilled, or unskilled, whether manual or non-manual. This also applies to work subcontracted by or to the resident bidder on a non-federal-aid project within Iowa. The resident bidder may place on such work no more than three residents of Illinois who are his regularly employed executive and technical experts. This qualification as resident bidder shall be maintained by the contractor and his subcontractors at the work site until this project is completed. I hereby certify that no Illinois resident laborer as defined above will be employed at the work site during the contract period from the start of the project until its completion. COMPANY NAME CORPORATE OFFICER TITLE DATE Revised February 2003 CONTRACTOR'S OR SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PROGRAM Check box that applies to party completing program: ( ) General Contractor ( ) Subcontractor Section A to be completed by GENERAL CONTRACTORS only: A. Name of Company Address of Company Zip Telephone Number ( } Federal ID Number (if no Federal ID Number, Owner/President's Social Security Number) Name of Equal Employment Officer Name of Project Project Contract Number Estimated Construction Work Dates 1 Start Finish Section B to be completed by SUBCONTRACTORS only: B. Name of General or Prime Contractor Name of Subcontractor Subcontractor's Address Zip Subcontractor's Telephone Number ( } Subcontractor's Federal ID Number (if no Federal ID Number Owner/President's Social Security Number)_ Name of Equal Employment Officer - 1 - C. Remainder of program to be completed by party completing program, either Prime or Subcontractor. 1. The Owners and/or Principals of your company: Ethnic Name Address Position Sex Origin 2. Other Areas of Interest: If your company has branches or subsidiaries, or if your company is a branch or subsidiary of a parent organization, give the following information: Type of Name Address Affiliation Degree II. EMPLOYER'S POLICY (Please read carefully.) A. We, the undersigned, recognize that we are morally and legally committed to nondiscrimination in employment. Any person who applies for employment with our company will not be discriminated against because of race, color, creed, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or physical handicap. B. The employment policies and practices of the undersigned are to recruit and hire employees without discrimination, and to treat them equally with respect to compensation and opportunities for advancement, including training, upgrading, promotion, and transfer. However, we realize the inequities associated with employment training, upgrading, contracting and subcontracting for minorities and women and we will direct our efforts to correcting any deficiencies to the maximum extent possible. The same will be required of our SUBCONTRACTORS and suppliers. C. We submit this program to assure compliance with Executive Order 11246, as amended, and other subsequent orders that may pertain to equal employment opportunity and merit employment policies, fully - 2 - realizing that our qualification and/or merit system should be evaluated and revised, if necessary. D. We agree to put forth the maximum effort to achieve full employment and utilization of capabilities and productivity of all our citizens without regard to race, creed, color, sex, national origin, economic status, age, and mental or physical handicap. E. will give training (Name of Company) and employment opportunities to local residents of Waterloo, Iowa, to the greatest extent feasible. III. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION A. recognizes that the (Name of Company) effective application of a policy of merit employment involves more than just a policy statement, and (Name of Company) will, therefore, re-evaluate our Affirmative Action Program to ensure that equal employment opportunities are available on the basis of individual merit, and to actively encourage minorities, women and local residents to seek employment with our company on this basis. B. will undertake the (Name of Company) following six (6) steps to improve our Affirmative Action Program: 1. Minority Recruitment and Employment; 2. Local Recruitment and Employment; 3. Disabled Veteran and Vietnam Era Veteran Recruitment and Employment; 4. Handicapped Recruitment and Employment; 5. Female Recruitment and Employment; and 6. Training, Upgrading and Promotional Opportunities. C. will take (Name of Company) whatever steps are necessary to ensure that our total work force has adequate minority, female, and local representation. We will utilize the following methods in our recruitment attempts: 1. Local advertising media (newspapers, radio, TV); 2. Community organizations (churches, clubs, schools); 3. Public and private institutions in the area (UNI, Hawkeye Community College); 4. Job Service of Iowa; and 5. Other. - 3 - O. will seek qualified minority, (Name of Company) female, and local group applicants for all job categories and will make asserted efforts to increase minority, female and group representation in occupations at the higher levels or skill and responsibility. E. Ali sources of employment used shall be aware that we are an Equal Employment Opportunity Employer. Labor organizations representing our employees will be notified of our Equal Employment Opportunity Policy and Affirmative Action Program. F. Training, upgrading, promotion and transfer activities at all levels will be monitored to ensure that full consideration has been given to qualified minority, female, and local group employees. G. will encourage other (Name of Company) companies with whom we are associated and/or do business, to do the same and we will assist them in their efforts. H. has taken the following (Name of Company) Affirmative Action to ensure that minority, female, local contractors and/or suppliers were provided opportunities to negotiate and/or bid on this project: (if none, write "NONE") 1. 2. As a result of the above efforts, we have involved minority, female, and local contractors and/or suppliers in the following areas of subcontracting: (if none, write "NONE") 1. 2. J. will require approved (Name of Company) Affirmative Action Programs from all nonexempt contractors who propose to work on this project and will take whatever steps are necessary to ensure that non-minority contractors have adequate representation of minority, female and local persons in their total work force. - 4 - K. In further accordance with rules and guidelines issued pursuant to Executive Order 11246 as amended, we establish the goals for our company, based on parity percentages supplied by the City, and we realize these goals will be reviewed on an annual basis. L. will keep records of (Name of Company) specific actions relative to recruitment, employment, training, upgrading and promotion and will provide the City of Waterloo with any information relative to same, including activities of our SUBCONTRACTORS and suppliers as necessary or when requested. M. Parity figures for companies located in Waterloo are as follows: Minority Parity = .08 (8%) N. Affirmative Action (Name of Company) Employment Goats: The definition of Affirmative Action Goals is as follows: "Goals may not be rigid and inflexible quotas which must be met, but must be targets, reasonably attainable by means of applying every good faith effort to make all aspects of the entire Affirmative Action Program work." For the year 201_, please submit percentage targets for employing minorities and women. If you already have reached your target for hiring minorities and women, please submit that percentage *Goals for Minorities: Goals for Women: a/o *Your affirmative action goals should be between 1% and 10% or more for minorities and 1% and 5% or more for women. Please be advised that the goals or targets are purely your estimation of how many women and minorities your company can reasonably expect to hire in 201_. Note, that none of the goals are rigid or inflexible. They are targets that your company calculates as reasonably attainable. This will help the City in its monitoring procedures as required by City of Waterloo Resolution No. 1984-142(4). - 5 - CONTRACTOR'S TOTAL WORK FORCE (WATERLOO) HOURLY NAME AND ADDRESS JOB CATEGORY RACE SEX WAGE INDICATE: DISABLED VETERAN: DV VIETNAM ERA VETERAN: VV HANDICAPPED: H - 6 - We hereby certify that we are in compliance with all City and Federal Affirmative Action Regulations and agree to accept all liability for failure to comply. Respectfully submitted, By: Company Executive Date By: Equal Employment Opportunity Officer Date City of Waterloo Affirmative Action Officer Approved _ Disapproved Reason: By: Date: - 7 - DESCRIPTION OF JOB CATEGORIES 1. Officials/Manager: Occupations in which employees set broad policies, exercise overall responsibility for execution of all policies, or direct individual departments or special phases of the agency's operations or provide specialized consultation on a regional, district or area basis. Includes: department heads, bureau chiefs, division chiefs, directors, deputy directors, controllers, examiners, wardens, superintendents, unit supervisors, sheriffs, police and fire chiefs and inspectors and kindred workers. 2. Professionals: Occupations which require specialized and theoretical knowledge which is usually required through college training or thorough work experience and other training which provides comparable knowledge. Includes: personnel and labor relations workers, social workers, doctors, psychologists, registered nurses, economists, dietitians, lawyers, system analysts, accountants, engineers, employment and vocational rehabilitation counselors, teachers or instructors, police and fire captains and lieutenants and kindred workers. - 3. Technicians: Occupations which require a combination of basic scientific or technical knowledge and manual skill which can be obtained through specialized post-secondary school education and through equivalent on-the- job training. Includes: computer programmers and operations, draftsmen, surveyors, licensed practical nurses, photographs, radio operators, technical illustrators, police and fire sergeants and kindred workers. 4. Office/Clerical: Workers are responsible for internal and external communication, recording and retrieval of data and/or information and other paper work required in an office. Includes: bookkeepers, messengers, office machine operators, clerk-typists, stenographers, court transcribers, hearing reporters, statistical clerks, dispatchers, license distributors, payroll clerks and kindred workers. 5. Skilled Craft Workers: Workers perform jobs which require special manual skill and a thorough and comprehensive knowledge of the processes involved in the work which is acquired through on-the-job training programs. Includes: Mechanics and repairman, electricians, heavy equipment operators, stationary engineers, skilled machine occupations, carpenters, compositors and typesetters and kindred workers. 6. Safes Workers: Occupations engaging wholly and primarily in direct selling. Includes: advertising agents and salesman, insurance agents and brokers, real estate agents and brokers, stock and bond salesmen, demonstrators, salesmen and sales clerks, grocery clerks and cashier checkers, and kindred workers. - 8 - 7. Operatives (semiskilled): Workers who operate machine or processing equipment or perform other factory-type duties of intermediate skill level which can be mastered in a few weeks and require only limited training. Includes: apprentices (auto mechanics), plumbers, building trades, metal working trades, bricklayers, carpenters, electricians, machinists, mechanics, printing trades, etc., operatives, attendants (auto service and parking), plasterers, chauffeurs, deliverymen and furnacemen, heaters (metal), laundry and dry cleaning operatives, milliners, mine operatives and laborers, motormen, oilers and greasers, (except auto painters), (except construction and maintenance), photographic process workers, stationary fireman, truck and tractor drivers, weavers, (textile), welders and flame cutters and kindred workers. 13. Laborers (unskilled): Workers in manual occupations which generally require no special training. Perform elementary duties that may be learned in few days and require the application of little or no independent judgment. Includes: garage laborers, car washers and greasers, gardeners (except farm) and groundskeepers, longshoremen, and stevedores, lumbermen, raftsmen and woodchoppers, laborers performing lifing, digging, mixing, loading and pulling operations and kindred workers. 9. Apprentices: Persons employed in a program including work training and related instruction to learn a trade or craft which is traditionally an apprenticeship, regardless of whether the program is registered with a Federal or State agency. 10. Trainees (on-the-job): Production. . . persons in formal training for craftsmen when not trained under apprentice programs--operative laborer, and service occupations. White Collar. . . persons engaged in formal training for clerical, managerial, professional, technical, sales, office and clerical occupations. - 9 - ITEMS OF POTENTIAL MBE/WBE PARTICIPATION NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS: The following are items from the F.Y.2010 E. SIXTH ST. STORM PUMP STATION IMPROVEMENTS CONTRACT NO. 716, that have a potential for MBEIWBE Participation. _ This listing,however,is not intended to be all encompassing; to preclude MBE/WBE Contractors from bidding on any items of the Proposal as a Subcontractor or the entire Proposal as a Prime Contractor. All Bid Items are available for MBEIWBE Participation MBE/WBE GOALS FOR THIS PROJECT IMPORTANT: Prime Contract Bidders should be aware that ten percent(10%)MBE goal and a two percent(2%)WBE goal is attached to this project. "Certified Return Receipt" letters are no [onger needed with the bid showing proof of contacting MBE or WBE Subcontractors,but the Pre- Bid Contact Information Form must be filled out completely. City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Officer: Contract Compliance Officer Community Development Board Carnegie Annex, Suite 202 620 Mulberry Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319)291-4429 SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID REQUEST FORM PRIME BIDDER'S LETTERHEAD Contract No.: Letting Date: I, (subcontractor's name), hereby attest that I have been solicited for a bid on (project name) in the area of (description of work and bid item no.). (Prime contractor) has informed me that if I am interested in bidding, a subcontracting bid proposal must be submitted to the company office by (date) and (time). Subcontractor's Compar y Name Date Subcontractor's Signature Date Prime Bidder's Signature LETTER TO BE USED WHEN SOLICITING FOR SUBCONTRACTOR QUOTES Subcontractor Company Name Address RE: Contract No.: Dear • (Prime Contractor's Company Name) is presently soliciting for the following work in connection with the above referenced project. (insert bid Item Nos. and Description of Work) (Prime Contractor's Company Name) is an Equal Opportunity Employer, and all qualified bidders will not be discriminated against due to race, religion, color, sex, or origin. If interested in bidding your proposal must be turned in to this office by and (Date) (Time) Sincerely, (Prime Contractor's Representative) Form COO-3 (11/28/2001) LETTER OF INTENT TO BID (MBEIWBE LETTER) According to the Current MBE/WBE Contract Compliance Program - 2002, all MBEIWBE Contractors interested in submitting subcontractor quotes on construction projects with goals, MUST submit a LETTER OF INTENT TO BID to the City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Officer at least seven (7) days prior to bid opening. The LETTER OF INTENT TO BID must list the specific items which the MBEIWBE Contractor is interested in bidding. Letter should include the following: Name of Project: Your Company Name: Address: Phone: Date: List of Specific items to be bid: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: (Subcontractor's Company Name and authorized signature) Return this LETTER OF INTENT TO BID to: Contract Compliance Officer Community Development Board 620 Mulberry St. Carnegie Annex, Suite 202 Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 291-4429 Form CCO-5(06-20-2002) E = 0 c Iv N o° coo a) Q mi d -,� N C w C _c p C 3 = CO "Cy ia' -d U ID 0 CS CO 40 6, 0 = s o C Ca d •A Q{ ti : co 3 N E U C 1 o a) : C. O ,_ ..... U cn O -0 m CD o :-+ CO a) = 5 = @ u) C C13 Ct3 � �, C/1 t� U 1- O 4 6) 6 XI CJ) - Q m 0 � I O C m ED > ?, O C O +Oi .-. a) oQ) cE) tid 0) 0 ❑ rn O O a) 0 0 .5 � C C U U 4) 0 A o ° o -g o 2 of Ca' N ❑ � NEo v)r) O _ ❑ CU n E CO 0 P. ? — doNLs ta @o al CO cri a, o W O C Cp O cn .N 0 0 I- 05 w Si2O J CL) „CW O N � t O C[1 O "0 0 cu ti w w F— € ° W o) c) W I— m m C . o13;) o m- CO CI) , as C U o C o o E o (1 00 C4 A b WI 0m � . Ladim of Z 0.� .� CO z rn , 2E o � a m � zW y WZ a9 mcu 75 °' 5 � ` RI = Z Z 'o "cc; ° 0- 3 Toco w N () 11 10 '5 p ❑ a) 0' o ZCA o O CO D ve4 on a)�. a 1— O 'L to HZ p+ 0.)W Z c a) ❑ ❑i to o w N Q _ }t CO 0 co(� a7.- ‘o � a ° P.s` UU) 2 � N � � r O L ❑ u N rt m "�{ CA W n w a , N u •~ m C LL W �' m m I- Q) U U7 o C C o Z b�+ V 2 W 013 -5 co ,- 0 .0 d Ui c as ce U) ISCc"' - cD N C2 m C�6 A O 3 0 m °0 U 7 p coW CO ,� N O U fl w d m } C C O z2 , coC Q N ZJ.j03 DU z. 7 7 LLJ d co o 15 w L O 2QWU O `w ra °7 Q7 Z N < m O r= •C y 0, 4 E 0 y [O a) � E os os o c4 U = ai ce .3 o n E a cv w c Ra +, n' z 3 D o � E • 2, Er,-- m o W o o co0 € „ ,,a) -D8 ° r -o2 0 5 ka U Ll! co N o ❑ �_ m Ls crl es C = ` H ..J -0 QU O O C a _Pi-("I, a `~ o Z < a) 2 ,- O 4) ��•II €I I°• U CQ cv ° ca {� �� a) c c ;e ¢i o C C f6 C -O L c0 .5 a) 03 0 Lr � ,` • , f c moo m ° 'N = °� E `��.1 .` O x ❑ O n _c ❑ C▪ T y ca a a Z a7 a 0 U) - .0 }- to `_ n1 E U ow C!) -0 R1 .c U) a) o �L -p co C E L w N CC a) N U o .a O z ca ro 1-7 7' @ a) in D cr CO O il] C a a) u- d - m ... c Q miii C N - f0 O C d 70 N a� � � Z CU,) '� L ,U a t a) a) Vi W 'C 0 0 C E N 3 'J C N ❑ m m a) F an C U E w ea C Q) ! a) m C '` ❑ E Q -0 CO W 7 N n ti U m 0 • CC z v a) mm 0 c _o 2 ,- 2 co Co o 0 -c d co f 0. am c 3z 2 Q U m m ro ro on UL. aCD 0 3 a a ❑ a • W LLLL , m e m o a NL0 a) c . co N N m .0 E o CR c4 C f6 Z � Q ac cE w fl-� � o 0' - - > c n ._ Q mN my � 03 c 0 Z mrn coin Cl) ocmro cm - . _ a) u, 0 L. c a) a) L. 3 N L ' ...� ram.+ _ co - ' N _c m N a) V � � � ❑ ro � 7 0 -.ao E E F• ° 0 a> E a, o � L N -0 0_ J 0 o-.fl re W in 3 o � — p '� c m N _ o CAN O a c A .S a) N >, v X co ❑o o c RL a Z w ro 6 J . .0 i C 75 7 10 sn_ O m LU as WD .c2 - Via) -• a) mo a w Dro 0 �nN `-' ram 1— m .0 1W C - C0 N C ti w 1m N N C 0 ZLL @ � � N Oyu EWat �7 c awo m E cav, ° o WZ roC0 Lo ❑ 0m as q Z mLLJ Wm -. g a) ❑ ca, a ro o a 3 n3a) 0) - - C� P a) aEa) ONm cw .c� a) ul 2 (Ts F. -c U yQ � � `m o N .0 Z � c o `° ¢ coo o W � � .• Er) N � c - t/7tY `- o � ro � � woQ > E _Z oo aas ,0 0 ❑ � � � U A o p ` N d E U C • o C.0 Q) M 0 � o ro o O ro o ro rn � � � >' � � CD 2 �. a) a) -c CO LCf! �� ❑ C F. C in a) m c � N od o Z a) "c o z c a) came w N �' 3 '� c o •rn c ` b Q' o LL! c`uo_ a) as i- uwiocnn 2 c, o ns m ❑ o oc ac a) dNN ¢ N m F- v- U al a) m o - c a) 0_ � . -a o 2 N o L - U � U �, c wU c ° c < o -N C � 02 CU n w p m w a, m � o o ro � o Q 3 2 E Zap EU :° o o m W c ,� � � �` o o 2 � co c,w =v ;g Z IS ° m � 0o m aroiL. c b ai y � E co o � 'L cc_a o c © cco ° cQvm c " co W °a oz � roo Um o3QCDrn V O N me mco ° c ro U °� a' m a) a ❑ O� Ey co E 10 c c G oar 5 w � a m LE ;E a) ma a) D Q c`uQ ma 03xa. c ov0 al CO .0 ns ❑ a m a a) ro woo N � o = o �WL Io 0-w o 3 m CN � Y M0 22, 0 . � m- o Nv c � a � =d .- c ca cE0 0 a) 4- a) v. oOvcz a � 'v, _o 1-3 _0 a o = nm o o E - 0_ "C) w N d c ) 26 -c U m = ro ,£ 7 a c - F 00 '3 O Ci) - 'o _2 w C.) ;° oQ E U - � ❑ a�a) < _ a) �7 L m 0 Vv > :p . EQ E02 W o co U w C a U a) 2 D O z-- a -.c. D m -tO c c Z m N c co m d o c 2 .> N NZ N � a a) v v _ c V a) oG 0 aw C ILL L ns oU d :+ O a7 m N N � Y eL o Na Z U Q- Ed c O] m a a7 U C . c C F CC� d coca) a0c a cWC , Y mWr E ❑ N y ❑ U av a N p Q E o c a)-Q cro _aO -_vo Zc o �v mc ctN c ro ° cr) EoC7N r�o .0caou caQ '-' n 'rnC _ Lro Q o c o °aw LU CO o a) . Cl) 4=- } -n C -N UoCD ai 'c3 1'W v .n >, amCk E ❑ .cEECrU3E et9v � mQm o ° U �W I-- 0_ a) a o@ L m c co) oa) om mpo ❑ occUo ct .._.,_2 •-c aconw e c 'F ° 4 • Qpm • ° o a0_ Q- z � ❑ - va R w p o ° 0 -a -E - m e o COm - 1 < a 0 -0 0)W ' ` � ra - U) CO 0o an �� v � coa El g Nc 0- � - m o c� c E � a) o a co .c c c C t U m •E EfE N c o o _a _cc coin U > o ro coa mN d dco � I-- = 0.mE O. Qn r c.)i o cv CJ c� m Wui uH o 7 ,-LL! _ co W CERTIFIED MBE / WBE CONTRACTORS CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA zri erio v \o _ CONTRACT COMPLIANCE OFFICE Community Development Board Carnegie Annex,Suite 202 620 Mulberry Street Waterloo,Iowa 50703 City WEB Site: www.ci.waterloo.ia.us Contract Compliance WEB Site for listing updates: http://www.wplwloo.lib.ia.ustcontractcampliancei Contact: Louis Starks, Contracts and Grants Coordinator Email: louis.starks 1 vaterloo-ia.org Phone: (319) 291-4429 -' Fax: (319) 291-4431 1BI:11WBE Certified Contractors List Page ? of § CERTIFIED MBE CONTRACTORS CARTER ELECTRIC 725 Adams Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319)232-9808 Pager: (319) 235-4021 ^' Contact: Derrick Carter Specializing in: ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR CULPEPPER ELECTRIC 1731 Cottage Grove Avenue Waterloo, IA 50707 Phone: (319) 235-0885 Fax: (319) 236-8177 Contact: Martin Culpepper Certified: City of Waterloo Certified MBE,Licensed Electrician — Specializing in: ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR DANIELS HOME IMPROVEMENT 339 Albany Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 961-1659 Contact: Sammy Daniels Specializing in: ALL TYPES OF CONCRETE FLATWORM, POURED WALLS—ALL TYPES, FOOTINGS, LIGHT DEMOLITION D.C. CORPORATION 426 Beech Street Waterloo,IA 50703 Phone: (319) 236-9075 FAX: (319) 236-0515 — Contact: Terry Phillips Certified: City of Waterloo Certified MBE, Iowa DOT, TSB Certified Specializing in: — COMMERCIAL AND RESIDENTIAL DEMOLITION, CONCRETE PAVING, DRIVEWAYS, TRUCKING(ALL TYPES), GENERAL CONSTRUCTION — MBE/1t'BE C'cnitied Contractors List Page o t .1 GREER'S WORKS 2003 Plainview Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 233-4701 Contact: Willie Greer Specializing in: DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CARPENTRY, ROOFING, GENERAL CONSTRUCTION LOVE'S ENTERPRISE 835 West Fifth St. P.O. Box 246 Waterloo, IA 50704 Phone: (319)233-3260 Contact: David Love Certified: Iowa DOT, City of Waterloo Certified MBE Specializing in: CONCRETE PAVING, ASPHALT, DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, TRUCKING OLD GREER'S WORKS 2309 Springview Street Waterloo, IA 50707 Phone: (319) 233-2150 Contact: David L. Greer, Sr. Specializing in: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION QUICK CONSTRUCTION 21'7 Bates Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 2154166 Contact: Leroy Harrington Specializing in: ALL TYPES OF CONCRETE FLATWORK AND GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CHARLIE SCHAITF TRUCKING 62'; Adams Street Waterloo, IA 50703 — Phone: (319) 232-4717 Contact: Charles Schauf MBE AV Certified Contractors List Page 3 c f Specializing in: TRUCKING — CERTIFIED WBE CONTRACTORS ATLAS PAINTING, INC.* 911 Sycamore Street P.O. BOX 65 Waterloo, IA 50704 Phone: (319) 232-9164 Specializing in: COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL PAINTING PETERMAN & HAES CARPET ONE* _. 4003 University Avenue Waterloo, IA 50701 Phone : (319) 233-6131 FAX: (319)233-6133 email: JR11486@cfu.net Certified: City of Waterloo WBE Contact : Carol Reese Specializing in: FLOOR COVERING WATCO CONSTRUCTION, INC.* 2920 Texas Street Waterloo, IA 50702 Phone : (319) 233-7481 Certified: City of Waterloo WBE Contact : Patricia J. Kimball Specializing in: STORM SEWER, INLETS, DRAIN TILE, WATER MAIN, SANITARY SEWER, INTAKE STRUCTURES * DENOTES WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE NIBE!\VBE Cenilied Contractors List _ Page 4 of 4 STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS (To be submitted by the Bidder only upon the specific request of the City of Waterloo, Iowa.) Ali questions must be answered and the date given must be clear and comprehensive. This statement must be notarized. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sheets. The Bidder may submit any additional information he desires. 1. Name of bidder. 2. Permanent main office address. 3. When organized. 4. If a corporation, when incorporated. 5. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your present firm or trade name? 6. Contracts on hand: (Schedule these, showing amount of each contract and the appropriate anticipated dates of completion.) 7. General character of work performed by your company. 8. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? If so, where and why? 9. Have you ever defaulted on a contract? If so, where and why? 10. List the more important projects recently completed by your company, stating the approximate cost for each, an the month and year completed. 11. List your major equipment available for this contract. 12. Experience in construction work similar in importance to this project. 13. Background and experience of the principal members of your organization, including the officers. 14. Credit available: $ 15. Give bank reference: STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 2 PAGES 16. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any other information that may be required by the City of Waterloo, Iowa? 17. The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm, or corporation to furnish any information requested by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in verification of the recitals comprising this Statement of Bidder's Qualifications. Dated at , this day of , 201 . (Name of Bidder) By: Title: State of ) ) ss: County of ) , being duly sworn deposes and says that he is of (Name of Organization) and that the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and correct. Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 201_ Notary Public My commission expires , STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 2 PAGES GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS 1. SCOPE OF WORK The work covered by this contract consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials and performing all operations, in connection with the F.Y. 2010 E. SIXTH ST. STORM PUMP STATION IMPROVEMENTS, Contract No. 716, as shown on the contract drawings and in accordance with these specifications. The contract drawings, which accompany and form a part of this contract and specifications, are dated May 18, 2010. They have the general title of F.Y. 2010 E. SIXTH ST. STORM PUMP STATION IMPROVEMENTS, Contract No. 716. The drawings are numbered and separately entitled as follows: Sheet No. Description Cl. Title Sheet C2. General Notes G3. Existing Plan View and New Piping C4. — CS. Existing Profile Views and New Piping C6. Site Plan C7. Existing Pump Station Asbuilt Drawing from Corps of Engineers P1.-P6. Piping and Building Details S1.-S9. Structural Drawings El.-E4. Electrical Drawings The standard specifications of the City of Waterloo are to be used along with noted sections of the Iowa DOT Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, the Technical Specifications and the special provisions described herein and shall be considered as part of the contract documents. 2. CONFLICTING SPECIFICATIONS All requirements of other specifications contained in the contract documents which conflict with the provisions of the special provisions will be considered void. 3. DUMPING AREAS Excess material resulting from construction operations shall be hauled to the County Landfill or other area secured by the Contractor and approved by the City Engineer. Rubble, rubbish, trees, brush, and other unsuitable backfill material, as designated by the City Engineer, shall be hauled to the County Landfill. All Landfill charges are to be considered incidental to the contract and are the responsibility of the Contractor. GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO. 716 Page 1 of 4 4. CONSTRUCTION DAMAGE The Contractor shall exercise care during construction operations to ensure the safety and protection to existing features located near or within the limits of construction. Damage caused by negligence or poor workmanship, as determined by the Engineer, shall be considered the Contractor's responsibility. 5. REMOVED MATERIALS All materials removed as part of this Contract shall remain the property of the City unless the City determines that he materials are not salvageable and the City does not want to retain ownership of the materials. Materials designated in the field by the Engineer as nonsalvageable shall be hauled and disposed of by the Contractor at no cost to the City. All other materials shall be transported to locations as directed by the Engineer. No separate measurement or payment will be made for hauling or disposing of removed materials and it shall be considered incidental to applicable items. 6. OVERHAUL Overhaul will not be paid for "surplus material" obtained from any of the items of construction under this contract. The cost of overhaul will be considered as incidental to the items to which it applies. 7. PAY ITEMS All pay items are listed in the proposal and shall include the purchase of all materials, delivery of these materials, and furnishing all labor, plant and miscellaneous work needed to make the item complete. All such cost shall be incidental to the proposed item to which it applies and shall not be considered for separate payment. 8. BREAKDOWN OF LUMP SUM CONTRACT PRICE ITEMS The Contractor shall, immediately upon execution and delivery of the contract, before the first estimate for payment is made, deliver to the City Engineer a detailed estimate giving a complete breakdown of the lump sum contract prices. The submitted breakdown shall be approved by the City Engineer prior to any payment of any lump sum price item. 9. PERMISSION TO HAUL OVER STREETS, RAILROADS AND HIGHWAYS The Contractor will be required to secure, from the proper authorities, permission or permit which may be required to haul over streets, highways, railroads or private property, and any hauling operations of the Contractor shall be subject to the requirements of such permits, permission, and to all applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances governing hauling and movement GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO. 716 Page 2 of 4 of equipment over streets, railroads, highways and private property. Any costs or inconvenience caused by obtaining any necessary permits or permission shall be considered completely covered by the price bid for the items in the proposal. 10. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING The City Engineer shall approve Contractor's work schedule prior to starting. All revisions shall also be approved. The City Engineer may change the schedule to accommodate changing construction conditions. The Contractor shall coordinate the work under this contract with contractors performing work under other contracts which may be performed concurrently. The Contractor shall be responsible to notify the Police, Fire, Street and Engineering Departments of the closing and opening of streets. The Contractor shall commence work within ten (10) days after receipt of the "Notice to Proceed" and diligently execute the work of the contract to completion. 11. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Before any work is started, the Contractor shall arrange with the City Engineer to hold a pre-construction conference to discuss problems and schedules of contracts. 12. UNDERGROUND UTILITIES it is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain the location of gas lines, water lines, electric, telephone, and cable television cables or wires from the various utility companies and the City electrician before starting any excavation. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to any underground utilities. The Contractor shall expose those utilities indicated on the plans so that elevations may be determined before beginning construction. This work shall be considered incidental to other items of work. If the Contractor believes that additional costs have been incurred due to a utility being improperly located, the resolution of the additional costs incurred shall be made between the Contractor and the respective utility company. 13. TRAFFIC CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION The Contractor shall, at his own expense and without further or other order, provide, erect and maintain, at all times during the progress and suspension of the work and until completion and final acceptance thereof suitable and requisite barricades, signs or other adequate protection, as required by the latest edition of Part VI of the "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices" and GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO. 716 Page 3 of 4 shall provide, keep and maintain such barricades, signs, etc., as may be required or as may be ordered by the Engineer, to ensure the safety of the public as well as those engaged on the work. Al! barricading plans shall be reviewed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall determine, provide and obtain approval from the City Engineer on all detour locations for all street closings, barricades and posting prior to construction. These shall meet requirements of the City Police Traffic Department. The Contractor shall notify the City Engineer's Office and the Police, Fire and Street Departments when the street is closed for construction. All barricading shall be in accordance with the latest edition of Part VI of the "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices." Encapsulated lens sheeting is not required on this project. 14. GRADES, LINES, LEVELS AND SURVEYS All necessary grades, lines, levels and surveys shall be established and maintained by the Contractor. The Contractor shall verify all grades, lines, levels and dimensions as sown on the drawings, and he shall report any errors or inconsistencies in the same to the City Engineer before commencing work. 15. SAFETY OF WORKERS AND PUBLIC The Contractor shall, at all times, take necessary precautions to protect the life and health of all persons employed on this project and the public. He shall provide necessary safety devices and safeguards in accordance with latest and best accident prevention practices. Ail such protection shall be furnished to employees without cost. No direct measurement of payment shall be made for this protection, but shall be considered incidental to other items of work. The public shall be kept outside of any work area. 16. WORKING ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND LEGAL HOLIDAYS The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing forty-eight (48) hours in advance if work on Saturday is planned. By noon the Friday before the planned Saturday work, the Contractor shall confirm the Saturday work schedule with the project inspector. Work on Sunday requires prior approval of the Engineer in accordance with the Waterloo Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall not work the following days in 2010 due to City holidays: July 5, September 6, November 11, November 25, December 24-26 and December 31. The Contractor shall not work the following days in 2011 due to City Holidays: January 1-2 and May 30. GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO. 716 Page 4 of 4 SPECIAL PROVISIONS II. STRUCTURAL CONCRETE, REINFORCEMENT AND CONSTRUCTION A. All concrete shall meet the requirements for structural concrete of the Iowa Department of Transportation for Class C-4, Section 2403, minimum compressive strength at 28 days, 4000 PSI. B. All reinforcing steel shall be epoxy coated and will meet the requirements for grade 40 or higher and satisfy the requirements of the Iowa Department of Transportation, Section 2404. C. All construction methods shall be in accordance with current specifications of the Iowa Department of Transportation. D. All interior and exterior surfaces shall be finished and sealed by a Class 2, strip down surface finish. E. All concrete reinforcing steel, surface finishing & sealing shall be included in the lump sum unit costs. F. Placing and protection of concrete in cold weather, Section 2403.11, shall not be measured or paid separately. This work shall be included in the lump sum contract price for the pump station. G. All concrete work shall be completed in dry conditions. This will require bypassing of stormwater flows around the wet well work areas. 3. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Time is an essential element of this contract. It is important that the work be diligently pursued to completion. If the work is not competed within the specified contract period, plus authorized extensions, the Contractor shall pay to the City Liquidated Damages in the amount of seven hundred fifty dollars ($750) per day. Days beyond the specified completion date for which Liquidated Damages will be charged will be working days that the Contractor does, or could have worked from Monday through Saturday. Sundays will be counted only if work is performed. Partial working days will be considered as a full working day. Days not chargeable for Liquidated Damages will include rain days, Sundays if no work is done, and legal holidays. Working days will cease to be charged when only punch list items remain to be completed. Punch list items do not include contract bid items or approved change/extra work orders. SPECIAL.PROVISIONS CONTRACT No. 716 Page 1 of 4 When the Contractor believes the project to be substantially completed, a written notice stating the same shall be submitted to the Engineer and a request made for a Punch List. If the work under the Contract extends beyond the normal construction season for such work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in writing a request that working days counted toward the project be suspended until work is resumed the following construction season. This amount is not construed as a penalty. These damages are for the cost to the City of providing the required additional inspection, Engineering and contract administration. 3. HAUL ROUTES Haul routes to and from the project site shall be submitted for review by the Engineer. In general, the Contractor shall request haul routes over the main streets in the area, staying on streets within the project as much as possible and should not include truck-embargoed streets. 4. STANDARD SPECIFICATION The Standard Specifications which are referenced in the contract documents are designated as follows: WATERLOO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS- "Standard Specifications for Municipal Public Works Construction, City of Waterloo, Iowa." IDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS- "Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, Iowa Department of Transportation, Ames, Iowa, Series of 2009" (unless otherwise noted) and current revisions thereof. 5. SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPING STATION, PUMPS AND APPURTENANCES 5.01 GENERAL A. Furnish all materials, labor and equipment necessary for the modification of the East 6th Street Stormwater pumping station as described in the Specifications and as shown on the Plans. The Contractor shall provide and install all necessary motors, pumps, concrete enclosures, covers, lift chains for each pump, stainless steel carrier cable with cable eye, piping, automatic controls and alarms, panels, level sensing equipment, circuit breakers, wiring, conduit, motor starters, and other items necessary to provide a complete, operational stormwater pumping station system. B. This project involves modification of an existing stormwater pump station originally constructed with two (2) 32,000 gpm propeller pumps, but now operated with a single smaller pump. This project must be completed in a manner that allows the continued use of the existing smaller pump until new pump No. 1 is installed and operational, complete with its concrete-work and piping. Since the pumps will operate only when the wet well sluice gate to the SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO. 716 Page 2 of 4 river is closed, the path from the wet well inlet 60" dia. stormwater and 60" dia. gravity outlet shall not be obstructed during the Project's construction. This will require bypass pumping or piping and planning and coordination with the City Engineer and Sewer Departments. C. The shape, size and location of the concrete wall and base improvements to the wet well have been designed with significant input from KSB Pump Engineers to improve the inlet hydraulics to the new pumps. Pump vendors are required to review the wet well's inside dimensions along with inlet piping size and location, pump size and location, outlet size and location, design pumping flow rates and the proposed new concrete walls, floors, inlets and their locations and geometry and verify that the design presented in these plans and specifications will work properly with the pumps and equipment they are to be providing without excessive cavitation, vibration or other operational problems. This verification must be in a written form, signed and dated by an appropriate employee of the pump manufacturer. This written verification shall be provided with the Bid. 5.02 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS, CONTROL SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCES A. General. The Contractor shall furnish and install the complete pumping systems as manufactured by KSB or approved equal. The system shall include two (2) new submersible propeller pumps with appurtenances as described and shown on the Plans and Specifications pumps, discharge plumbing with discharge flanges, pump mounting equipment, supports as required, lifting chains, access cover, junction box and all necessary controls and associated wiring. B. Operation of Pumps. The operation of the pumps are to be controlled by liquid levels in the wet well as measured by a new pressure transducer to be mounted in the wet well in a location and in a manner as recommended by the manufacturer. The following describes the design set points for the pump operation: Wet well Water Elev. Pump & VFD Setting 837.0 Lead Pump on, 52% of full rpm. 837.5 Lead Pump on, 75% of full rpm 838.0 Lead Pump on, 100% of full rpm 838.5 Lag Pump on, 52% of full rpm 838.5 High water level alarm signal energized 839.0 Lag Pump on, 75% of full rpm 839.5 Lag Pump on, 100% of full rpm 834.1 All pumps off The pumps shall also be controlled such that the pumps will not operate unless the sluice gate is in a closed position. The operating system shall be fully programmable by the operator to alter the above set points as to water level, pump onloff elevations, motor rpm settings and SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO.716 Page 3 of 4 alarm level settings. The control system shall have an alternating relay so that the lag pump will start on the next operation after the stopping of the lead pump. Alarms shall be signaled when a pump does not activate when signaled to do so, in addition to high water, low water and pump/seal/temperature problems. The level sensing equipment shall consist of a new pressure transducer and a redundant pressure transducer of the identical make and model, separately mounted in the wet well. Said redundant transducer shall be automatically activated in the event that the primary transducer fails. This emergency activation will be signaled as an alarm. All alarms shall be identified on the control panel as separate alarms and labeled as such so that the operator can quickly identify the type of alarm by looking at the control panel. SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO. 716 Page 4 of 4 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA Department of Engineering SECTION A - Definitions of Terms SECTION B - Scope of work SECTION C - Control of Materials and Work SECTION D - Procedure and Progress SECTION E - Measurements and Payments SECTION F - Legal Relations and Responsibility SECTION A - DEFINITIONS OF TERMS 1. CITY, The City of Waterloo, Iowa, which is the Party of the First Part of the accompanying contract, acting through its authorized representative. 2. COUNCIL. The duly elected Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa. 3. CITY ENGINEER. The City Engineer of Waterloo, Iowa, or his authorized representative. 4. ENGINEER. Wayne Claassen Engineering and Surveying, Inc. 5. INSPECTOR. The authorized representative of the Engineer, assigned to the detailed inspection of the work or materials therefor and to such other duties as may be delegated to him in these specifications. 6. CONTRACTOR. The Party of the Second Part in the accompanying contract for the improvement covered by these specifications, or his authorized representative. 7. SUBCONTRACTOR. Any person, firm, or corporation who has, with the approval of the Council, contracted with the Contractor to execute and perform in his stead all or any part of the contract. 8. BIDDER. Any individual, firm, or corporation submitting a proposal for all or a part of the work provided for in these specifications. 9. PROPOSAL GUARANTEE. The security designed in the Notice of Bidders or Proposal to be furnished by the bidder as a guarantee of good faith to enter into a contract and furnish an acceptable bond for the work contemplated if it be awarded him. 10. SURETY. The corporate body bound with and for the Contractor for the acceptable performance of the contract. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Page 1 of 19 11. PROPOSAL. The written Proposal, submitted by the bidder in the prescribed manner and on the standard form, for the improvements covered by these specifications. 12. SPECIFICATIONS. The documents that set forth the manner in which the proposed work is to be accomplished which have been prepared by the Engineer and approved by the City Council, official copies of which are now on file with the City Clerk. 13. SPECIAL PROVISIONS. Clauses or memoranda not contained herein, applying to the contract of which these specifications are a part, which change or supplement these specifications. 14. CONTRACT. The agreement entered into between the City and the Contractor, setting forth the terms under which the work covered by the plans and specifications is to be performed. The contract includes all conditions, definitions, and instructions set forth in the official publications relating to the work, the official contract and specifications, the Proposal, official plans, and all supplemental agreements entered into by the parties to the contract. 15. NOTICE TO BIDDERS. The notice called attention of bidders to the time and place for receiving bids, containing a brief description of the work, and briefly setting forth the requirements and conditions for submission of Proposals. 16. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. The clauses setting forth in detail the information relative to the proposed work and requirements for the submission of Proposals. 17. PLANS. The plans for the improvement covered by the specifications and approved by the Council, official copies of which are on file with the City Clerk. 18. CONTRACT BOND. The bond executed by the Contractor and his surety in favor of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, guaranteeing the complete execution of the contract in accordance with the plans and specifications, the payment of all debts pertaining to the work, and maintenance of the work as provided by law or by the specifications. 19. CONTRACT PERIOD. The period from the specified date for beginning the work to the specified date of completion, both dates inclusive. The contract period may be extended by the Council, as provided in these specifications, in which event the contract period includes the new date of completion. 20. OFFICIAL PUBLICATIONS. The official publications are the formal resolutions and notices relative to the proposed improvement that are GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Page 2 of 19 required by law to be published in a prescribed manner and that have actually been published in accordance with the statutes relating thereto. Attention is directed to the fact that these official publications are by statute vested with all of the force and effect of contract obligations. 21. A.S.T.M. Abbreviation for American Society for Testing Materials. 22. WORK. The term "Work" of the Contractor and Subcontractor includes labor or materials or both, equipment, transportation, or other facilities necessary to complete the contract. 23. TIME. All time limits stated in the contract documents are of the essence in the contract. SECTION B - SCOPE OF WORK 1. CORRELATION AND INTENT OF DOCUMENTS. The Contract documents are complementary, and what is called for by any one shalt be as binding as if called for by all. The intention of the documents is to include all labor, materials, equipment, and transportation necessary for the proper execution of the work. Materials or work described in words which, so applied, have a well-known technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standard. 2. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. Unless otherwise provided in the contract documents, the engineer shall furnish to the Contractor, free of charge, all copies of drawings and specifications reasonably necessary for the execution of the work. The Contractor shall keep one (1) copy of all drawings and specifications on the work available to the Engineer and to his representatives. 3. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING. It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature, character and location of the work, the conformance to the ground, the character, quality, and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of the equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions, and all other matters which can, in any way, affect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the City, either before or after the execution of the Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 4. REPORTING ERRORS AND DISCREPANCIES. If the Contractor, in the course of the work, finds any discrepancies between the plans and the physical conditions of the locality, or any errors of omission in plans or in the layout as given by said stakes and instructions, it shall be his duty to inform the GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Page 3 of 19 Engineer immediately, in writing, and the Engineer shall promptly correct the same. 5. ALTERATION OR CORRECTION OF PLANS. The plans are made up from surveys that are presumably correct and represent the foreseen construction requirements. Any modification of the plans which may be required by the exigencies of the construction or any corrections made necessary because of errors in the original surveys, will be made by the Engineer. Should corrections or modifications of the plans or specifications require a different quality or class of work than that upon which the unit prices in the Proposal are based, or if the modifications or corrections are required in parts of the work partially completed and such modifications result in an increased cost to the Contractor, the amount to be paid for work resulting from such changes shall be agreed upon in writing at the time the changes are ordered and before the work is begun by the Contractor. No allowance will be made for anticipated profits on work not performed. 6. CHANGES IN THE WORK. The City, without invalidating the contract, may order extra work or make changes by altering, adding to, or deducting from the work, the contract sum being adjusted by agreement or arbitration before such changed work is undertaken. All such work shall be executed under the conditions of the original contract, except that any claim for extension of time caused thereby shall be adjusted at the time of ordering such change. 7. INCREASED OR DECREASED QUANTITIES. The right is reserved without impairing the contract, to order the performance of such work of a class not contemplated in the Proposal or to increase or decrease the quantities as may be considered necessary to complete fully and satisfactorily the work included in the contract. However, when the work is completed without change in the plans, and the measured quantity of any item of work varies by more than twenty percent (20%) from the estimated quantity specified in the contract, an adjustment in price may be made for such item of work by agreement between the Engineer and the Contractor, subject to the approval of the City Council. Either party to the contract may request such an adjustment. 8. LANDS AND RIGHT OF WAY. The City shall provide the lands upon which the work under this contract is to be done, except that the Contractor shall provide land required for the erection of temporary construction facilities and storage of his material, together with the right of access to same. 9. CITY WATER. The Contractor shall be allowed to use City Water but before any water is used, he shall make application to the Waterloo Water Works for a temporary water connection from a fire hydrant or by some other connection method. Water usage will be charged at the rate for temporary water service. The rules, regulations, and water rates are available at the Waterloo Water Works offices at 325 Sycamore Street or their telephone number is 319- 232-6280. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Page 4 of 19 10. RIGHTS OF VARIOUS INTERESTS. Whenever work being done by the City's forces or by other Contractors is contiguous to work covered by this contract, the respective rights of the various interests involved shall be established by the Engineer to secure the completion of the various portions of the work in general harmony. 11. CLOSING STREETS TO TRAFFIC. The Engineer shall be the judge of how many streets or parts of streets it is necessary for the Contractor to close at any time and may refuse to permit the closing of additional streets until such of the work is finished and opened to traffic as he may direct. 12. OBSTRUCTION OF STREETS. The work is to be carried on in such manner as to obstruct the streets, highways, recreational trails, and alleys as little as possible. The Contractor shall carry on the different parts of the work so as to complete the whole, as nearly as practicable, at the same time. In doing the work, the Contractor shall follow the directions of the Engineer as to the place or places where work shall be started or be carried on and the direction in which it shall be done. 13. SHANTIES AND BUILDINGS. Shanties or other buildings shall not be erected in or upon any street, highway, or alley without permission of the Engineer. If such permission be granted, it may be upon any reasonable terms prescribed by the person or body granting such permission. 14. SANITARY CONVENIENCES. The Contractor shall furnish the necessary sanitary conveniences, properly secluded, for the laborers on the work, and these shall be maintained in a manner that will be inoffensive to the public. 15. CLEANING UP. The Contractor shall, as directed by the Engineer, remove from the City's property and from all public and private property, at his own expense, all temporary structures, rubbish, and waste materials resulting from his operations before work can be considered completed. The Contractor shall also renew or replace any and all fences, sidewalks, or other property damaged or disturbed by his work. 16. OMISSION OF PARTS OF GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS. Parts of the General Specifications deemed not to apply to some particular work may be omitted by special reference in other parts of the contract documents. SECTION C - CONTROL OF MATERIALS AND WORK 1. SUPERVISION AND INSPECTION. The Engineer shall have supervision of the construction provided for in this Contract and shall decide any and all questions which may arise as to the quality and acceptability of materials furnished, work performed, manner of performance, rate of progress on the work, and all questions regarding the acceptable fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Page 5 of 19 Materials and construction work shall, at all times, be subject to the inspection of the Engineer or his representatives. The Contractor shall be held strictly to the true intent of these specifications as regards the quality of materials, workmanship, and the diligent prosecution of the work. Neither the Owner nor the Engineer are responsible for the safety of the Contractor's employees, subcontractors or subcontractors employees. The Contractor, alone, shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency and adequacy of his/her safety and that of his/her employees and for any damages which may result from the failure of their improper construction appliances, methods, means, maintenance or operation. The Engineer, City Engineer and their representatives shall, at all times, have access to the work wherever it is in preparation of progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and for inspection. If the specifications, the Engineer's instructions, law ordinances, or any public authority require any work and/or materials to be especially tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Engineer timely notice of readiness for inspection. If the inspection is to be made by authority other than the Engineer, the Contractor shall notify the engineer of the date fixed for inspection. Inspections by the Engineer will be promptly made and, where practicable, at the source of supply. If any work should be covered up without the approval or consent of the Engineer, it must, if required by the Engineer, be uncovered for examination at the Contractor's expense. Re-examination of questioned work may be ordered by the Engineer, and, if so ordered, the work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If such work be found in accordance with the Contract, the City shall pay the cost of re- examination and replacement. If such work be found not in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall pay such cost unless he shall show that the defect in the work was caused by another Contractor, and, in that event, the City shall pay the cost. 2. AUTHORITIES AND DUTIES OF INSPECTORS. Inspectors may be stationed on the work to report to the Engineer as to the progress of the work and the manner in which it is being performed; also, to report whenever it appears that materials furnished and work performed by the Contractor fail to fulfill the requirements of the specifications and Contract, and to direct the attention of the Contractor to such failure or infringement; but such inspection shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligations to furnish acceptable materials or to provide completed construction that is satisfactory in every particular. In case of any dispute arising between the Inspector and the Contractor as to materials furnished or the manner of performing the work, the Inspector shall have the authority to reject materials or suspend the work until the question at issue can be referred to and decided by the Engineer. Inspectors are not GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Page 6 of 19 authorized to revoke, alter, enlarge, relax, or release any requirements of these specifications. The Inspector shall, in no case, act as foreman or perform other duties for the Contractor, or interfere with the management of the work by the latter. 3. STATUS OF THE ENGINEER. The Engineer shall have general supervision and direction of the work except that this shall not include the safety of the Contractor's employees or the safety of the Contractor's Subcontractors employees or the Public, which responsibility is solely the Contractors. He has authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the Contract. He shall also have authority to reject any work and/or materials which do not conform to the specifications, to direct the application of forces to any portion of the work as, in his judgment, is required, and to order the force increased or diminished, and to decide questions which arise in the execution of the work. 4. ENGINEER'S DECISIONS. The Engineer shall, within a reasonable time, make decisions on all claims of the Contractor and of all other matters relating to the execution and progress of the work or the interpretation of the contract documents. All such decisions of the Engineer shall be final except as to the element of time and financial consideration involved, which, if no agreement in regard thereto is reached, shall be subject to arbitration. 5. STAKES AND INSTRUCTIONS. The Contractor shall provide reasonable and necessary opportunities and facilities for setting stakes and making measurements. The Contractor shall not furnish stakes or men to set them. He shall not proceed until he has received from the Engineer such stakes and instructions as may be necessary to the progress of the work. The Contractor shall carefully preserve bench marks, reference points, and stakes, and in case of willful or careless destruction, he shall be charged with the resulting extra expense and shall be responsible for any mistakes that may be caused, by their loss or disturbance. 6. SUPERINTENDENCE. The Contractor shall keep on his work during its progress a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the Engineer. The Superintendent shall not be changed except with the consent of the Engineer, unless the Superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor and ceases to be in his employ. The Superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence, and all directions given to him shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important decisions shall be confirmed in writing to the Contractor. Other directions shall be so confirmed on written request in each case. The Contractor shall give efficient supervision to the work using his best skill and attention. He shall carefully study and compare ail drawings, GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Page 7 of 19 specifications, and other instructions, and shall report at once to the Engineer any error, inconsistency, or omission which he may discover. 7. REMOVAL OF UNAUTHORIZED WORK. Work done without fines and grade being give, work done beyond lines shown on the plans or as given, except as herein provided, or any extra or additional work done without authority, will be considered as unauthorized and at the expense of the Contractor and will not be paid for under the provisions of the Contract. Work so done may be ordered removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 8. REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE MATERIALS OR WORK. The Contractor shall promptly remove from the premises all materials condemned by the engineer as failing to conform to the Contract; whether incorporated in the work or not, and the Contractor shall promptly replace and re-execute his own work in accordance with the contract and without expense to the City, and shall bear the expense of making good all work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement. If the Contractor does not remove such condemned work and materials within a reasonable time, fixed by written notice, the City may remove them and may store the material at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the expense of such removal within a reasonable time thereafter, the City may, upon ten (10) days' written notice, sell such materials at auction or at private sale and shall account for the net proceeds thereof, after deducting all the costs and expense that should have been borne by the Contractor; or, if the net proceeds of such sale are insufficient to pay the expenses of removal, the City may deduct the balance from any amounts due the Contractor. 9. MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, APPLIANCES, AND FACILITIES. Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, water, tools, equipment, light, power, transportation, and other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work. Materials shall be of the quality specified for each particular part of the work. Whenever, in construction of the work or in the manufacture of any article of appliance necessary for the construction or operation of the work, it is necessary to use any material that is not fully specified in these specifications, it shall be of good quality and shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. Any appliance that is necessary for the construction or operation of the work and is commonly recognized as a part of the work, shall be furnished by the Contractor as part of the work, whether or not it is specifically called for in the plans and specifications, and such appliance shall be of good quality and standard make and shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. 10. MATERIAL SAMPLES. Before the contract is awarded, the bidder may be required to furnish a statement of the origin, composition, and manufacture of any and all materials proposed for use in the performance of the GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Page 8 of 19 Contract, together with samples of the material. These samples will be considered as representative and typical of the material to be obtained from any particular source. 11. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN AND EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall employ competent and efficient workmen for every kind of work. Any person employed on the work who shall refuse or neglect to obey the directions of the engineer or Inspector, or who shall be deemed incompetent or disorderly, or who shall commit trespass upon public or private property in the vicinity of the work, shall be dismissed when the Engineer so orders, and shall not be re- employed unless express permission be given by the Engineer. The Contractor shall, at all times, enforce discipline and good order among his employees. The methods, equipment, and appliances used on the work, and the labor employed, shall be such as will produce a satisfactory quality of work and shall be adequate to complete the contract within the specified time limit. 12. HIRING CITY EMPLOYEES. The Contractor shall not employ and hire any of the City's employees without the permission of the Engineer. 13. LABOR. Local labor shall be given preferences so far as practicable. 14. THE CITY'S RIGHT TO DO WORK. If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the work properly or fail to perform any provision of this Contract, the City of Waterloo, after three (3) days' written notice to the Contractor may, without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, make good such deficiencies and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor, provided, however, that the Engineer shall approve both such action and the amount charged to the Contractor. SECTION D - PROCEDURE AND PROGRESS 1. ORDER OF COMPLETION - USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS. The Contractor shall complete any portion or portions of the work in such order or time as the Engineer may require. The City shall have the right to take possession of an use completed or partially completed portion of the work at any time, but such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of work so taken or used, or any part thereof. If such prior use increases the cost of or delays the work, the Contractor shall be entitled to such extra compensation or extension of time, or both, as the Engineer may determine. 2. WEATHER. During stormy or inclement weather, all work shall be suspended, except such as can be done in an acceptable manner. Permission to work during freezing, stormy, or inclement weather shall in no way be construed as a release of the Contractor's responsibility regarding the quality of the finished work at such time. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Page 9 of 19 3. SUNDAYS AND LEGAL HOLIDAYS. Except for such work as may be required to properly maintain or protect completed or partially completed construction or to maintain lights and barricades, no work will be permitted on Sundays or legal holidays without specific permission of the Engineer. 4. DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME. If the Contractor be delayed in the completion of the work by an act of neglect of the City, or its employees; or by any other Contractor employed by the City; or by changes ordered in the work; or by strikes, lockouts, fire, unusual delays in transportation, unavoidable casualties, or any cause beyond the Contractor's control; or by delay authorized by the Engineer pending arbitration; or by any cause which the Engineer shall decide justifies the delay, then the time of completion shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Engineer may decide will compensate for such delay. No such extension shall be made for delay occurring more than thirty (30) days before claim therefor is made in writing to the Engineer. In the case of a continuing cause of delay, only one claim is necessary. This article does not exclude the recovery of damages for delay by either party under provisions in the contract documents. 5. TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK. The Engineer shall have authority to suspend the work, wholly or in part, for such period or periods of time as he may deem necessary, due to unsuitable weather or such other conditions as are considered unfavorable for the suitable prosecution of the work, or for such time as is necessary due to the failure to the Contractor to carry out orders given or to perform any or all provisions of the Contract. 6. NOTICES - HOW SERVED. Any notice to be given by the City to the Contractor under this contract shall be deemed to be served if the same be delivered to the man in charge of any office used by the Contractor or his foreman or agent at or near the work, or deposited in the post office, postpaid, addressed to the Contractor at his last known place of business. 7. PROGRESS OF WORK. The progress of the work shall be such that, at the expiration of one-fourth (1/4) of the contract period, one-eighth (1/8) of the work shall be completed; at the expiration of one-half (1/2) of the contract period, three-eighths (3/8) of the work shall be completed; at the expiration of three-fourths (314) of the contract period, the work shall be three-fourths (3/4) completed, and the whole work shall be completed at the expiration of the contract period. If, at any time the above schedule is not being maintained, the Council may give written notice to the Contractor and his sureties that the specifications are not being complied with. Such notice shall state what action on the part of the Contractor is required to bring the work within the requirements of the GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Page 10 of 19 specifications. If the Contractor fails, within ten (10) days, to proceed as directed in the said notice, then the Council shall have authority to annul this contract without process or action at law and take over the prosecution and completion of the work, as provided under the article covering City's right to terminate contract. 8. CITY'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT. If the Contractor should be adjudged a bankrupt; or if he should make a general assignment for the benefit of this creditor; or if a Receiver should be appointed on account of his insolvency; or if he should persistently or repeatedly refuse or should fail, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough skilled workmen or proper materials; or if he should fail to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor; or if he should persistently disregard laws, ordinances, or the instructions of the Engineer; or if he should otherwise be guilty of a substantial violation of any provision of the contract, then the City, upon the certificate of the Engineer that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedy, and after giving the Contractor seven (7) days' written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the premises and of all materials, tools and appliances thereon and finish the work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such cases, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the contract price shall exceed the expenses of finishing the work, including compensation for additional managerial and administration services, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor If such expense shall exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the City. The expense incurred by the City as herein provided and the damage incurred through the Contractor's default shall be certified by the Engineer. 9. REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT. In the case of annulment of this contract before completion, from any cause whatsoever, the Contractor, if notified to do so by the City; shall promptly remove any part or all of his equipment and supplies from the property of the City, failing which, the City shall have the right to remove such equipment and supplies at the expense of the Contractor. SECTION E - MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT 1. STANDARD OF MEASUREMENT. All work completed under the contract shall be measured by the Engineer according to the United States standard measures. 2. SCOPE OF PAYMENTS. The Engineer's measurements of quantities shall be the basis for final payment for the work performed under this Contract. After the work is completed, the Engineer will make measurements and computations of the number of units of each of the various items of work GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Page 11 of 19 completed, and the Contractor will be paid for the actual amount of work performed at the rates specified in his Proposal. Before final settlement is made, the Council may require the Contractor to submit a list of all persons furnishing labor or materials, with evidence that such persons have been paid in full. Payment shall be made in the manner set forth in official publications and Council Proceedings relative thereto. 3. PAYMENT FOR EXTRA WORK. Such extra work as may have been ordered by the Engineer and performed by the Contractor shall be compensated for as provided herein. If work is to be done or materials are to be furnished by the Contractor which cannot properly be classified under unit prices included in the Proposal, the Contractor shall be paid therefor the actual reasonable cost of the labor and materials entering permanently in such work, plus fifteen percent (15%) of the cost thereof. In computing the labor cost on such extra work, the following items shall be included: (a) Actual payroll expenditures for labor at the current rate therefor, and cost of materials. (b) Pay of foreman and timekeepers for actual time required on the extra work. (c) Liability insurance, prorated, for the extra work. Labor cost items on extra work shall be furnished in duplicate by the Contractor to the Inspector daily. The Inspector shall check the items, and if he finds them to be correct, he shall so certify on the statement of cost, returning one copy to the Contractor and filing one copy with the Engineer. The Engineer shall determine the cost of materials entering into extra work from the materials and receipted freight bills for the same. For any special machine, power tools, or equipment, including fuel and lubricants, but not including small hand tools, which may be deemed necessary or desirable to use, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable rental thereon, to be agreed upon in writing by the Engineer before such work is begun, and to which sum no percentage is to be added. The item of cost shall not include repairs or replacement of equipment or overhead expenses of any character. The fifteen percent (15%) allowed is considered to cover the use of hand tools and all overhead expenses except liability insurance. In no case will a claim for extra compensation be allowed unless the work upon which the claim is based has been ordered in writing, except as provided hereinafter. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Page 12 of 19 4. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST. If the Contractor claims that any instructions, by drawings or otherwise, involved extra cost under this contract, he shall give the Engineer written notice thereof within ten (10) days after completion of the work. No such claim shall be valid unless so made. 5. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COMPENSATION. If the Contractor deems that extra compensation is due him for work and/or materials that he considered is not clearly covered in the items for which he submitted unit prices in his bid and that were not ordered in writing by the Engineer as an extra s heretofore provided, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in writing, of his intention to make claim for extra compensation for work and/or material before starting construction. If such written notification is not given or the Engineer is not afforded proper facilities by the Contractor for keeping strict account of actual cost as defined herein, then the Contractor hereby agrees to waive the claim for extra compensation. Such notice to the engineer and the fact that the Engineer has kept account of cost as aforesaid, shall not in any way be construed as proving the validity of the claim, which must be passed upon by the Council. In the event that the Council finds the claim to be just, it shall be allowed and paid for as extra work as provided herein. 6. COMPLETION REPORT AND OBJECTIONS THERETO. Within ten (10) days after the full completion of the work to be done under this contract, the Engineer shall make a written statement of all the work done by the Contractor hereunder, stating the quantity of each item as found by him and including a statement of all credits for extra work and all credits or debits for changes, alterations, omissions, and defects, and shall forthwith deliver a copy of such statement to the Contractor. The Contractor shall compare such statement with his own records and shall then, in writing, either approve such statement or point out any claimed errors or omissions. If any of such claims are found correct, the Engineer shall, within ten (10) days, prepare a new statement, a copy of which shall in like manner be delivered unto the Contractor. The Engineer will not file a formal completion report with the City until the Contractor has approved the same. If the figures of the Engineer and the Contractor cannot be reconciled, or there is a difference of opinion regarding some item or items, then such difference of opinion shall be submitted to arbitration as hereinafter provided, and the decision of the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and the Engineer shall, within a period of five (5) days, file his completion report. Before action by the City Council upon such completion report, the Contractor shall also file a written statement of any claims he may have against the City, other than those shown by such completion report, growing out of this contract or the work done hereunder. The City shall retain ten percent (10%) of the amount due the Contractor on the completion report for a period of thirty (30) GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Page 13 of 19 days. If no claims are filed against the Contractor within thirty (30) days, the final ten percent(10%) shall then be paid to the Contractor. 7. WAIVER. By the execution of this contract ,the Contractor agrees that any objections he may have to the statement of the amount of work done hereunder included by the Engineer in this completion report, and any claims of the Contractor against the City growing out of this contract and the work done hereunder which are not stated in writing in the manner and within the time provided in Article 6, Section E hereof, shall be waived, and no such claim shall thereafter be asserted against the City. SECTION F - LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES 1 . LAWS RELATING TO WORK. The Contractor is presumed to be familiar with all laws, ordinances, and regulations which may, in any manner, affect those engaged or employed upon the work or the materials or equipment used in or upon the work, and shall conduct the work so as not to conflict with such laws, ordinances, and regulations. 2. PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY. The Contractor for any part of the improvement shall be held responsible for the care of materials and of partially completed and completed work until final acceptance of the same by the Council. He will be required to make good at his own expense any damage which the work may sustain from any cause prior to the filing of the engineer's certificate of completion. He shall take all risk from floods and casualties of every description and make no charge for delay due to such cause. He may, however, be allowed a reasonable extension of time on account of such delays. He shall correct or make good at his own expense all damages to adjacent property due to the acts or negligence of his employees of the prosecution of his work, and save the City and the Engineer harmless therefor. The Contractor shall be held liable and responsible for all damages done to water, sewer, drain, or other underground pipes and structures, and to sidewalks and private property. 3. RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACCIDENTS. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damages sustained by persons or property due to the carrying on of his work until final acceptance thereof, or until released by the Engineer in writing. 4. LIABILITY INSURANCE. The Contractor shall carry liability insurance which shall save the City and the Engineer harmless and protect the public and any person from injury sustained by the reason of the prosecution of the work or the handling or storing of materials therefor, and said Contractor shall also carry liability insurance which shall meet the requirements of the Iowa Worker's Compensation Law. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Page 14 of 19 Before work shall be started on this contract, the Contractor shall furnish the City Clerk with proper affidavit or Affidavits executed by representatives of duly qualified insurance companies, evidencing that said insurance company or companies have issued liability insurance policies, effective during the life of the contract, or for a period of a least ten (10) days following the filing of written notice of cancellation, protecting the public and any person from injuries or damages sustained by reason of carrying on the work involved in the Contract. The affidavit shall specifically evidence the following forms of insurance protection: (a) Public liability insurance covering all operations performed by persons directly employed by the Contractor. (b) Public liability insurance covering all operations performed by any Subcontractor to whom a portion of the work may have been assigned. (c) Public liability insurance covering all work upon the project performed by any independent Contractor working under the direction of either the principal Contractor or a Subcontractor. (d) Motor vehicle bodily injury liability insurance and property damage liability insurance on all motor vehicles employed on the work, whether owned by the Contractor or by other persons, firms, or corporations. (e) The minimum protection shall be as follows: Comprehensive General Liability Insurance General Aggregate Limit $ 2,000,000.00 Products—Completed Operations Aggregate Limit $ 2,000,000.00 Each Occurrence Limit $ 2,000,000.00 Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance $ 1,000,00C.00 The Contractor shall have the City of Waterloo, Iowa, and the Engineer named as an "Additional Named Insured". A certificate, or a policy if requested, shall be filed with the Owner. All certificates and/or policies of insurance furnished by the Contractor to be filed with the City Clerk shall include the name and address of the agency issuing the same. It shall also be required that the City Clerk be notified by registered mail of the cancellation or expiration of the above insurance. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Page 15 of 19 5. BARRICADES AND SIGNS. The Contractor shall, at his own expense and without further or other order, provide, erect, and maintain, at all times during the progress and suspension of the work and until completion and final acceptance thereof, suitable and requisite barricades, signs, or other adequate protection, as required by the latest edition of the "lows Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways" and shall provide, keep, and maintain such barricades, signs, etc., as may be required or as may be ordered by the City Engineer, to insure the safety of the public as well as those engaged on the work. All barricading plans shall be approved by the City Engineer. 6. ROYALTIES AND PATENTS. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the City harmless from loss on account thereof, except that the City shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular process or the product of a particular manufacturer is specified. 7. PERMITS AND REGULATIONS. Permits and licenses of a temporary nature for the prosecution of the work shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor. Permits, license, and easements for permanent changes in existing facilities shall be secured and paid for by the City. 8. CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES. Any claim for damages arising under this Contract shall be made in writing to the party liable within a reasonable time of the first observance of such damage and no later than the time of final payment, except as expressly stipulated otherwise in the case of faulty work or materials, and shall be adjusted by agreement or arbitration. The Contractor shall be held for the payment of all just claims against him arising out of the prosecution of this contract, and his bond will not be released until such claims are paid for dismissed. 9. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT. The Contractor shall not sell or assign the contract or sublet any portion of the work provided for therein without the written consent of the City Council. 10. SUBCONTRACTORS. The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable after the signature of the contract, notify the Engineer in writing of the names of the Subcontractors proposed for the work and shall not employ any that the Engineer may, within a reasonable time, object to as incompetent or unfit. The Contractor agrees that he is as fully responsible to the City for the acts and omission of his Subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them as he is for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Page 16 of 19 Nothing contained in the contract documents shall create any contractual relation between any Subcontractor and the City. 11. ARBITRATION. All questions subject to arbitration under this Contract shall be submitted to arbitration at the choice of either party to the dispute. The Contractor shall not cause a delay of the work during any arbitration proceedings, except by agreement with the Engineer. The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the Engineer, in the case of an appeal from his decision, within ten (10) days of its receipt, and in any other case, within a reasonable time after cause thereof, and in no case later than the time of final payment, except as otherwise expressly stipulated in the contract. If the Engineer fails to make a decision within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the part appealing. No one shall be nominated or act as an arbitrator who is in any way financially interested in the contract or in the business affairs of either the City or the Contractor. The general procedure shall conform to the laws of the State of Iowa. Unless otherwise provided by such laws, the parties may agree upon one arbitrator; otherwise, there shall be three--one named in writing by each party to this contract to the other party, and the third chosen by these two arbitrators, or, if they fail to select a third within ten (10) days, then he shall be chosen by the Comptroller of the State of Iowa. Should either party refuse or neglect to supply the arbitrators with any papers or information demanded in writing, the arbitrators are empowered by both parties to proceed ex parte. If there be one arbitrator, his decision shall be binding; if three, the decision of any two shall be binding. Such decision shall be a condition precedent to any right of legal action, and, wherever permitted by law, it may be filed in Court to carry it into effect. The arbitrators, if they deem that the case demands it, are authorized to award to the party whose contention is sustained such sums as they shall deem proper for the time, expense, and trouble incident to the appeal, and, if the appeal was taken without reasonable cause, damages for delay, the arbitrators shall fix their own compensation unless otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the costs and charges of the arbitration upon either or both Parties. The award of the arbitrators must be in writing, and it shall not be open to objections on account of the form of proceeding or the award, unless otherwise provided by the laws of Iowa. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Pace 17 of 19 In the event of such laws providing on any matter covered by this article otherwise than as hereinbefore specified, the method of procedure throughout and the legal effect of the award shall be wholly in accordance with the laws of the State of Iowa, it being intended hereby to lay down a principle of action to be followed, leaving its local application to be adopted to the legal requirements of the place in which the work is to be done. 12. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS. The Contractor shall, at the time of execution and delivery of this contract and before the taking effect of same, furnish and deliver to the City written bonds of indemnity to the amount required by law in form and substance, and with surety thereon satisfactory and acceptable to the City, to insure the faithful performance and payment by the Contractor of all the covenants and agreements on the part of the Contractor contained in this contract. These bonds shall remain in force and effect for the full amount of the Contract. 13. PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS. In carrying out any of the provisions of the Contract or in exercising any power or authority granted him thereby, there shall be no liability upon the City Engineer , the Engineer or their authorized assistants, either personally or as an official of the City, it being understood that in such matters he acts as the agent and representative of the City. 14. JURISDICTION. Any action in Court against the Contractor or sureties on his bond because of damages to property or individuals by said Contractor or his workmen, or because of the violation of any provisions of the specifications, or on account of the failure of said Contractor to comply fully with these provisions, shall be brought in the District Court of the State of Iowa in and for Black Hawk County. 15. TERMINATION OF RESPONSIBILITY. The Contract shall be considered as completed and the Contractor released from further obligations except as to the requirements of his bond, after the work has been completed and finally accepted and final estimates have been allowed and the completion report of the engineer has been filed and approved by the Council. 16. CITY'S LEGAL RIGHTS. The City shall not be precluded by any measurements, estimate, or certificate made, either before or after the completion and acceptance of the work and payment therefor, from showing the true amount and character of the work performed and materials furnished by the Contractor, or from showing that any such measurement, estimate, or certificate is untrue or incorrectly made, or the work or materials do not, in fact, conform to the Contract. The City shall not be precluded, notwithstanding any such measurements, estimate, or certificate and payment in accordance therewith, from recovering from the Contractor and his surety such damages as it may sustain by reason of his failure to comply with the terms of the Contract. Neither the acceptance by GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Page 18 of 19 the City or any of its representatives, nor any payment for or acceptance of the whole or any part of the work, nor any extension of time, nor any possession taken by the City, shall operate as a waiver on any portion of the contract or of any power herein reserved, or any right to damages herein provided. A waiver of any breach of the contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach. 17. SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION. In order to protect the lives and health of his/her employees under the contract, the Contractor shall comply with all pertinent provisions of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, as amended, commonly known as the Construction Safety Act as it pertains to health and safety standards; and shall maintain an accurate record of all cases of death, occupational disease, and injury requiring medical attention or causing loss of time from work, arising out of and in the courts of employment on work under the contract. Section 107 of the Act is applicable to construction work and provides that no laborer or mechanic shall be required to work in surroundings or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to his health and safety as determined under construction, safety and health standards promulgated by the Secretary of Labor. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency, and adequacy of his/her plan, appliances, and methods, and for any damage which may result from their failure of their improper construction, maintenance or operation. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Page 19 of 19 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 1. SUBCONTRACTS The contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the work to require compliance by each subcontractor with the applicable provisions of the contract for the improvements embraced in this contract. 2. REVIEW BY THE CITY OF WATERLOO The City of Waterloo, its authorized representatives and agents, shall at all times have access to and be permitted to observe and review all work, materials, equipment, payrolls, personnel records, employment conditions, material invoices, and other relevant data and records pertaining to this contract, provided, however, that all instructions and approval with respect to the work will be given to the contractor only by the City of Waterloo through its authorized representative or agents. 3. INSPECTION a. The contractor shall furnish promptly all materials reasonably necessary for any tests which may be required. All tests by the City of Waterloo will be performed in such manner as not to delay the work unnecessarily and will be made in accordance with the provisions of the Technical Specifications. b. inspection of materials and appurtenances to be incorporated in the improvements embraced in this contract may be made at the place of production, manufacture or shipment, whenever the quantity justifies it, and such inspection and acceptance, unless otherwise stated in the Technical Specifications, shall be final, except as regards (1) latent defects, (2) departures from specific requirements of the contract, (3) damage or loss in transit, or (4) fraud or such gross mistakes as amount to fraud. Subject to the requirements contained in the preceding sentence, the inspection of materials as a whole or in part will be made at the project site. 4. WARRANTY OF TITLE No material, supplies, or equipment to be installed or furnished under this contract shall be purchased subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale, lease-purchase or other agreement by which an interest therein or in any part thereof is retained by the seller or supplier. The contractor shall warrant good title to all materials, supplies, and equipment SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 2 PAGES installed or incorporated in the work and upon completion of all work, shall deliver the same together with all improvements and appurtenances constructed or placed thereon by him to the City of Waterloo free from any • claims, liens, or charges. Neither the contractor nor any person, firm, or corporation furnishing any material or labor for any work covered by this contract shall have any right to a lien upon any improvement or appurtenance thereon. Nothing contained in this paragraph, however, shall defeat or impair the right of persons furnishing materials or labor to recover under any bond given by the contractor for their protection or any rights under any law permitting such persons to look to funds due the contractor in the hands of the City of Waterloo. The provisions of this paragraph shall be inserted in all subcontracts and material contracts and notice of its provisions shall be given to all persons furnishing materials for the work when no formal contract is entered into for such materials. SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 2 PAGES TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 2-SITE WORK DIVISION 3-CONCRETE WORK DIVISION 4-MASONRY DIVISION 5-METALS DIVISION 6-NOT USED DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS DIVISION 9-FINISHES DIVISION 10-NOT USED _ DIVISION 11-EQUIPMENT DIVISION 26-ELECTRICAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF I DIVISION I GENERAL REQUIREMENTS — Section 01010 Summary of Work Section 01100 Substitution of Equipment and Products Section 01200 Project Meetings — Section 01300 Submittals Section 01400 Quality Control Section 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls — Section 01650 Facility Start-up Section 01700 Contract Closeout SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS AND GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS _. A. General Specifications for Construction and Supplemental General Specifications for Construction,General Special Provisions,and Division 1 Sections apply to work on this Section. 1.02 ARRANGEMENTS OF DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS A. The detailed specifications include the following: Division 1 General Requirements Division 2 Site Work Division 3 Concrete Division 4 Masonry Division 5 Metals Division 7 Thermal&Moisture Protection Division S Doors Division 9 Finishes Division 11 Equipment Division 26 Electrical 13. The contract drawings or drawings which depict the contract work of the project and upon which the contract is based are those drawings or sheets listed on the Title Sheet of the drawings. Each sheet bears the following general title: FY 2010 E. SIXTH ST. STORM PUMP STATION IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF WATERLOO,IOWA CONTRACT NO.716 C. The drawings referred to above are supplemented by additional shop and dimension drawings to be prepared by the Contractor as set forth in the specifications. D. Division of Work as made by the contract drawings and specifications is for the purpose of --- specifying all work which is required. There has been no attempt to make a classification according to trade or any agreements which may exist between Contractors or groups of Contractors and trade unions. Such division and classification of the work shall be the Contractor's responsibility. 1.03 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The broad scope of the project covered under these contract documents includes,but is not limited to, the construction of: -" 1. Partial demolition of the existing pump station, removals,installation of temporary facilities to protect and access existing pump,controls,sluice gate operator and other items within the existing building and subsequent reconstruction including a new exterior control building wall,replacement floor,new concrete walls and chambers in the wet well, lighting, fencing, etc. 01010-1 2. Provide and install two(2)32,000 gallon per minute(gpm) submersible,propeller pumps — and controls. 3. New fabricated trash rack/bar screen and aluminum access frames and covers. — 4. Pump outlet piping modifications within the wet well. 5. Construction of such other items that are appurtenant to the above to provide a fully operational storm water pumping station. 1.04 LOCATION OF THE WORK — A. The work under these contract documents is located on property of the City of Waterloo as shown on the drawings. 1.05 COMPLETION DATES A. Substantial completion within 220 calendar days of receipt of Notice to Proceed. B. Final completion by May 15,2011. _ 1.06 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION A. The Contractor shall submit a work sequence which includes details for the major work elements of the project including: 1. Partial demolition of the existing pump station and installation of temporary facilities to protect and access existing pump,controls, sluice gate operator and other items within the existing building. T 2. Construction of the new concrete walls and chambers in the wet well. 3. Construction of the above grade floor and new control building exterior wall. — 4. Installation of Pump No. 1,outlet piping and controls to an operating condition.. 5. Installation of Pump No.2,outlet piping and controls to an operating condition. 6. Installation of all other components of the project, except clean-up. — 7. Completion testing,start-up and Operator training for all equipment. 8. Installation of Pump No.2, outlet piping and controls to an operating Final project clean- up and contract close-out. 1.07 NOTICE TO PROCEED A. The Contractor shall not commence work until proper execution of the contract and written authorization to proceed has been issued by the Owner. Proper execution of the contract shall — include the submittal of all required surety bonds and insurance certificates. 01010-2 1.08 CONTRACT USE OF PREMISES A. General: 1. The Contractor must satisfy himself by personal examination of the site as to all local conditions affecting the performance of his contract. The Contractor is deemed to accept such conditions as found to exist. B. Existing Underground Utilities: 1. Existing underground utilities,as shown on the drawings, are located in accordance with _ available data but locations shall be determined by each Contractor as the work proceeds. Excavation work shall be done carefully so as to avoid damaging the existing work. 2. Each Contractor shall provide for protection,temporary removal and replacement,or relocation of said obstruction as required for the performance of his work required in these contract documents. No extra payment will be made for this work. 3. Other obstructions not shown on the drawings and requiring relocation shall be exposed by the Contractor without injury,or if injured, shall be repaired by the Contractor at his expense. Removal of such obstruction or its relocation shall be made by the Contractor — according to the provisions of the General Conditions,Article 10, Changes in the Work. C. Existing Facilities: 1. Each Contractor shall take complete field measurements affecting all existing construction,wiring,piping,and equipment in this contract and he shall be solely responsible for proper fit between his work and existing surfaces and other equipment. He shall examine all work to which he will connect,and if any misalignment is found,he shall so arrange his work that the misalignment is corrected to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. 2. Dimensions given on the drawings related to the existing structures are based on existing construction drawings and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify the accuracy of these dimensions. Any discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the ENGINEER prior to start of new construction. -- 3. Each Contractor will be held responsible for any damage to existing structures,work, materials,or equipment because of his operations and shall repair or replace any damaged structures, work,materials,or equipment to the satisfaction of, and at no additional cost to the Owner. 4. Each Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to streets,roads,curbs, sidewalks, highways,shoulders,ditches,embankments, culverts,bridges,or other public or private property,which may be caused by transporting equipment, materials,or men to and from work. The Contractor shall make satisfactory and acceptable arrangements with the agency having jurisdiction over the damaged property concerning its repair or replacement. 5_ The Contractor shall maintain access to the Owner's facilities adjacent to the site throughout construction. 01010-3 D. Unfavorable Construction Conditions: 1. During unfavorable weather, wet ground,or other unsuitable construction conditions, the Contractor shall confine his operations to work which will not be affected adversely — thereby. No portion of the work shall be constructed under conditions which would affect adversely the quality efficiency thereof;unless special means or precautions are taken by the Contractor to perform the work in a proper and satisfactory manner. E. Methods of Operation: 1. Each Contractor shall inform the ENGINEER in advance concerning his plans for carrying on each part of the work, but the Contractor alone shall be responsible for the safety, adequacy,and efficiency of his plant, equipment,and materials. 2. Any method of work suggested by the Owner or ENGINEER, but not specified, shall be used at the risk and responsibility of the Contractor; and the ENGINEER and Owner will assume no responsibility therefore. 3. Review by the Owner or ENGINEER of any plan or method of work proposed by the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility therefore,and such — review shall not be considered as an assumption of any risk or liability by the Owner or ENGINEER, or any officer,agent or employee thereof. The Contractor shall have no claim on account of the failure or inefficiency of any plan or method so reviewed. _ F. Conduct of Work: 1. Each Contractor shall observe that the Owner reserves the right to do other work in connection with the project or adjacent thereto by contract or otherwise, and he shall at all times conduct his work so as to impose no hardship on the Owner or others engaged in the work,nor cause any unreasonable delay or hindrance thereto. 2. Each Contractor shall be responsible to others engaged in the work or work adjacent thereto for all damage or injury to work,to persons or property, or for loss caused by failure to finish the work within the specified time for completion. He shall adjust, correct, and coordinate his work with the work of others so that no discrepancies shall result in the whole work. 3. The work of this contract includes the furnishing and necessary installation of all tools, machinery,scaffolds, false work,forms and centers for the execution of the work,except as may be otherwise specified. Equipment provided shall be adequate. The Contractor shall obtain all necessary measurements for the work and shall check dimensions, levels, and construction and layout and supervise the construction,for correctness of all of which _ he shall be responsible. Where work of one trade joints to,or is on other work,there shall be no discrepancy when the work is completed. The Contractor must anticipate relation of all parts of the work and at the proper time provide and set required anchors, and blocking. Anchors, blocking, sleeves and inserts necessary for each trade shall be a part of same, except where stated otherwise. Assistance required by the Engineer in obtaining measurements or information on the work shall be furnished accurately and fully by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 01010 01010-4 SECTION 01100 SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT AND PRODUCTS PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section defines the procedures for using "Basis of Bid" items when preparing the TOTAL BID PRICE and outlines the procedure for proposing substitute items by "Alternate" manufacturers. it also defines procedures for non- "Basis Bid" substitutions. B. Bidders shall provide all required information as noted in this section. 1 .02 BID FORM A. The Bid Form is based on a LUMP SUM PRICE contract using "Basis of Bid" items which have been identified and described in the Contract Documents for the Base Bid. B. The TOTAL BID PRICE noted in the Bid Form shall include the installed prices of only "Basis of Bid" items. The installed price shall include the labor and material cost, profit and overhead, plus the cost for all necessary appurtenances to provide a complete system. C. Manufacturers who believe their equipment can meet the performance requirements and with the exception of minor details, the technical requirements of the Contract Documents, are encouraged to submit a quotation of a Bidder for an "Alternate" item. D. Bidder's desiring to quote a price for an "Alternate" item in lieu of a "Basis of Bid" item may, at their option, include a "qualification package" for each proposed "Alternate Manufacturer" with their Bid Form. Such "qualification package" shall _ include the installed price of their requested equipment substitution and the revised price of the applicable Bid Item from the Bid Form. "Qualification Package" requirements are described in this Section. The bidder shall not use the installed price for any proposed "Alternate" item in preparing the TOTAL BID PRICE. E. If the Bidder does not include a "qualification package" for "Alternate" manufacturers, the Bidder shall furnish the "Basis of Bid" item for bid price in the Bid Form. 01100- 1 SECTION 01100 SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT AND PRODUCTS PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section defines the procedures for using "Basis of Bid" items when preparing the TOTAL BID PRICE and outlines the procedure for proposing substitute items by "Alternate" manufacturers. It also defines procedures for non- "Basis Bid" substitutions. B. Bidders shall provide all required information as noted in this section. 1 .02 BID FORM A. The Bid Form is based on a UNIT BID PRICE contract using "Basis of Bid" items which have been identified and described in the Contract Documents for the Base Bid and Alternate Nos. 1 and 2 Bids. B. The TOTAL BID PRICE noted in the Bid Form shall include the installed prices of only "Basis of Bid" items. The installed price shall include the labor and material cost, profit and overhead, plus the cost for all necessary appurtenances to provide a complete system. C. Manufacturers who believe their equipment can meet the performance requirements and with the exception of minor details, the technical requirements of the Contract Documents, are encouraged to submit a quotation of a Bidder for an "Alternate" item. D. Bidder's desiring to quote a price for an "Alternate" item in lief of a "Basis of Bid" item may, at their option, include a "qualification package" for each proposed "Alternate Manufacturer" with their Bid Form. Such "qualification package" shall include the installed price of their requested equipment substitution and the revised price of the applicable Bid Item from the Bid Form. "Qualification Package" requirements are described in this Section. The bidder shall not use the installed price for any proposed "Alternate" item in preparing the TOTAL BID PRICE. E. If the Bidder does not include a "qualification package"for "Aternate" manufacturers, the Bidder shall furnish the "Basis of Bid" item for bid price in the Bid Form. 01100- 1 1.03 QUALIFICATION PACKAGE A. All Bidders shall submit with the Bid Form a uqualification package" for each "Alternate" which the Bidder proposes to furnish. The Bidder shall submit each qualification package under separate cover. Each qualification package shall be bound with protective cover, identified by specification section number and title, and the product manufacturers' name. The Bidder shall submit all qualification packages in a sealed sturdy box or suitable container with the Bid Form attached to or enclosed in the box or container. B. "Qualification packages" for "Alternate" items shall include the following. If an item does not apply, indicate so in the submittal. 1. A complete set of drawings, specifications, catalog cut-sheets, and detailed descriptive material. This information shall identify all technical and performance requirements stipulated on each drawing and in each specification section. 2. Detailed information for all buy-out items such as hardware, motors, bearings, reducers, belts, sheaves, motor controllers and instrumentation. 3. Lists showing materials of construction of all components, including all buy- out items. 4. Manufacturer's recommended spare parts, including all buy-out items. 5. Information on equipment field erection requirements including total weight of assembled components and weight of each sub-assembly. 6. A maintenance schedule showing the required maintenance, frequency of maintenance, lubricants and other items required at each regular preventative maintenance period, including all buy-out items. 7. Electrical requirements and schematic diagrams. 8. Detailed written documentation with discussion of all deviations of equipment, including buy-out items, from the Contract Documents. 9. A listing of manufacturer's history demonstrating at least five (5) years experience in the manufacture of the product(s) specified, or ten (10) successful installations of the size or number involved in this project. FAILURE TO FURNISH THE PRECEDING INFORMATION WITH THE BID FORM SHALL BE CAUSE FOR REJECTION OF A PROPOSED ALTERNATE ITEM FOR USE ON THIS PROJECT. 01100-2 C. If the Bidder fails to furnish any or all of the preceding information, the proposed "Alternate" qualification package will be rejected by the ENGINEER. If the "Alternate" qualification package is rejected by the ENGINEER, the Bidder shall furnish the "Basis of Bid" item for the price bid. D. No "Alternate" items will be considered unless, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, they conform to the Contract Documents in all respects, except for make and manufacturer and minor details. E. The ENGINEER shall be the sole authority for determining conformance of a proposed "Alternate" item with the Contract Documents. Except for identification of non-compliance with the specifications, the ENGINEER will not be required to prove that an "Alternate" item is not equal to "Basis of Bid" items. F. Substitutions or modifications to the qualification package will not be considered after opening of bids. 11.04 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS A. Acceptance of "Alternate" items and their qualification packages, or naming of "Basis of Bid" equipment, does not eliminate the need for shop drawing submittals and reviews during construction, nor does it eliminate the requirement that the equipment manufacturer satisfy the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Bidders furnishing "Alternate" items requiring changes to the Contract Documents, shall notify the ENGINEER in writing of all process, mechanical, electrical and structural changes and requirements for incorporating the "Alternate" into the Project and shall reimburse the Owner for associated redesign costs. Redesign and contract drawing revisions to accommodate "Alternates" will be prepared by the ENGINEER during the shop drawing review process. Reimbursement shall be based on 3.0 times the ENGINEER's salary cost plus reimbursable expenses at cost. '1.05 SUBSTITUTION OF NON-"BASIS OF BID" ITEMS A. Where non-"Basis of Bid" products, materials or methods are accompanied by "or equal" or other language of the same effect, the Pump and Controls Equipment Provider's requests to use unnamed products, materials or methods are considered requests for substitutions, and are subject to the following requirements. B. After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and ENGINEER may consider formal requests for the substitution of non-"Basis of Bid" products in place of those specified, under the following conditions: 01100- 3 1. The request is accompanied by complete data on the proposed substitution substantiating compliance with the Contract Documents including product identification and description, performance and test data, references and samples where applicable, and an itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the products specified or named by Addenda, with data relating to Contract time schedule, design and artistic effect where applicable, and its relationship to separate contract. 2. The request is accompanied by accurate cost data on the proposed substitution in comparison with the product specified, whether or not modification of the Contract Sum is to be a consideration. C. Requests for substitution when forwarded by the Pump and Control Equipment Provider to the ENGINEER, are understood to mean that the Pump and Control Equipment Provider: 1. Represents that he has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified. 2. Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract, but excludes costs under separate contracts and the ENGINEER's redesign costs, and that he waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent. 3. Will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the work to be complete in all respects. D. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals without separate written request, or when acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. E. ENGINEER will determine acceptability of proposed substitution, and will notify the Pump and Control Equipment Provider of acceptance or rejection in writing within a reasonable time. F. The Pump and Control Equipment Provider shall pay all costs incurred by the Owner and ENGINEER for redesign work required to incorporate substitute material or systems. The rate of pay shall be equal to 3.0 times ENGINEER's salary cost plus reimbursable expenses at cost. END OF SECTION 01100 01100-4 SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General Meeting Information — B. Preconstruction Meeting C. Progress Meeting — D. Pre-installation Meeting 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS IN OTHER PARTS OF PROJECT MANUAL A. Instruction to Bidders: Pre Construction Conferences — 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01010-Summary of Work B. Section 01300-Submittals — C. Section 01400—Quality Control I). Section 01500—Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls — E. Section 01650—Facility Start-up E. Section 01700-Contract Closeout ]..04 GENERAL INFORMATION A. Contractor or ENGINEER shall schedule and administer preconstruction meetings, periodic progress meetings,and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the Work_ — 1. Prepare agenda for meetings. 2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date. 3. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 4. Preside at meetings. 5. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings and decisions. 6. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within three days after each meeting. a. To all participants in the meeting. b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting. c. Furnish three copies of minutes to ENGINEER. 01200-1 7. Any discrepancies noted in the meeting minutes shall be directed to the person responsible for the distribution within the two weeks after receipt. If no comments are received, the minutes will stand as true and correct. B. Representatives of contractors,subcontractors and suppliers attending the meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. C. ENGINEER may attend meetings to ascertain the Work is expedited consistent with Contract Documents and the construction schedules. — 1.05 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. ENGINEER will arrange and schedule within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed. , B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties,designated by ENGINEER. C. Attendance: 1. Owner's representative _ 2. ENGINEER and his professional consultants 3. Resident Project representative 4. Contractor's superintendent — 5. Major subcontractors 6. Major suppliers 7. Agencies'representatives 8. Utilities' representatives 9. Others as appropriate _ D. Suggested Agendum 1. Distribution and discussion of: a. List of major subcontractors and supplies — b. Projected construction schedules 2. Critical work sequencing. 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. 4. Project coordination: a. Designation of responsible personnel 01200-2 5. Procedures and processing of: a. Field decisions b. Proposal requests c. Submittals d. Change orders e. Applications for payment 6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents. 7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents. 8. Use of premise: a_ Office,work and storage areas b. Owner's requirements — 9. Construction facilities,controls and construction aids. 10. Temporary utilities. 11. Safety and first-aid procedures_ 12. Security procedures. 13. Housekeeping procedures. — 1.06 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Contractor or ENGINEER will arrange and schedule regular periodic meetings as required. ]B. Hold called meetings as required by progress of the work. -- C. Location of the meetings: The project field office of the Contractor. D. Attendance: 1. ENGINEER or his professional consultants as needed. 2. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda. 3. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda. 4_ Others. E. Suggested Agenda: 1. Review,approval of minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of work progress since previous meeting. 3. Field observations,problems,conflicts. 4. Problem which impede Construction Schedule. 01200-3 5. Review of off-site fabrication,delivery schedules. 6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 7. Revisions to Construction Schedule. 8. Plan progress, schedule,during succeeding work period. 9. Coordination of schedules. 10. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. 11. Maintenance of quality standards. 12. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date. b. Effect on other contracts of the Project. I.07 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Contractor shall arrange and schedule well in advance of installation of major unit of work. 1. Requiring Coordination with other work. 2. Interface with other work. 3. Refer to specific product section. B. Location: At project site. C. Attendance 1. Owner's representative 2_ ENGINEER and his professional consultant 3. Resident Project representative — 4. Contractor's superintendent 5. Installer 6. Representative of Manufacturer or fabricator . D. Suggested Agenda 1. Inspect substrate 2. Options and related change orders 3. Shop drawings,product data and samples 4. Verify measurements and dimensions — 01200-4 5. Space and access limitation 6_ Structural limitation — 7. Attachment and connection 8. Possible conflicts and compatibility problems 9. Time schedules _ 10. Governing regulation 11. Inspection and test procedures 12. Warranty and Guarantee B. Installation 1. Proceed only after unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. — 2. Under proper work conditions. 3. Specified testing. 4. Final protection. END OF SECTION 01200 01200-5 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A_ Submittal procedures B. List of subcontractors and suppliers C. Schedules of Operation Il. Schedules of Values E. Payment Request F. Shop Drawings and Samples G. Operation and Maintenance Instructions H. Construction Photographs 1. Schedule of Submittals 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01010 -Summary of Work: Owner Furnished Materials B. Section 01100-Substitution of Equipment and Products C. Section 01200-Project Meetings: Preconstruction Meeting D. Section 01400 -Quality Control: Manufacturers' Field Services and Reports E. Section 01650—Facility Start-up F. Section 01700-Contract Closeout;Contract Warranty,Manufacturers' Certificates and Closeout Submittals 1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Schedule submittals to expedite the project and deliver to the appropriate office of the ENGINEER. Coordinate submission of related items. B. Transmit each submittal with a cover letter or form,identifying project, contractor, subcontractor, — or supplier,pertinent drawing sheet and detail number and specification section number, as appropriate. C. Apply Contractor's stamp,signed or initialed certifying that review,verification of products required,field dimensions,adjacent construction work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. 01300-1 D. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations,which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed work. E. Provide space for Contractor and ENGINEER review stamps. F. Revise and resubmit submittals as required. Identify all changes made since previous submittal. G. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. 1.04 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS A. Prior to the execution and delivery of the Agreement,the successful Bidder,if requested, shall submit a complete list of all subcontractors and suppliers with whom he proposes to contract; otherwise, the list shall be submitted prior to moving on the site. B. The list shall be in addition to the list submitted as part of the proposal and shall be divided into sections corresponding to the specification divisions, and shall state name,address and telephone numbers together with work or items to be furnished. C. This list is subject to approval of the ENGINEER and Owner. After approval is given,the list cannot be revised without written approval. This approval does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with specified requirements. 1.05 SCHEDULE OF OPERATIONS A. Each Contractor shall submit,not more than two weeks after contract award,a detailed graphic schedule of all construction operations that shall not only indicate the sequence of the work, but also the time of starting and completion of each part and a monthly percentage breakdown. The schedule shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for his approval. B. If conditions beyond the control of the Contractor justifies, and an extension of time is approved, the Contractor shall revise the construction schedule in accordance with the approved extensions. C. If operations fall behind the approved schedule to an extent that completion of the project within the specified time appears doubtful, the Engineer may require the Contractor to add to his equipment and work forces,as well as increase the working hours. D. Show submittal dates required for shop drawings,product data,and samples, and product deliver dates,including those furnished by Owner and those under Allowances. 1.06 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. At least ten days prior to submitting the first request for partial payment, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the ENGINEER for approval,a detailed cost breakdown by major specification sections of his total contract price. The cost breakdown shall be sufficiently detailed to provide a basis for monthly partial payments and include profit and overhead expenses. B. Each Contractor shall submit within 30 days after award of contract,his anticipated monthly payment schedule. This schedule shall be updated whenever the actual request varies more than 15%from the schedule. 01300-2 1.07 PAYMENT REQUEST A. General 1. Except as otherwise indicated,sequence of progress payments for each contractor is to be regular,and each must be consistent with previous applications and payments. It is recognized that certain applications involve extra requirements, including initial applications,applications at times of substantial completion, and final payment applications. 2. Use forms provided and approved by the ENGINEER. Except as otherwise indicated, _ complete every entry provided for on the form,including notarization and execution by authorized persons. Incomplete applications will be returned by ENGINEER without action. Entries must match current data of schedule of values,progress schedule and reports. Listing must include amounts of change orders issued prior to first day of the "period of construction"covered by application. EI. Initial Payment Application The principal administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide with submittal of each prime contractor's first payment application can be summarized as follows, but not necessarily by way of limitation: 1. Listing of subcontractor and principal suppliers and fabricators. 2. Cost breakdown. 3. Progress schedule(preliminary,if not final). 4. Evidence satisfactory to Owner that Contractor's insurance coverages have been secured. 5. Data needed by Owner to secure related insurance coverages. b. Initial progress report, including report of preconstruction meeting. C. Application at Time of Substantial Completion Following issuance of ENGINEER's final"certificate of substantial completion"on each contractor's work, and also in part as applicable to prior certificates on portions of completed work as designated,a"special"payment application my be prepared and submitted by Contractor. The principal administrative actions and submittals,which must precede or coincide with such special applications can be summarized as follows, but not necessarily by way of limitation: I. Occupancy permits and similar approvals or certifications by governing authorities and franchised services, assuring Owner's full access and use of complete work. 2. Warranties, guarantees,maintenance agreements and similar provisions of contract documents. 3. Test/adjust/balance records,maintenance instructions,meter readings, start-up performance reports,and similar change-over information germane to Owner's occupancy,use,operation and maintenance of completed work. 4. Final cleaning of the work. 01300-3 5. Application for reduction(if any)of retainage,and consent of surety. 6. Listing of Contractor's incomplete work,recognized as exceptions to ENGINEER's certificate of substantial completion. D. Final Payment Application The administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide with submittal of each contractor's final payment application can be summarized as follows, but not necessarily by way of limitation: 1. Completion of project closeout requirements. 2. Completion of items specified for completion beyond time of substantial completion(regardless of whether special payment application was previously made). 3. Assurance,satisfactory to Owner, that unsettled claims will be settled and that work not actually completed and accepted will be completed without undue delay. 4. Transmittal of required project construction records to Owner. 5. Proof, satisfactory to Owner, that taxes, fees and similar obligations of Contractor have been paid. 6. Removal of temporary facilities,services, surplus materials,rubbish and similar elements. 7. Change over of door locks and other provisions for Contractor's access to Owner's property(Contractor for general work). 8. Consent of surety for final payment. 1.08 SUBMITTAL OF SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each Contractor shall submit,with such promptness as to cause no delay to the work,6 copies of all shop and settings drawings and schedules required for the work_ The ENGINEER shall pass upon them with reasonable promptness. The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the ENGINEER, file with him six(6)corrected copies,and furnish such other copies as required. If the Contractor desires more than 3 approved copies, he shall submit additional drawings. B. All shop drawings shall be submitted through the Prime Contractor and be accompanied by a letter of transmittal. The Prime Contractor shall approve all shop drawings before transmitting them for approval. — C. The ENGINEER's approval of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from drawings or specifications, unless he has in writing called the —' ENGINEER'S attention to such deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors in shop drawings or schedules. 1.06 EXCESSIVE SHOP DRAWING REVIEWS A. In accordance with the General Conditions and Article 1.05 above, the Contractor is responsible for furnishing shop drawings for review by the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER has deemed that a maximum of two submittals will be reviewed for any one product for any given section under the Contract, 01300-4 B. Should a third or subsequent reviews be necessary: 1. Owner will compensate ENGINEER for such additional services. 2. Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the payment to the Contractor. C. Compensation to the ENGINEER shall be 2.5 times salary cost plus reimbursable expenses at cost. 1.07 SUBMITTAL OF SAMPLES _ A. Submit a minimum of two samples of materials, finishes,colors,etc.,as required for approval. Consult with the ENGINEER for exact requirements prior to preparing submittal. 13. Submit samples to ENGINEER's office, securely packaged,with the name of the Project clearly indicated on the package exterior. Each physical sample shall have a label or tag,firmly attached to the sample,bearing the following information: (a)name of project,(b)name of supplier, (c) name of Contractor,and(d)product information such as manufacturer's designation, finish, type, class, grade,etc.,as is appropriate. 1.09 SUBMITTAL OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Two preliminary copies of the operating and maintenance instructions shall be submitted with shop drawings for approval and shall be resubmitted with corrections and additional requested information prior to shipment of equipment. B. Prepare and submit four final copies of a complete set of operating and maintenance instructions covering all equipment and systems furnished. Operating instructions shall be prepared specifically for each system or piece of equipment installed under this contract and shall consider the specific equipment and controls included. All references,pictures,diagrams and dealing with items not part of furnished equipment and systems shall be deleted. Instructions shall be — complete for each separate system covering: l. Equipment functions,normal operating characteristics,and limiting conditions. 2. Assembly, installation,alignment,adjustment, and checking instructions. 3. Operating instructions for start-up routine and normal operation, regulation and control, shutdown,and emergency conditions. 4. Lubrications and maintenance schedules and instructions. 5. Guide to"troubleshooting". 6. Parts lists, and predicted life of parts subject to wear. 7. Outline,cross sections,and assembly drawings;engineering data; and wiring diagrams. 8. Test data and performance curves where applicable. C. Prior to final acceptance of any equipment,all operation and maintenance instructions shall be delivered to the ENGINEER for transmittal to the Owner. 01300-5 1.10 SCHEDULES OF SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit the following items to the ENGINEER for review and approval. Also, see the specific section of the Specification for detailed requirements. — B. Prior to signing of the agreement 1. Instruction to Bidders-Performance and Payment Bonds 2. Section 01300-List of Subcontractors and Suppliers(if requested) C. Prior to start of work 1. Supplementary Conditions-Insurance Certificates — 2. Section 01300-Schedule of Operations 3. Section 01300-Schedule of Values D. During process of work-as specified in specific Sections END OF SECTION 01300 01300-6 SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.. Quality Assurance/Control of Installation B. References C. Field Samples and Mockup D_ Workmanship E. Manufacturer's Instruction and Certificates F. Testing Ci. Manufacturers' field services and reports 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300- Submittals: Submission of Manufacturers'Instruction and Certificates B. Section 01600 -Materials and Equipment Requirements for Material and Product Quality 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers,manufacturers' products, services,site conditions,and workmanship,to produce work of specified quality. 13. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions,including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the work except when more stringent tolerances,codes,or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,vibration,physical distortion or disfigurement. 1.04 REFERENCES A. Conform to current edition of reference standards unless otherwise specified. B. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents,request clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding. C. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention of inference otherwise in any reference document. 01400-1 1.05 WORKMANSHIP A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. _ B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. 1.06 FIELD SAMPLES A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual Specification Sections for review. B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work. C. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed,clear area after field sample has been accepted by ENGINEER and representative work has been completed. 1.07 MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS A. When required by individual Specifications Section, submit manufacturer's printed instructions, in the quantity required for product data,for delivery,storage,assembly,installation, (start-up), adjusting,and finishing, as appropriate. — B. Comply with instructions in full detail,including each step in sequence. Should instructions _ conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding. 1.08 MANUFACTURERS' CERTIFICATES A. When required by individual Specifications Sections,submit manufacturer's certificate, in duplicate, that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.09 TESTS GENERAL A. Six(6)copies of all test reports shall be submitted to the ENGINEER. B. Materials furnished and proposed for incorporation in to the project shall be inspected, sampled and tested as specified for each material. See related sections of the specification. _ C. Laboratory tests shall be conducted and test reports submitted where this type of test is specified and/or required by the ENGINEER. All laboratory tests shall be made by an independent _ laboratory approved by the ENGINEER. These tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM Standards if specified,or other applicable standards if no reference is included. D. Laboratory tests may be witnessed by the representatives of the Owner or ENGINEER. 1.10 MILL TESTS A. Mill or shop tests shall be conducted and test reports submitted where this type of test is specified and/or required by the ENGINEER. B. Mill or shop tests shall be accomplished by the manufacturer or supplier of the materials. Mill tests may be conducted by an independent testing laboratory. These tests shall be performed in accordance with the ASTM Standard if specified or with other applicable standards. 01400-2 C. The cost of mill tests shall be included in the lump sum price of the contract and no additional payment will be made for mill testing. 1.11 FACTORY OBSERVATION A. Factory observation of fabrication procedures,materials used,testing methods for all mechanical and electrical equipment may be performed by a representative of the Owner or ENGINEER. 1.12 FACTORY TESTS A. Factory tests of process,mechanical and electrical equipment relative to performance,capacity, rating, efficiency,function or special requirements shall be conducted in the factory or shop for each item when this type of test is specified and/or required by the ENGINEER. These tests shall be performed in accordance with applicable standards and test codes. B. Factory tests shall be set up and accomplished by the equipment manufacturer who shall provide all shop space, tools, equipment, instruments,personnel and other facilities required for the satisfactory completion of each test. C. The cost of factory tests shall be included in the lump sum price of the contract and no additional payment will be made for factory testing. Factory tests may be witnessed by representatives of the Owner or ENGINEER and such witnessing will be paid for by the Owner. D. Where factory tests are required or specified for process equipment under other headings of this specification,reports of the test results shall be submitted to the ENGINEER and approved prior to shipment of the equipment. 1.13 QUALIFICATION TESTS A. In addition to tests specified,should the Contractor propose a product,material,method for assembly that is of unknown or questionable quality to ENGINEER,the ENGINEER may require and order suitable tests to establish a basis for acceptance or rejection. Such tests shall be paid for by the Contractor, or by the subcontractor requesting approval. 1.14 FIELD TESTS A. Field tests of process,mechanical and electrical equipment,piping systems, electrical systems, control systems,ventilation systems,heating systems,water mains,pressure mains,sewers, drains,and similar facilities shall be conducted where this type of test is specified and/or required by the ENGINEER. B. Field tests include determination of performance, capacity,efficiency, function,tightness, leakage or other special requirements. These tests shall be performed in accordance with applicable standards and test codes. C. Field tests shall be set up and accomplished by the Contractor who shall provide all tools, equipment, instruments,personnel and other facilities required for the satisfactory completion of each test. D. Routine tests of materials incorporated into the project will be performed by an independent testing laboratory at the direction of the Owner. Samples shall be provided by the Contractor as provided in the General Conditions. The Owner will pay for all concrete cylinder tests except preliminary tests to determine initial design mixes. The Owner will pay for soil compaction control inspection and testing and for other routine laboratory tests,such as graduation,moisture content and density. The Owner will pay for built-up roof sample_ The Contractor will be charged for retesting of material failing the original test. 01400.3 E. Field tests may be witnessed by representatives of the Owner and ENGINEER. — I.15 MISCELLANEOUS(REGULATORY)INSPECTIONS A. Should specifications, ENGINEER's instructions,laws, ordinances or any public authority require any work to be inspected or approved;Contractor shall give timely notice of its readiness for inspection and a reasonable date fixed for such inspection. If any work should be covered up ..- without approval or consent of approving agency,or ENGINEER,it must be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. 1.16 MANUFACTURERS'FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A. Submit qualifications of observer to ENGINEER 14 days in advance of required observations. B. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions,conditions of surface and installation,quality of workmanship start-up of equipment,test,adjust,and balance of equipment as applicable,and to initiate instructions when necessary. C. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'written instructions. D. Submit report in duplicate within 14 days of observation to ENGINEER for review. END OF SECTION 01400 014004 — SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities B. Temporary Controls and Heat C. Construction Facilities D. Project Management 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01700-Contract Closeout: Final Cleaning 1.03 UTILITIES A. Water for construction purposes is not available at the site. Contractors shall make arrangements for necessary water. 1.04 FENCES AND BARRICADES A. Contractor shall provide all fences and barricades and other safety appliances as are required to protect the work,the workmen and the public from injury. All shall comply to the local — requirements. 1.05 BYPASS PUMPING A. Bypassing of the flow is required around the pump station for all work competed in the wet-well. Ail work in the wet well must be completed under dry conditions.The bypass shall be made by plugging the inlet sewer at a point upstream of the pump station and pumping the flow over the levee or by diverting the flow through the wet well with temporary bypass piping. B. The pump and bypass lines shall be of adequate capacity and size to handle the flow.The Contractor shall prepare a written plan and submit it to the Owner for review and approval. Said plan shall describe the manner of plugging the upstream sewer,pump capacities power sources and provisions for emergency situations during flooding of the Cedar River when the wet well's floodgate must be closed and for power outages. C. The Contractor shall complete this work without causing sewer back-ups that over-flow from upstream storm sewers and/or structures. D. The Contractor's attention is directed to the sustained flows through the wet well from upstream geothermal systems that continuously flow into this system. 1.06 SCAFFOLDING AND LADDERS A. The Contractor shall provide,erect,maintain and subsequently remove all scaffolding, ladders, supports and rigging necessary to complete all portions of the project. 01500-1 1.07 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES AND HEAT A. The General Contractor shall provide temporary enclosures and closures and access in order to protect and provide access to the existing building and all equipment within it.The General Contractor shall also provide temporary heat so that specified temperatures can be maintained and the work can proceed. He shall provide temporary closures over wall and floor openings, etc.,to enclose the existing facilities and the new work. Temperature inside the enclosures and/or enclosed part or parts of the structure shall be: Not less than 60°F for 48 hours prior to and during the time when and where concrete work,cement finish or masonry work are being done or cured. Not less than 50°F where any other trades,such as electricians,plumbers,etc.,are working. B. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials,to dissipate humidity and to prevent accumulation of dust,fumes,vapors or gases. C. Each Contractor shall pay for any additional temporary heating facilities necessary to meet the — above requirements,and the fuel,and the attendance required,until a structure is enclosed. 1.08 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as required to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas,to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas,and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. 1.09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. 13. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls,projections,jambs, sills,and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors,stairs,and other surfaces from traffic, dirt,wear, damage,or movement of heavy objects,by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer_ F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.10 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work(and existing facilities), and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry,vandalism,or theft. 1.11 RECREATIONAL TRAIL A. Contractor shall maintain the recreational trail in usable condition during his construction of the project. He shall provide and maintain all necessary barriers to protect the area. 01500-2 —' 1.12 SIGNS A. No signs,billboards or other advertisements shall be erected on the premises by the General Contractor or the subcontractors without ENGINEER's permission. Each General Contractor shall furnish and maintain all necessary temporary signs required for the prosecution of the work such as"Office", "Men", "Danger","High Hi Voltage", etc. 1.13 FIRST-AID FACILITIES A. Emergency first-aid facilities shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with all Federal, State and Local laws,statutes,ordinances,codes and regulations. 1.14 PROJECT MANAGEMENT A. The Contractor shall schedule and coordinate the work of his employee's and all subcontractors and others involved to maintain the accepted progress schedule. His duties shall also include the planning of the work, the scheduling of ordering and delivery of materials,and checking and control of all work under this contract. Construction schedules shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review and acceptance prior to the start of any work Schedules shall be verified or updated as necessary on a monthly basis. ]3. The Contractor shall be responsible for completed supervision and control of his subcontractors as though they were his own forces. Notices to the Contractor shall be considered notice to all affected subcontractors. C. The Contractor shall appoint a qualified representative to act as the Project Coordinator, or Superintendent,who shall be responsible for coordinating all work and providing liaison with the ENGINEER and the Owner. The Project Coordinator or Superintendent shall,in addition,plan the work,schedule the ordering and delivery of materials, and check and control the various phases of the manufacture and delivery of all work under this contract. The Project Coordinator .� or Superintendent shall, in all matters, represent the Contractor at the sites of the work in the absence of a corporate officer or principal of the firm. I). The Project Coordinator or Superintendent shall not be changed except with the consent of the ENGINEER,unless the Project Coordinator or Superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor and ceases to be in his employ. E. Important directions shall be confirmed in writing to the Contractor. Other directions shall be so confirmed on written request of the Contractor. 1.15 CLEANING A. Each Contractor shall clean the work area each day, shall remove all trash and waste materials, and shall maintain the site in a neat and orderly condition throughout the construction period. END OF SECTION 01500 01500-3 D. The Contractor shall supervise,control,and be responsible for the operation and maintenance of the new equipment and/or system during a period of at least fifteen(15)days after each individual item is placed into operation. The Contractor shall remain responsible for making any required changes,repairs or replacements to the new installation during this period. Written acceptance of equipment will not be given until after this period. E. During the start-up period,the Contractor shall provide supervisory personnel satisfactory to the ENGINEER. It is the intention that during this period,the Owner's personnel will become completely familiar with the operation and maintenance of the system installed under this contract. F. The cost of the above personnel for supervisory purposes shall be included in the contract cost and no additional compensation will be paid to the Contractor for this item. G. During the period thus provided,the Owner will arrange to have a full time complement of operating personnel available,and these operators will be paid by the Owner. During the period of commencement of operation,all power and fuel costs will be borne by the Owner. END OF SECTION 01650 01650-3 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1: GENERAL .01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Final Inspection 13. Final Cleaning C. Project Record Drawings 1). Warranties E. Spare Parts and Maintenance Material F. Liens G. Final Adjustment and Accounts H. Final Application of Payments 1..02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01010-Summary of Work 13. Section 01100-Substitution of Equipment and Products C. Section 01200 -Project Meetings 1). Section 01300-Submittals E. Section 01400-Quality Control F. Section 01500-Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls G. Section 01650-Project Start-Up — 1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. When Contractor considers the work is substantially complete,he shall submit to ENGINEER: 1. A written notice that the work,or designated portion thereof,is substantially complete. 2. A list of items to be completed or corrected. 13. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, ENGINEER will make an inspection to determine the status of completion. 01700-1 C. Should ENGINEER determine that the work is not substantially complete: 1. ENGINEER will promptly notify the Contractor in writing,giving the reasons therefore. 2. Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the work,and send a second written notice of substantial completion to the ENGINEER. 3. ENGINEER will re-inspect the work. D. When the ENGINEER finds that the work is substantially complete,he will: 1. Prepare and deliver to Owner a tentative Certificate of Substantial Completion with a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. 2. After consideration of any objections made by the Owner as provided in Conditions of the Contract,and when ENGINEER considers the work substantially complete,he will _- execute and deliver to the Owner and the Contractor a definite Certificate of Substantial Completion with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected. 1.04 FINAL INSPECTION A. When Contractor considers the work is complete,he shall submit written certification that: 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. — 3_ Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the Owner's representative and are operational. 5. Work is completed and ready for final inspection. B. ENGINEER will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with reasonable _ promptness after receipt of such certification. C. Should ENGINEER consider that the work is incomplete or defective: I. ENGINEER will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the incomplete or defective work. 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies,and send a second written certification to ENGINEER that the work is complete. 3. ENGINEER will re-inspect the work. D. When the ENGINEER fords that the work is acceptable under the Contract Documents,he shall — request the Contractor to make closeout submittals. 01700-2 1.05 CLEAN-UP A. The Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials,rubbish and other debris resulting from the work,and at the completion of the work,he shall remove all waste materials,rubbish and debris from the premises as well as all tools,construction equipment and machinery,and surplus materials. He shall leave the site clean and ready for occupancy by the Owner. Early acceptance of process equipment shall not waiver clean-up prior to final acceptance. B. The Contractor shall provide cleaning of all surfaces, systems and fixtures,including removal of labels,tags, grease,oil,dirt stains,etc. Prior to final acceptance of the work, the treatment plant Contractor shall provide final cleaning of all floors,walls,windows, millwork,counters,cabinets, etc.,so that the building will be ready for use by the Owner without further cleaning. This cleaning will include removal of dust from walls and other vertical surfaces and ceilings,washing -- of all glass and counter surfaces. C. Upon acceptance of a building or building modifications,the Owner will assume the normal janitorial cleaning services. Re-cleaning of any soiled areas due to Contractor's operation, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor_ - ]..06 RECORD DRAWINGS A. All provisions of General Conditions relating to record drawings apply. A set of annotated drawings shall be submitted to the ENGINEER prior to final closeout of the project. ]..07 GUARANTEE A. The Contractor shall guarantee all work and material against all defects for a period of at least two(2) years or as specified in the General Conditions or under various items_ The Contractor shall repair or replace any such defective work and materials to conform to the provisions of the contract and without expense to the Owner,within ten(10)days after notification in writing by the Owner or ENGINEER of such defective work or material. If the Contractor shall not have done said repairs or replacements or have made arrangements for the correction thereof within the — period specified above,the Owner shall do so and shall charge the cost of same to the Contractor. The Contractor shall perform his work so as to cause the Owner a minimum of inconvenience and interruption of services. 13. Contractor shall execute and assemble all warranty documents from subcontractors,suppliers and manufacturers. Contractor shall provide table of contents and assemble in a three-D side ring binder with durable cover. C. Guarantee on equipment placed into operation prior to final acceptance shall start from the date of written acceptance by the ENGINEER and Owner. 11.08 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide products, spare parts,and maintenance materials in quantities specified in each section, in addition to that required for completion of work. Coordinate with Owner,deliver to (Owner's superintendent)and obtain receipt prior to final payment. 0I700-3 1.09 LIENS -- A. Neither the final payment nor any part of the retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor, if required,shall deliver to the Owner a complete release of all liens arising out of this contract,or receipts in lieu thereof and,if required in either case,an affidavit that so far as he has knowledge or information,the releases and receipts include all of the labor and materials for which a lien can be filed, but the Contractor may,if any subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or receipt in full, furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any claim by lien or otherwise. If any lien and/or claim remain unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all monies that the latter may be compelled to pay -" in discharging such lien and/or claim including all costs and attorney's fees. 1.10 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS A. Submit a final statement of accounting to ENGINEER. 13. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the contract sum: 1. The original contract sum. 2. Additions and deductions resulting from: a. Previous change orders — b. Allowances c. Unit prices d. Deductions for uncorrected work e. Penalties and bonuses f Deductions for liquidated damages g. Deductions for re-inspection payments h. Other adjustments 3. Total contract sum,as adjusted. 4. Previous Payments. 5. Sum remaining due. C. ENGINEER will prepare a final change order,reflecting approved adjustments to the contract sum which were not previously made by change orders_ 1.11 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Contractor shall submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with procedures and requirements stated in the Conditions of the Contract. END OF SECTION 01700 01700-4 DIVISION 2 SITE WORK Section 02070 Selective Demolition Section 02830 Chain Link Fence and Gate SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1: GENERAL 11.01 SUMMARY — A. Section includes demolition and removal of portion of existing facility indicated. 1. Work includes,but is not necessarily limited to,the following: a. Removal of portions of the existing pump station roof,walls and floor. b. Removal of a portion of the existing steel pump outlet piping. c. Removal of an existing pump,inactive sump pump and piping. d. Removal of a portion of existing fencing. 13, Related Sections 1. General Specifications for Construction and Supplemental General Specifications for Construction,General Special Provisions and Division 1 Sections apply to the work of this Section. 2. Section 03740 -Concrete Removal and Patching. 11.02 DEFINITIONS A. Structures: Refers to all existing and new construction, including equipment, pavements,slabs, walks,structures,structural elements and systems, utilities and other materials or systems indicated for removal. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Utilize qualified professional engineering personnel to layout the work,check sheeting, bracing, shoring,and for other project conditions requiring skilled technical knowledge. 1.04 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions 1. Owner and ENGINEER assume no responsibility for actual condition of structures to be removed or that of structures and adjacent structures that will remain. -- 2. Existing structures and facilities are designed for in-place loads only and for the support provided by elements of the existing structure. -- a. Brace and support to replace the structural strength provided by the systems that will be removed until the new materials and systems are complete in place and obtained design strengths. 3. Contractor shall determine, to Contractor's satisfaction, the location and nature of surface and subsurface obstacles,the condition of structures and the soil and water conditions — which will be encountered during the work. 02070-1 PART 2: PRODUCTS-NOT USED PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine structures and conditions under which work of this Section is to be performed. 3.01 PREPARATION A. Protection 1. Perform work in manner required to ensure minimum interference with adjacent structures, and vehicle and pedestrian traffic ways. a. Do not close or obstruct access or the utilization of facilities and systems without ..._ permission from Owner. b. Mark detour routes around closed or obstructed vehicle and pedestrian traffic ways. 2. Protect structures and portions of structures that will remain,from distress, movement, overstressing,settlement,torsion,unbalanced loading,undermining, flooding, groundwater uplift, water damage,and other damage created by the work 3. Utilize procedures and systems that will prevent spread of dust beyond immediate work areas.4. Locate existing underground,embedded or overhead utilities in the areas of the work. Protect utilities that are to remain. B. Bracing and Support of Existing Structure i. Existing structures are designed for in-place loads only and for the support and bracing provided by existing systems. a. Utilize interior and exterior shoring,bracing and other support systems required to prevent damage to the structure or portion of the structure that will remain. 3.03 DEMOLITION — A. Proceed with demolition and removal in a systematic manner. B. Demolish and remove in sections when required by project conditions and requirements. C. Partial Demolition of Existing Structures 1. Utilize methods for removal required to complete the work without damage to materials or other appurtenances that will remain. 2. Provide support for cantilever or un-braced section that are created by the removal work. 3. Concrete: Refer to Section 03740 for requirements. 02070-2 3.04 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIAL A. Remove from site debris,rubbish,and other materials resulting from demolition operations as they are removed and disposed of off-site. 1. Storage or sale of removed materials will not be permitted on site. B. Burning of removed materials from demolished structures is not allowed on site. C. Remove and dispose of materials in accordance with Federal, State, and Local laws and regulations. 3.05 ADJUSTING -- A. Repair damage to structures or portions of structures that will remain that was caused by the work. 1. Repair equal to the condition existing prior to the work or remove and provide new. 3A6 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent facilities,utilities,and systems and those that are to remain of dust,dirt,debris, and other contamination caused by the work. Return areas to condition existing prior to the start of the work. END OF SECTION 02070 02070-3 SECTION 02830 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section 1. Chain link fencing and accessories. 2. Fence gates and related hardware. 13. Products Furnished but not installed under this Section 1. Sleeves for posts set in concrete slabs or structures. C. Related Sections 1. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Sections apply to the work of this Section. 3. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM -A90-81 - Standard Test Method for Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)Iron and Steel Articles; 1981 13. ASTM A392-89- Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric; 1989 C. ASTM F567-84- Standard Practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence; 1984 I). ASTM F669-81(85)- Standard Specification for Strength Requirements of Metal Posts and Rails for Industrial Chain-Link Fence; 1981 (Re-approved 1985). E. ASTM F900-84- Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates; 1984 F. CRD-C621-88 - Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-shrink Grout;U.S.Army Corps of Engineers; 1988 G. NEMA KS1-1983- Enclosed Switches;National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1983 (with 1985 Revision). 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Corner Posts: Posts located at a change in horizontal alignment. B. End Posts: Posts located at the beginning or end of a length of fence. 02830-I C. Gateposts: Posts which support the weight of a gate. Gateposts may function also as terminal posts,but generally are sized differently. D. Line Posts: Pasts between terminal posts. E. Pull Posts: Posts located within a length of fence at certain distances,and at changes in vertical alignment, to facilitate stretching of fabric. F. Terminal Posts: Posts set where fence fabric terminates and between which the fabric is stretched;a term which includes end, corner and pull posts. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300. B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's technical data and catalog cuts. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Show overall fence layout. 2. Show location and spacing of posts, fittings and accessories. 3. Show anchorage details. — 1.05 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Gates: 1. Complete and detailed operations and maintenance data for each component, including diagrams and part numbers for ordering spare or repair parts. B. Warranty: As specified. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Layout Personnel: 1. Layout of fence line shall be performed by land surveyors licensed to practice in the state in which the project is located. B. Pre-installation Conference: — 1. Attend pre-installation conference,at which the location of fence line to be constructed will be identified by Engineer. 02830-2 _ 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Post Sleeves: 1. Furnish post sleeves in a timely manner for embedment in concrete slabs or structures. 2. Installation of sleeves is specified in Division 3. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Warranties shall be in addition to,and not a limitation of,other rights the Owner may have — against the Contractor under the contract documents. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products of the following manufacturers,provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents,will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Aluminized steel fencing: a. Page Aluminized Steel Corporation b. Semmerling Fence and Supply,Inc. c. Security Fabricators,Inc. d. Cyclone Fence,Inc. e. Anchor Fence,Inc. f. Equivalent manufacturers,whose products meet these specifications. 2.02 FENCING ACCESSORIES A_ Material and finish of accessories shall match fence fabric,except as noted. 3. Zinc-coating of Ferrous Accessories(ASTM A90) — 1. Hot-dip zinc-coated;weight of coating, 1.2 ounces per square foot of coated area, average. C. Caps 1. Formed steel,malleable or cast iron,or aluminum alloy,with ring to receive top rail or loop to receive tension wire according to fence configuration_ 2. Snug-fitting,weather tight closure of posts. :D. Rail Ends: Formed steel,malleable or cast iron,or aluminum alloy. 02830-3 — E. Rail Sleeves 1. Formed of same material as rail. 2. Minimum length: 6 inches. 3. Rails with 3-inch swaged ends will not require rail sleeves. — F. Wire Ties and Clips 1. Size: Not less than fabric wire gage size. 2. Minimum zinc-coating weight: 0.8 ounce per square foot. _ G. Brace Bands and Tension Bands 1. 3/4 inch by 1/10 inch thick(nominal). — H. Tension Bars I. 3/4 inch by 3/16 inch(or equivalent section)for 1-3/4 and 2-inch mesh. 2. Continuous length to match fabric width. 3. Not required for roll-formed posts with integral fabric weaving loops. I_ Tension Wire 1. 7 gage, coil spring wire. — J. Truss Rods 1. 5/16 inch minimum diameter rod. K. Fittings for Mechanical Anchorage of Posts 1. Provide suitable fittings (such as base plates,clamps,standoffs,etc.)for mechanical anchorage of posts to horizontal,vertical, or inclined surfaces where indicated, — 2. Formed steel,malleable or cast iron, or aluminum alloy. 3. Anchor bolts: Stainless steel. — L. Swing Gate Hardware 1. Hinges: a. Sized to suit gate size. — b. Non-lift-off-type. c. Centered or offset to permit gate opening(arc)shown on drawings. 02830-4 2. Manual gate latches: a. Forked type or full gate height plunger bar type. b. Permit latching and locking operation from either side of gate. c. Padlock eye integral part of latch. 2.03 POST SLEEVES A. Galvanized Steel Pipe 1. Inside diameter: Equal to largest cross section of post plus 1 inch. -- 2. Minimum length: Equal to 3 times the largest cross section of post. 2.04 CONCRETE A_ Concrete materials are specified in Division 3. 2.05 NON-SHRINK GROUT A. CRD-C621,factory pre-mixed grout,nonmetallic type only. 2.06 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES A. Fence Configuration i. Fence shall be constructed with: a. Top rail. b. Bottom tension wire_ 2. Elevation of fence as shown on drawings. 3. Details as shown on drawings. 13. Fabric 1. Material: Aluminized steel,ASTM A392. 2. Zinc coating weight: 2 ounces per square foot. 3. Wire diameter: 0.148 inch(9 gage). 4. Mesh size: 2 inches. 5. Fabric width: 72 inches_ 02830-5 C. Fence Framework 1. Zinc coating of steel pipe(ASTM A90): a. Interior and exterior coating: Hot-dip zinc-coated; weight of coating, 1.8 ounces per square foot of coated area,average. — 2. Zinc coating of steel shapes(ASTM A90): a. Hot-dip zinc-coated; weight of coating, 1.8 ounces per square foot. — 3. Top rail length: 18-foot minimum lengths. 4. Material: Except where specific requirements are indicated on the drawings, the contractor may select any framework material listed below. 5. Material: Conform to ASTM F669,Light Industrial category. a. Group I-A: Steel pipe. — (1) Rail size: 1.660 inches outside diameter by 0.112 inch wall thickness, 1.82 pounds per foot. — (2) Line post size: 2.375 inches outside diameter by 0.123 inch wall thickness, 2.96 pounds per foot. (3) Terminal post size: 2.875 inches outside diameter by 0.162 inch wall thickness,4.69 pounds per foot. D. Gate Type 1 1. Comply with ASTM F900. a. Type: Single swing. b. Frame: Round tubular steel. c. Coating as specified for fence framework. — 2. Provide gate hardware, including keeper for each leaf. 2.07 WOVEN WIRE FENCING — A. Wire Fabric: Zinc-coated steel farm/field wire fencing,48"high, 11 gauge,2"x 4"nominal wire spacing,galvanized per Class 1 ASTM A116. — B. Barbed Wire: 2-strand, 12 1/2 gauge, zinc-coated steel with 4 point barbs spaced at 5 inches o.c. on top and 1 strand at bottom, ASTM A121. C. Tension(Bracing Wire: Not less than 9 gauge,zinc-coated.) 02830-6 2.08 WOVEN WIRE FRAMEWORK A. Post System: Provide steel system as herein specified. 1. Steel Post System: T channel 1.33 lb/ft.minimum,6 ft.6 inches long for line posts. 2. Pull Posts and Corner Posts: 2 1/2"x 2 112" 1/4"Angle x 7'-0", galvanized. 3. Gate Posts: 2 1/2"x 2 1/2"x 1/4"Angle 7'-4",galvanized. B. Fasteners 1. Steel Post System: Clamp every other wire on successive posts. C. Gates: Construct gates of 11/4"diameter zinc-coated pipe framing with woven and barbed wire of material and spacing as specified for line fencing. 1. Hinges and Latches: Manufacturer's standard for size and weight of gate,latches with padlock eye. 2. Equip gate posts with ball or dome shape tops. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that line of fence has been properly identified. B. Verify that proper grade has been established. C. Verify location of underground utilities and structures. D. Begin fence construction only after adequate clearance on both sides of fence is available. 3.02 POST INSTALLATION A. Layout 1. Space line posts at equidistant intervals not exceeding 10 feet on center measured parallel to grade. 2. Locate terminal posts at the beginning and end of each continuous length of fence,at abrupt changes in line or grade,additionally at intervals not to exceed 500 feet, and as otherwise shown on the drawings. 3_ Install posts plumb and in proper alignment. 4_ Elevation of fence shall follow ground line unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Bottom of fabric shall run at a uniform distance above ground of 2 inches,plus or minus 1/2 inch. 5. Where shown on drawings, construct fence to elevations indicated. 02830-7 B. Anchorage of Posts in Soil l. Set posts in concrete-filled holes, securely braced in proper position until concrete has cured at least 3 days above 60 degrees F. 2. Hole shall be free of loose materials when placing concrete. 3. Hole diameter shall be as recommended by fence manufacturer, but not less than 4 times largest cross section of post. 4. Minimum hole depth for line and terminal posts: a. 30 inches for fence up to 6 feet high. — 5. Increase hole depth as necessary to provide at least 2 inches of cover under bottom of post. Do not allow post to contact soil. 6. Spread waste excavation materials in approved locations. 7. Thoroughly consolidate concrete. 8. Extend concrete 2 inches above grade, forming a crown to shed water. C. Anchorage of Posts in Sleeves 1. Use sleeves in the following locations: a. New concrete construction. 3.03 FENCE INSTALLATION A. Install posts, braces, fabric and other components in accordance with manufacturer's — recommendations and approved shop drawings and to meet or exceed requirements of ASTM F567. B. Pull fabric taut and secure to rails and tension wires at 1 foot on both sides of each post and at intervals of 24 inches,maximum,on center. C. Secure fabric to line posts with tie wires or clips at intervals of 15 inches,maximum on center. D. Secure fabric to terminal posts for the full width of fabric by using stretcher bars and bands or by integrally weaving fabric to fasten loops on posts. E. Grounding of fence is specified in Division 16. 3.04 GATE INSTALLATION A. Gates shall operate freely without binding or dragging and shall be easily operable by hand. _ 3.05 GATE OPERATOR INSTALLATION A. Install gate operators in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Adjust for smooth,trouble-free operation. 02830-8 :3.06 ADJUSTING A. Gates and Gate Operators: After repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to 3 days' use by normal traffic,readjust gates and gate operators and controls for optimum operating condition and safety. Lubricate operating equipment and clean exposed surfaces_ :3.07 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct the Owner's personnel in proper operation and maintenance of gate operators. END OF SECTION 02830 02830-9 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE WORK Section 03100 Concrete Framework Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement Section 03251 Concrete Expansion and Isolation Joint Materials _ Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03610 Non-shrink Concrete Grout Section 03740 Concrete Removal and Patching SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1: GENERAL :1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes formwork and shoring for all cast-in-place concrete and installation into formwork of items to be embedded or built-in. 13. Related Sections 1. General Specifications for Construction and Supplemental General Specifications for -- Construction,General Special Provisions and Division 1 Sections apply to the work of this Section. 2. Section 03200-Concrete Reinforcement 3. Section 03300 -Cast-In-Place Concrete 4. Section 03610-Non-Shrink Grout :1.02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute(ACI) 1. 117 Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials 2. 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork :1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design and construct the work in accordance with requirements of this Section and ACI 347. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's Data: Manufacturer's data and product information for proprietary materials,including form coatings,type of form ties indicating waterstop device,break- back depth and diameter, and other accessories. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of existing structures that work will abut, connect or be supported on,and adjust work to account for actual field dimensions. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General 03100-1 1. Utilize forming,support and re-shore system materials of strength and cross section required to resist applied forces and loads without deflection. 2. Utilize largest practical sizes to minimize number of joints. B. Form Coatings 1. Commercially-formulated form coating compounds with following characteristics: a. Will not bond with,stain,or adversely affect concrete surfaces. b. Will not leave a residue or impair adhesion and bond of subsequent materials and treatment of concrete surfaces. — c. Will not impede wetting of surfaces that will be cured with water or that will receive a curing compound. C. Form Ties I. Commercially-manufactured,removable or snap-off metal form ties designed to withstand applied stresses,prevent spreading of forms during concrete placement,and prevent concrete from spalling upon removal. a. Use of wire ties,flat ties and taper ties is prohibited. b. Ties shall be of length required to leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches from the finished concrete surface. c. Utilize plastic cone spacers at ends of form ties to obtain a full 1-1/2 inch cover from concrete surface to ends of ties. d. Utilize integral fixed washer, neoprene washer or other approved water seal _ device on form ties when either side of concrete section will be in contact with liquids or groundwater. 2. Snap Ties — a. Commercially-manufactured break-off metal form ties designed to withstand applied stresses and prevent spreading of forms during concrete placement. —' b. Ties shall break at break-back point when twisted. c. Ties shall have plastic cone spacers and spreader washers at ends of ties to accurately space forms and to obtain full break-back from surface of concrete. d. Ties shall have flats or be crimped to prevent rotation of embedded portion of tie when tie ends are twisted to snap off at break-off point. 3. Coil Ties a. Commercially-manufactured welded coil metal form tie and coil bolt system _ designed to withstand applied stresses and prevent spreading of forms during concrete placement. 03100-2 b. Ties shall have plastic cone spacers with internal threads screwed onto coils at ends of ties to accurately spread forms and to obtain full cover from surface of concrete. 4. She-Bolt Ties a. Commercially-manufactured metal inside rod form tie and she-bolt system designed to withstand applied stresses and prevent spreading of forms during concrete placement. b. Inside rod ties shall have threaded ends for attachment to she-bolts and be crimped at the middle to prevent rotation of embedded tie when she-bolts are removed. c. Inside rod ties shall have plastic cone spacers with internal threads screwed onto threads at ends of ties to accurately spread forms and to obtain full cover from surface of concrete. d_ She-bolts shall be tapered for easy removal and shall have internal threads for attachment to inside rod ties. D. Inserts: Provide inserts for anchorage of materials or equipment to concrete construction not supplied by other trades. F. Exposed Finish Concrete Forms 1. Exposed finish concrete consists of all surfaces that are not indicated to be in contact with earth. 2. Utilize plywood,metal, metal-framed plywood-faced,or other panel-type non-aluminum materials to provide clean,smooth,continuous concrete surfaces. 3. Chamfer Strips: % inch unless otherwise noted. F. Unexposed Finished Concrete Forms 1. Utilize plywood, lumber,metal,or other non-aluminum materials required to provide continuous, smooth concrete surfaces. Lumber shall be dressed on at least two edges and one side and as required for a tight fit. 2. Form Liners: Unlined steel forms may be utilized, but shall be capable of incorporating reinforcement,inserts,pipe fittings, box-outs,and other details shown without modification of details. 2.02 FABRICATION -- A. General 1. Design and fabricate forms and falsework to include assumed values of live load,dead load,concreting pressures,weight of moving equipment operated on formwork, weight of temporary construction materials, foundation pressures,superimposed loads, and for lateral stability. 03100-3 2. Design and fabricate formwork to be readily removable without imposing impact,shock, stress or other damage to concrete surfaces and adjacent work. B. Tolerances 1. Comply with requirements of ACI 117 and the following: — a. Connection of new concrete to existing concrete: Surfaces shall be flush within 1/16 of an inch. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify dimensions and elevations of concrete that will be formed. 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Erect,support, brace, and maintain formwork to support all loads that may be applied until such — loads can be supported by the concrete structure without damage. 1. Support and brace existing structures and newly placed concrete elements that will be subjected to loading and lateral forces from the concrete. 2. Do not erect formwork or anchorages on newly placed concrete sooner than 48-hours following completion of concrete finishing operations and until concrete has obtained minimum compressive strength of 1500 psi. B. Construct formwork so concrete will be of required size, shape,alignment, elevation, and position and in accordance with requirements of this Section. C. Forms abutting existing concrete surfaces: Fit forms over the existing or completed surface so as to obtain accurate alignment of the existing and completed surface and to prevent leakage of concrete materials. D. Inclined Surfaces: Provide top forms when required by slope. E. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways,reglets,recesses,and other locations as required to prevent swelling and to facilitate removal. F. Incorporate temporary formwork openings,at inconspicuous locations,when interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout,for inspection before concrete placement, and for — placement of concrete. 1. Securely brace temporary openings, seal and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of — concrete materials. G. Chamfer: All exposed corners and edges 3/-inch unless otherwise noted on Drawings. — 1. Miter chamfer at changes in direction. 03100-4 73. Embedded Items 1. Provide openings in formwork to accommodate work required under other Sections. a. Set and build into the work anchorages, fasteners and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, embedded in,passing through,or supported by cast-in-place concrete. (1) Accurately locate,securely support,level, plumb, straighten and set items to provide for the tolerance requirements for those materials. b. Coordinate work of other Sections and cooperate with trades involved in the forming and setting of anchorages,bearing plates, fasteners,openings,slots, recesses, sleeves,conduits,pipes and other items. 2. Embed plates for Precast concrete wall panel connections shall be placed, leveled and secured at proper location prior to placing cast-in-place concrete. Do not install embed plates after placing cast-in place concrete. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs 1. Set edge forms,bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain the required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. J. Falsework and Shoring 1. Install falsework and shoring to provide the required lines,camber, and grades in the completed concrete work. 2. Shore members that will be subjected to temporary construction loads, in excess of final service loads, to protect the members from damage. 3. Construct falsework and shoring on a solid footing and secure to prevent displacement, rotation,settlement, undermining and other damages or instability. a. Do not support falsework and shoring on other construction or existing structure unless that construction will support the applied loads without collapse, overstressing, or other damage. 4. Do not use materials when wear,damage, or defects make them incapable of supporting the loads for which they were designed. K. Re-shores 1. While re-shoring is underway,do not permit any construction load on new construction. 2. Place re-shores in sequence with form removal operations. 3. Tighten re-shores to carry load without overstressing concrete members. 4. Leave re-shore in place until concrete member has reached design strength. 03100-5 L. Preparation of Form Surfaces 1. Coat contact surface of forms with form-coating compound prior to installation of reinforcement,embedded anchorages and fasteners,and formwork onto or abutting previously placed or existing concrete. a. Prevent form-coating material contact with reinforcement,embedded items, or with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete,bonding agents,or grouts will be placed. Remove form coating contact with such surfaces so as not to interfere with bond of those surfaces. b. Coat steel forms with a non-staining,rust-preventative form oil or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable. —' 2. Thoroughly clean forms and formed area that will receive concrete. At time of concrete placement, formwork and the formed area shall be free of wood, sawdust, dirt, tie wire,and other debris_ M. Carefully inspect formwork and related support systems prior to,during and after concrete placement operations to ensure that forms are not displaced,that supporting structures are not overloaded or otherwise damaged,and that completed concrete work will be within specified tolerances. 1. Adjust formwork to required alignment, dimension and position. N. Removal of Forms 1. Remove in a manner that will not mar,spall or otherwise damage the concrete or other work. 2. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete: Formwork at locations such as sides of beams, walls,columns,and similar parts of the work,may be removed after cumulatively — curing concrete at not less than 50 degrees F. for 24-hours after its placement,provided all of the following criteria are met: a. Concrete has obtained strength required to not be damaged by form removal operations. b. Concrete curing and protection operations will be maintained in accordance with the requirements for those materials. c. Shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form — facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 3. Do not remove supporting forms and shoring for slabs,beams, channels,troughs,corbels, — brackets,haunches,cantilevered or Y-shaped elements,or other flexural members until concrete complies with all of the following criteria: a. No sooner than 14 days following concrete placement. b. Obtained a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi. — c. Of sufficient strength required to support its own weight and superimposed loads. 03100-6 d. Re-shore elements until elements have reached design strength. 4. Remove the removable portion of form ties in a manner and at the period required to prevent damage to concrete. 5. Do not remove bracing from sides of walls or columns until concrete element and foundation has reached design strength. ID. Re-Use of Forms 1. Clean,repair and prepare surfaces of forms that will be re-used. Split,frayed, delaminated,or otherwise damaged form facing material is not acceptable. a. Apply new form coating compound material to prepared concrete contact form surfaces as indicated for new formwork. b. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except when acceptable to ENGINEER. 2. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance,and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Remove and install new concrete work, when concrete work is not in accordance with indicated tolerances,or repair to the required tolerances when acceptable to ENGINEER. END OF SECTION 03100 03100-7 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT ]PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes fabrication and placement of reinforcement for cast-in-place concrete,including bars,welded wire fabric, smooth dowels,ties,and supports. B. Related Sections 1. General Specifications for Construction and Supplemental General Specifications for Construction,General Special Provisions and Division 1 Sections apply to the work of this Section. �- 2. Section 03100-Concrete Formwork 3. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete 1..02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute(ACI) 1. 117 Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 3. SP-66 Detailing Manual. B. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM). 1. Al 85 Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric,Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. A370 Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products. 3. A615 Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 4. A706 Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute(CRSI) 1. MSP Manual of Standard Practice. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: l. Shop Drawings: For fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcement in accordance with ACI SP-66. 03200-1 2. Mechanical test reports or mill test certification verifying materials are in accordance with the requirements of this Section. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall employ,at own expense,an independent testing laboratory approved by ENGINEER to perform required Source Quality Control Tests. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver,store,and handle reinforcement in a manner that will not induce or accelerate corrosion, contamination or physical damage. Clearly identify bars with weatherproof or metal tags bearing identification symbols used in Shop Drawings. — PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615,Grade 60 or ASTM A706 Grade 60. B. Welded Wire Fabric(WWF): ASTM A185,welded steel wire fabric. C. Reinforcement Material Supports and Spacers: Bolsters, chairs,spacers, and other devices for maintaining reinforcement materials accurately in place shall be in accordance with ACI-SP-66 and this Section. 1. Reinforcement supports shall be of adequate strength to support reinforcing bars without deflecting. 2. Wood, brick,masonry,rock,and other similar devices are not acceptable for use as supports within the concrete to be placed or within the completed concrete. 3. Supports shall not introduce paths of leakage of groundwater into the concrete or leakage of water out of liquid containing structures. 4. Mat Foundations: Utilize supports with sand plates or horizontal runners. Concrete blocks, with top of block flush with Subgrade surface,may be used to support chairs when other materials are not disturbed or damaged. 5. Footings and Slabs-on-Grade: Utilize supports with sand plates or horizontal runners. Concrete blocks,with top of block flush with Subgrade surface,may be used to support chairs when other materials are not disturbed or damaged. Precast concrete blocks with — minimum compressive strength of 6000 psi and meeting CRSI requirements may be used as supports. 6. Exposed-to-view concrete surfaces: If legs of supports are in contact with forms or with 1.5 inches of concrete surface, utilize supports with plastic protected legs in accordance with ACI-SP-66 Class 1 or stainless steel protected legs in accordance with ACI-SP-66 — Class 2,Type B. 03200-2 :2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to required shapes and dimensions, with fabrication tolerances complying with ACI-SP-66. Do not re-bend nor straighten reinforcement in a manner that will damage or weaken the material. 13. Unacceptable Materials: Do not utilize reinforcement with any of the following defects: 1. Bar lengths,depths,and bends exceeding indicated fabrication tolerances. 2. Bends and kinks not indicated on Drawings. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL " A. Employ an independent testing laboratory, acceptable to ENGINEER,to perform mechanical testing on each heat of reinforcing steel in accordance with ASTM A370 if a mill test certification indicating physical and chemical analysis is not available. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate and conditions under which concrete reinforcement will be performed. Verify location for reinforcement materials. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Do not install reinforcement on newly ptaced concrete sooner than 48-hours following completion of concrete finishing operations and until concrete has obtained minimum compressive strength of 1500 psi. E3. Install reinforcement materials securely at location, spacing and clear concrete cover noted in the standard structural notes or on the Drawings prior to concrete placement. If concrete cover is not specified on the Drawings, conform to ACI-318 for concrete cover over reinforcement. 1. Support and tie reinforcement materials at locations required for reinforcement to be maintained at required location and do not exceed the maximum recommended spacing of supports and ties indicated in ACI-318 and SP-66. 2. Concrete cover indicated on Drawings is the distance from the concrete surface at that location to the outermost surface of the reinforcement material. Maintain required clear cover at all locations of the respective section. C. Reinforcement Splice 1. Reinforcement: Continuous through construction joints unless otherwise noted on -- Drawings, Interrupt reinforcement at joints when noted on Drawings. 2. Splice reinforcement to maintain reinforcement continuity in the structure. Space dowels with respective reinforcement at joints unless otherwise noted on Drawings. 3. Lap reinforcement at splices. Provide contact lap of reinforcement splices of not less than the lengths indicated in the Drawings and the following: 03200-3 a. Bars: Class"B"as defined in ACI 318 unless otherwise noted on Drawings. b. WWF: Lap in accordance with ACI 318 unless otherwise noted on Drawings. 4. Circular Walls: Stagger splices in alternate bars a minimum of 36 inches or 2 times Class "B"lap for top bars unless otherwise noted on Drawings. No stagger of splices from base and footings to walls or columns is required. 5. Do not utilize welded connections or splices. D. Do not bend or straighten reinforcing bars which project from in-place concrete unless specifically indicated otherwise on the Drawings. E. Do not place concrete until reinforcement materials are accurately secured in required position and have been observed by the ENGINEER. F. When concrete is placed,reinforcement materials shall be free of contaminants,loose rust and mill scale, soil,ice,concrete,and other materials which reduce or prevent complete bond with concrete. G. When placement and tying of reinforcement bars for structural slab sections is completed and before the concrete delivery has been ordered for that section. Operate the concrete strike-off _ equipment over the entire section with a filler strip,one-quarter inch less in thickness than the clear concrete cover requirements attached, to the bottom of the strike-off to ensure that the required clear cover will be provided. H. Tolerances 1. Install reinforcement at the indicated location, spacing and clearances. 2. Tolerances shall comply with ACI-I 17. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Correct materials and work not in accordance with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 03200 03200-4 SECTION 0325I CONCRETE EXPANSION AND ISOLATION JOINT MATERIALS — PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes joint materials for cast-in-place concrete. B. ReIated Sections 1. General Specifications for Construction and Supplemental General Specifications for Construction, General Special Provisions and Division 1 Sections apply to the work of this Section. 2. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete 3. Section 07901 -Joint Sealers 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) 1. D 1751 Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. NIMR 2. D 1752 Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1- Manufacturer's Data: Product information, and test results for materials. 2. Samples: Submit samples of materials as requested by ENGINEER. Include name, source and description. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver,store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. 1. Maintain storage conditions within required ranges and with protections required to prevent damage. 03251-1 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 PREFORMED JOINT MATERIALS — A. Self-Expanding Cork 1. Resilient,pre-molded self-expanding cork in accordance with ASTM D 1752,Type III and the following requirements: a. When installed in the completed joint, cork shall contract and expand to remain in contact with the concrete joint side faces within a range of 50 percent to 140 percent of original joint thickness. Cork shall not have expanded more than 10 percent from its original manufactured width when installed and surrounded in the concrete. b. Factory wrapped in compressed moisture-proof packaging as required to provide — installed material with the indicated physical characteristics. B. Cork 1. Resilient,pre-molded cork in accordance with ASTM D 1752 Type U and the following requirements: a. Recover minimum of 95 percent of original thickness when compression is released. C. Fiber 1. Resilient,non-extruding type pre-molded bituminous impregnated fiberboard in accordance with ASTM D 1751. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS — A. Adhesive 1. Adhesive for securing cork to concrete surfaces shall be of type required to secure cork to the concrete joint side faces'without damaging concrete or joint materials and as recommended by cork manufacturer. B. Joint Sealers and Backer Materials: See Section 07900. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions existing at the time of installation. Do not proceed with placement if conditions are unsatisfactory. 03251-2 .3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation Clean concrete which will be in contact with joint material. a. Remove contaminants that could interfere with complete bond of the adhesive to the concrete. 2. Remove concrete projections and fill honeycombs and voids as required to provide flat uniform contact of the joint material and the concrete joint surfaces. B. Protect self-expanding cork from contact with moisture until encased in concrete. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Prime or seal surfaces if recommended by joint material manufacturer and install within air and concrete temperatures recommended by manufacturer. 1. Do not apply to moist or frost covered surfaces. B. Secure materials in place to prevent displacement and to provide completed joint as indicated. 1. At expansion joints,utilize adhesives to secure joint material. Do not utilize mechanical anchors. C. Size joint material to fill complete depth of the concrete section as required to provide indicated recess clearances below the concrete face and as required to accommodate other joint material as indicated. 1- Joint material shall be continuous-do not leave gaps or voids in or between ends of joint material except as required by other systems within the joint. 2. Where joints are not indicated to contain joint sealant, top of joint material shall be one-half inch below top of concrete except as otherwise noted. END OF SECTION 03251 0325I-3 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes site cast-in-place concrete work. B. Related Sections 1. General Specifications for Construction and Supplemental General Specifications for Construction, General Special Provisions and Division 1 Sections apply to the work of this Section. 2. Section 01400 -Quality Control 3. Section 03100-Concrete Formwork 4. Section 03200-Concrete Reinforcement 5. Section 03251 -Concrete Expansion and Isolation Joint Materials 6. Section 036I0-Non-Shrink Grout 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute(AC1) 1. 117 Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. 211.1 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,Heavyweight and Mass Concrete. 3. 224R Control of Cracking in Concrete Structures. 4. 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 5_ 304 Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing,Transporting and Placing Concrete. 6. 305R Hot Weather Concreting. 7. 306R Cold Weather Concreting. 8. 308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. 9. 309 Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete. 03300-1 B. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) 1. C31 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. — 2. C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 3. C39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 4. C42 Standard Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 5. C94 Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete. 6. C143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete. 7. C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 8. C171 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. —' 9. C172 Standard Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 10. C 192 Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. 11. C231 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 12. C260 Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 13. C309 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 14. C494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 15. C595 Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. 16. C618 Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. 17. C881 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin Systems for Concrete. — 18. C948 Standard Test Method for Dry and Wet Bulk Density Water Absorption and Apparent Porosity of Thin Sections of Glass-Fiber Reinforced Concrete. 19. C1012 Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hydraulic-Cement Mortars Exposed to a Mixed Sodium and Magnesium Sulfate Solution. 20. E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 03300-2 C. Corps of Engineers(CRD) 1. C300 Specifications for Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Concrete: The terms concrete,concrete fill, concrete topping and grout all refer to concrete and — the requirements of this Section. 1. Grout: Is intended to refer to concrete installed to ensure uniform bearing between adjacent materials,to assist in bonding section or to fill intended spaces between members. a. When less than 1.75 inch thickness grout does not require the use of coarse aggregate in the mix. 2. Concrete Fill: Is intended to refer to concrete installed above the top of the reinforced concrete structural section for the purpose of providing the required section slope or cross section. 3. Concrete Topping: Is intended to refer to concrete installed on top of a structural slab or plank system to assist in providing the required elevation or for structural section strength requirements. — E. Massive Concrete: Slabs and walls thicker than 36 inches. C. Non-Shrink Grout: Refers to concrete that will effectively not shrink or expand from its installed dimension and has the physical properties that are essentially the same as the adjacent concrete materials and as indicated in Section 03610. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's data and product information for manufactured materials and products. Include manufacturer's certifications and laboratory test reports. 2. Test Results: Prior to start of work,submit written reports for each material sampled and tested. Include project identification,date of report,name of Contractor,name of testing laboratory,source of material, manufacturer and brand name of manufactured products, specification requirements for each material,and corresponding test results. a. Certificates of material properties,signed by material producer and Contractor, certifying compliance with specified requirements,may be submitted instead of material reports when acceptable to ENGINEER. b. Tests must have been taken no more than 90 calendar days before Notice to Proceed. 3. Mix Designs: Written reports for each concrete designation proposed for use. 4. Delivery Tickets: Indicating concrete designation(class and mix), time of batching, — delivery truck number, and total quantity of water, cement,coarse aggregate,fine aggregate and admixtures utilized. 03300-3 5. Construction Joint Locations. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall employ an independent testing laboratory,acceptable to ENGINEER,to proportion and design concrete mixes, for Source Quality Control sampling and testing. 1. Testing laboratory providing Source Quality Control sampling and testing shall not be same as testing laboratory providing Field Quality Control testing,unless approved by ENGINEER. B. Testing Laboratory shall perform Field Quality Control sampling and testing. Refer to Section 01400. — C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting,as required by ENGINEER,at any time during progress of cast-in-place concrete work. Allow free access of testing laboratory to — material stockpiles and facilities at all times. Tests including retesting of rejected materials and installed work shall be at Contractor's own expense,unless otherwise indicated. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's undamaged,unopened containers clearly marked with following information: 1. Product name 2. Manufacturer's name 3. Component designation(such as"A"or"B") 4. Complete mixing instructions 5. Storage requirements B. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations, — with seals and labels intact and legible. Maintain storage conditions within the required ranges. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement — 1. Portland Cement Type I,ASTM CI50,for all concrete,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Portland Pozzolan Cement,Type IP(MS),ASTM C595,interground by cement manufacturer with pozzolan content of the cement not more than 20 percent by weight and in accordance with ASTM C618,Class F,with loss of ignition not exceeding 5 _. percent. a. Pozzolan portion shall pass ASTM C1012. b. Utilize pozzolan from a single source. 03300-4 3. Portland Type II,ASTM C150. 4. Utilize only one brand of cement for each required type throughout Project. 5. Alkalies(Na20+0.658k20)content of Cement: Not exceeding 0.60 percent. B. Fine Aggregate 1. Natural sand and in accordance with ASTM C33. C. Coarse Aggregate 1. ASTM C33,Class 4S `— a. Aggregate utilized shall have been tested in accordance with requirements of ASTM C227,C287,C295 and shall not be considered to be potential reactive from those test results. b. At structures or portions of structures designed to contain,retain, or resist wastewater materials or effluent,groundwater conditions, and at structural slabs exposed to the exterior or freeze/thaw environments,utilize coarse aggregate in accordance with the indicated ASTM C33 requirements and the following additional requirements: (1) Maximum Allowable Clay Lumps and Friable Particles: 2.0 percent. (2) Maximum Allowable Chert(less than 2.40 SP GR SSD): 1.0 percent. (3) Maximum Allowable Sum of Clay Lumps, Friable Particles and Chert (less than 2.40 SP GR SSD): 2.0 percent. (4) Maximum Percentage of Flat and Elongated Particles with Long Dimension More Than 5 Times Short Dimension: 15 percent. 2. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: In accordance with ACI 301 and for the intent of reducing required total cement content,utilize aggregate with nominal maximum size not less than the following. a. Sections exceeding 5 inch minimum thickness: 3/4 inches. b. Sections equal to or greater than 1.75 inch minimum thickness but less than or equal to 5 inches in thickness: 3/8 inch. 3. For Massive Concrete: Aggregate complying with requirements of this Section and of a high modulus, low absorption rock,well graded,well shaped and that will provide low shrinkage concrete to assist in crack control in accordance with recommendations of — ACI 224R. D. Water: CIean,potable,and free from detrimental amounts of mineral and organic substances. E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260. 03300-5 F. Set-Controlling Admixtures 1. Verify compatibility of admixtures with concrete materials and for project conditions and _ environment. 2. Non-corrosive and in accordance with ASTM C494 as follows: a. Type A,water-reducing b. Type D, water-reducing and retarding c. Type E,water reducing and accelerating 3. Calcium Chloride: Do not use calcium chloride as an admixture or in an admixture in concrete. 4. Use of admixtures is subject to ENGINEER approval. 5. FIy Ash: ASTM C618,Class F with loss of ignition of less than 3 percent. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Evaporation Reducer 1. Liquid evaporation reducer shall be sprayable water based compound capable of reducing evaporation in rapid drying conditions. — 2. Evaporation reducer shall have fluorescent color tint. 3. Mix and prepare in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4_ Manufactures units a. Confiim,Master Builders b. Euco-bar, Euclid Chemical Co. c. Or others, and which meets these specifications,will be accepted. B. Curing Materials 1. White Waterproof Paper: ASTM C171. 2. White Polyethylene Film: ASTM C171. 3. White-Burlap-Polyethylene Sheet: ASTM C171. 4. Clear Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compounds: Clear compound in accordance _ with ASTM C309 Type 1 and physical requirements of CRD C300. a. For exterior work,provide with fugitive dye. 5. White Pigmented Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: White pigmented compound in accordance with ASTM C309,Type 2. 03300.6 B. Bond Breaker. Utilize liquid membrane-forming curing compound when a bond breaker is noted on Drawings. C. Gravity Crack Fillers: Two component,solvent free,moisture-insensitive,epoxy resin system and of viscosity required for complete gravity filling of cracks of 10 mil.width and wider. 1. Manufactured Units a. Sikadur HI Mod LV,Sika Corporation — b. Euco 452, Euclid Chemical Co. c. Or equal D. Injected Crack Fillers: Two component epoxy resin,moisture-insensitive, with viscosity required for complete filling of the crack and in accordance with ASTM C881,Type 1. Provide viscosity in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for project conditions and environment. 1. Manufactures Units -- a. Adhesive Engineering 1400 Series,Adhesive Engineering,Inc. b. Rescon Injection Resin,Rescon Technology Corp. — c. Euco 452, Euclid Chemical Co. d. Or equal 2.03 BONDING AGENTS AND GROUTS A. Type I Bonding Agent(Bonding Grout) 1. Equal parts by weight of Portland cement and sand mixed with sufficient water to form a slurry having consistency of thick cream. Grout shall not be self-leveling. a. For Vertical Surfaces: Thin grout with additional water to paint-like consistency. B. Type II Bonding Agent 1. Latex bonding agent,non-re-emulsifiable and in accordance with ASTM C1059,Type II. 2. Mix,and prepare in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Verify compatibility with concrete materials and project conditions. C. Grout for Reinforcement Dowels — 1. Moisture-insensitive, two-component epoxy,composed of resin and hardener, contained in dual chambered cartridge,meeting ASTM C881,Type IV,Grade 3. Components shall be blended by a static mixer nozzle attached to cartridge. a. Provide strength required to result in yielding of anchor bolt and reinforcement prior to grout or bond failure at an embedment depth of 12 bar/bolt diameters. 00300-7 b. Grout shall maintain this strength without creep and with a maximum of 20 percent strength reduction within a service environment of minus 50 degrees F. to plus 150 degrees F. 2. Manufactured Units a. Anchor-It System,Adhesives Technology Corp. b. Hilti HSE 2411,Hilt: Fastening Systems c. Epcon System Ceramic 6,ITW Ramset/Redhead d. Or equal D. Equipment and Base Plate Leveling Grout: Refer to Section 03610 2.04 CONCRETE MIXES A. Proportioning 1. Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch method or previous field experience method,using materials to be employed on the Project for each concrete designation required, in accordance with ACI 211.1, ACI 301 and to comply with the properties and requirements of this Section. a. Proportioning on the Basis of Trial Mixtures: When laboratory trial batches are — used to select concrete proportions,prepare test specimens in accordance with ASTM C192 and conduct strength tests in accordance with ASTM C39. (1) Establish a curve shoring relationship between water-cement ratio or cement content and compressive strength,with a least 3 points representing batches which produce strengths above and 3 points below the required strength. Use not less than 3 specimens tested at 28 days to establish each point on the curve. b. Proportioning Based on Previous Field Experience: Use when acceptable to ENGINEER. 2. Concrete: Composed of Portland cement, fly ash,fine aggregate,coarse aggregate,water,and admixtures indicated in this Section. No concrete shall be placed without acceptance by ENGINEER of each design mix proposed. Use of fly ash is optional. a. Concrete for section less than a minimum thickness of 1.75 inches do not require coarse aggregate, subject to the requirements of this Section. b. Modify mix design when characteristics of materials,project conditions,results of previous placements,test results,weather or other conditions indicate that modification are required. Laboratory test data for revised mix designs and -- strength results shall be accepted by ENGINEER before use in the work. 03300-8 3. Concrete Class Requirements: Class Maximum Minimum Maximum Maximum Water/Cement Compressive Slump, Slump, Ratio Strength inches* inches** at 28 days,psi A 0.45 4,000 3.0 4.0 B 0.50 3,500 3.0 4.0 F 0.55 3,000 4.0 5.0 M 0.45 3,500 2.0 _ 3.0 _ HS 0.45 6,000 3.0 4.0 *without water reducing admixture **with water reducing admixture a. Utilize the minimum cement and water content in the concrete mix required to comply with mix properties and requirements of this Section so as to reduce the heat of hydration in concrete for the purpose of assisting in reducing concrete shrinkage or cracking,and to increase concrete durability. — 4. Concrete Mix Classification Requirements: Mix Cement 1 Type I 2 Type II 5. Proportioning concrete containing pozzolanic materials: Refer to requirements of ACI 211.1 for proportioning water-cement ratio by weight equivalency. Pozzolans shall not exceed 25 percent by weight of the cement plus pozzolans. 6. Aggregates — a. Incorporate coarse aggregate in concrete in greatest amount and size consistent with required workability and requirements of this Section. — b. Ratio of fine aggregate to total aggregate: In accordance with ACI 211.1 recommendations. 7. Admixtures a. Do not utilize substances other than cement, fly ash,aggregate,water, water reducer,and air-entraining admixture in concrete except as included in mix design proposed for use and accepted by ENGINEER. (I) Verify compatibility of admixtures with concrete materials for project conditions and environment. b. Proportion and mix admixtures in accordance with admixture manufacturer's — recommendations. (1) No reduction in normal cement content of concrete mix shall be made — when accelerators, retarders,or water reducing admixtures are utilized. 03300-9 c. Air-entraining admixture: Incorporate in concrete unless specifically indicated otherwise at rate required to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content for applicable maximum aggregate size within following limits: Air Content Maximum Aggregate Size (Percent) (Inches 5.0 plus or minus 1.0 percent 2 5.5 plus or minus 1.0 percent 1-1/2 6.0 plus or minus 1.0 percent 1 — 6.5 plus or minus 1.0 percent 3/4 7.0 plus or minus 1.0 percent 1/2 7.5 plus or minus 1.0 percent 3/8 — 8. Slump Limits a. Proportion concrete mixes to result in slump at point of placement not exceeding the indicated maximum slump. 4. Massive Concrete a. Concrete sections thicker than 36 inches are classified as Massive Concrete.. b. Proportion Massive Concrete mixes to comply with requirements of this Section, to control heat of hydration and to limit the creation of thermal induced cracking. Incorporate the recommendations of ACI 211.1 and 301 and to the extent — required, measures such as the following to prevent damage to concrete: (1) Increase the percentage or the maximum size of coarse aggregate. — (2) Reduce sand content. (3) Reduce concrete mix temperature. (4) Reduce slump. (5) Less than half of the smooth grading curve amount of small coarse aggregate,No.4 to 3/8 or 3/4 inch. (6) Replace portion of mixing water with ice or chill the aggregate. 13. Concrete Designations 1. Provide concrete of the following class and mix designation when placed in the following locations unless otherwise indicated. The list of systems for which a particular concrete — designation shall be utilized is only a guide and is not intended to be a complete listing of all locations where a specific concrete designation is to be utilized. a. Class A-Mix 1 (Al) (1) Aprons,beams, columns,corbels,curbs, floors, footings,stairs,walks, walls,topping, elevated structural slabs,base slabs,slabs-on-grade,and other sections with exception of Massive Concrete walls and base slabs. 03300-10 (2) Use in following structures: Bypass Structure Pump Station Sump Pump Manhole Headwall/Aprons b. Class B-Mix 2(B2) (1) Concrete fill and grout fill except where HS1 is noted to be used. c. Class B-Mix 2(B2) (1) Equipment and pipe pads. d. Class F-Mix(F1) (1) Buried pipe encasement,pipe cradles and electrical duct-banks with limits as indicated on Electrical Drawings_ e. ClassM-Mix2(M2) (1) Walls and base slabs classified as Massive Concrete. (2) Use in following structures: Bypass Structure Pump Station f. Class HS -Mix 1 (HS1) (1) Maximum size aggregate shall be limited to 3/4 inch. -- (2) Use in bypass channel and outlet cell of bypass structure. C. Concrete Mixing 1. Measure materials, batch,mix and deliver in accordance with requirements of this Section and ASTM C94. a. Do not add water to concrete at Project site unless resulting total water content will be less than that for the specified maximum water-cement ratio and approved by ENGINEER. b. Reduce delivery time as indicated in ASTM C94 during hot weather or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete. 2.035 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent testing laboratory shall conduct tests on concrete materials proposed for use as follows: .— 1. Cement Materials 03300-11 a. Sample and test to verify conformance to requirements of applicable ASTM C 150,C595 and C618 specifications for each cement type proposed for use. b. Alkalies: When a restricted level of Alkalies is specified,test to verify alkalies percentage prior to use and at least after every 3,000 cubic yards of concrete placed thereafter. c. Fly Ash: Test to verify fly ash percentage of cement,and the loss of ignition of the fly ash requirements of ASTM C618 prior to use and at least after every 3,000 cubic yards of concrete placed thereafter. 2_ Fine Aggregate a. Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM C33 on each gradation of fine aggregate. 3. Coarse Aggregate a. Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM C33 modified as indicated. _ B. When duration of concrete placement exceeds 15 calendar months from initial utilization of approved concrete materials,re-conduct indicated Source Quality Control test and submit results. _ C. Test materials or sources which are changed or modified during the project prior to their use. PART 3: EXECUTION "- 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions existing at the time of concrete placement. Do not proceed with placement if conditions are unsatisfactory. Verify that moisture condition and temperature is in compliance with indicated requirements. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Concrete Joints 1. Place concrete continuous and monolithic except at designated construction,expansion _ and isolation joints noted on Drawings unless otherwise approved by ENGINEER. a. Do not place concrete in other systems that will be supported on concrete vertical support members until concrete in those vertical members is no longer plastic. b. Delay concrete placement of adjacent wall sections at construction joints for a minimum of 48 hours. 2. Construction Joints a. Roughened Concrete: Provide 1/4 inch deep surface amplitude of concrete when designated on Drawings. Provide smooth surface within one inch of exposed finished edges. b. Keyway: Provide continuous key of indicated dimensions. 03300-12 3. Control Joints in Non-Structural Slabs-On-Grade and Concrete Floor Toppings a. Tool or saw cut to provide cross section, dimensions and patterns indicated on Drawings. (1) Saw cut Joints: Saw cut as soon as concrete has cured sufficiently to prevent raveling, but before shrinkage stresses produce cracking. (2) If concrete cracks prior to or during saw cutting,remove and provide new or repair as required by ENGINEER_ 4. Expansion Joints a. Install expansion joints indicated on Drawings. Adjust width of joint opening as indicated in Section 03251, for ambient and structure temperature to provide the indicated joint width at 50 degrees F. 5. Isolation Joints in Non-Structural Slabs-On-Grade a. Install isolation joints in slabs-on-grade at all locations in contact between nonstructural slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces,such as column pedestals, foundations walls,utilities,and locations indicated on Drawings. 6. Bonding at Construction Joints a. Clean existing concrete and previously placed hardened concrete against which new concrete is to be placed of coatings, dirt,grease, concrete laitance,and other contaminants that could impair or impede complete bond of the sections. Remove loose, unsound,and deteriorated concrete with high pressure water blast. (1) Surfaces that will receive a grout bonding agent or no bonding agent: Wet concrete 24 hours in advance of concrete placement. (2) Concrete substrate shall not be saturated and shall be free of standing water at time of placement. b. Apply bonding agent at prepared construction joints immediately prior to concrete or grout placement. (1) Bonding agent is not required at base slab to wall construction joints nor at vertical wall to wall construction joints when Iength of pour exceeds 10 feet and height of pour is at least one foot. At these locations,wet concrete surface immediately prior to placement, but concrete surface shall not be saturated or contain standing water at time of concrete placement. c. Latex Bonding Agent (1) Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for project conditions and environment on clean,dry,prepared surfaces_ 03300-13 (2) Limit thickness to that required and recommended by manufacturer to obtain complete bond. Do not puddle or utilize excessive thicknesses which will create a weakened section of concrete or increase the _ potential for coefficient of expansion incompatibility with concrete substrate. (3) Place concrete and grout when bonding agent is within phase required to obtain complete bond of subsequent concrete placement within the substrate concrete. (4) If bonding agent cures beyond the condition required for complete bond of the concrete sections,completely remove bonding agent, clean substrate,and apply new coat of bonding agent. —' d. Grout Bonding Agent (1) Thoroughly scmb grout into substrate to completely coat substrate at a rigidly controlled rate immediately before concrete placement and as required to obtain complete bond of the concrete sections. (2) Do not place concrete on dried grout bonding agent. If grout dries, loses plasticity prior to placement of concrete,or otherwise will not provide — for the complete bonding of the sections,completely remove grout,clean substrate and apply new coat of bonding agent. 7. Concrete Fill,Toppings,Grout Fill and Patches — a. Temperature of concrete or grout mix: Between 50 and 70 degrees F.,and not more than 10 degrees F. variance from temperature of concrete substrate. b. Maintain concrete substrate as cool as possible,but within temperature limits indicated above, to reduce potential for shrinkage of concrete topping, filling or — patching mix. B. Embedded Items l. Verify that embedded items and other work and concrete accessories that will be cast in concrete are accurately located,securely supported,and are not disturbed during concrete — placement and curing. 2. Floor Drains: Verify elevation before placing concrete to provide required floor slope. Slope floors down to drains. If slope information is not indicated on Drawings,obtain required information from ENGINEER before placement. 3. Embed accurate temperature gauges,probes or thermocouples in concrete to monitor and to assist in controlling temperature gradient in massive concrete placements which temperatures ranges indicated. C. Equipment Pads 1. Coordinate dimensions and details of concrete pads and platforms for equipment with respective trades and manufacturers. 03300-14 2. Set anchor bolts for equipment at elevations and locations in accordance with recommendations of equipment manufacturer and the Contract Documents. I). Formwork 1. Inspect formwork verifying formwork is in accordance with Section 03100. E. Reinforcement 1. Inspect reinforcement verifying reinforcement is in accordance with Section 03200. F. Supported Elements 1. Do not install supported elements,including walls, columns,beams or slabs on newly —' placed concrete sooner than 72 hours following completion of concrete finishing operations and until concrete has obtained minimum compressive strength of 2000 psi. 3.03 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Embedded Items 1. Protect items embedded or cast-in concrete from disturbance and misalignment from their required location and position. 2_ Do not cast-in electrical conduits in plane of concrete walls, base slabs or elevated slabs. B. Conveying 1. Maintain continuous delivery of concrete from mixer or transport vehicle to point of final deposit by methods which prevent segregation and Ioss of materials and in accordance with ACI 304. 2. Maintain inner surfaces of conveying equipment free of hardened concrete and foreign materials during concrete placement. 3. Do not use equipment which causes aluminum surfaces to come in contact with concrete mix. C, Depositing 1. Deposit concrete by methods which prevent segregation of materials and in accordance with ACI 304 and this Section_ Free fall of concrete shall not exceed 3 feet. a. Place concrete in final position utilizing methods which will prevent segregation. 2. Deposit concrete continuously in layers such that no concrete will be placed on concrete '— which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section,and in the depth required to ensure complete consolidation but not exceeding 18 inches in thickness. 3. Deposit concrete by methods which prevents concrete to splash onto forms and reinforcement above level of concrete in place. Remove accumulations of hardened or partially hardened concrete from formwork and reinforcement before subsequent concrete placement. 03300-15 D. Consolidating 1. Utilize equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete in accordance with ACI 309 for type of concrete and project conditions and in accordance with this Section. a. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. 2. Consolidate concrete to provide a uniform and dense concrete, free of segregation,voids and honeycomb and that is completely bonded to adjoining materials,reinforcement and embedded items. 3. Supplement vibration with hand-spading,rodding and tamping of plastic concrete to prevent honeycomb,segregation and voids in concrete. — 4. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations,not farther apart than visible effectiveness of vibrator. Prevent bottom of vibrator from laying on or riding — formwork. 5. Insert vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer of concrete and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. 6_ Consolidate leveling grout for equipment base plates as required to provide a solid, — dense,durable installation in which leveling grout is completely bonded to substrate. E. Cold Weather Placement 1. Protect concrete from physical damage and strength reduction associated with cold weather placement in accordance with ACI 306R and this Section. 2. When air temperature has fallen to, or is expected to fall,below 40 degrees F.during the next 24 hours,uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing as required to obtain minimum concrete temperature specified in ACE 306R. Do not heat cement and do not allow cement to come in contact with batch material whose temperature exceeds 100 degrees F. a. Heat materials uniformly in a manner that will not cause damage. (1) Heating with steam jets in hopper is not permitted. (2) Heating with mixer heaters intended for heating batch materials within mixer drum is not permitted. (3) Spot heating of materials as work progresses is not permitted. 3. Maintain materials and surfaces that will be in contact with freshly placed concrete above — 35 degrees F.and free of frozen materials. 4. Place massive concrete in accordance with ACI 211.1,ACI 224R, ACI 301, and — ACI 306R during cold weather placement. a. Continuously monitor temperature gradients in massive concrete at several _ locations. Adjust concrete temperature and curing to be in accordance with indicated concrete temperature gradients. 03300-16 F. Hot Weather Placing 1. When high air temperature,low relative humidity,and wind velocity combine to create conditions which will impair concrete quality and strength,mix,transport and place concrete in accordance with ACI 305R and this Section to minimize detrimental effects of hot weather concrete placement. 2. Prevent detrimental effects on concrete associated with hot weather placement by utilizing measures such as the following: a. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 degrees F. Crushed or chipped ice may be utilized to control concrete temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Mix until ice has melted and the concrete is uniform. b. Cover reinforcement with water-soaked burlap to reduce its temperature at time of concrete encasement. c. Wet forms thoroughly before placing concrete, but keep free of standing water at time of concrete placement. d. Erect temporary windbreaks and sunshields in arid or windy conditions to prevent premature drying, cracking or otherwise damaging the concrete. — e. Coordinate dispatch of trucks with rate of placement to avoid delays on delivery. f. Coat flatwork with evaporation reducer after screeding concrete. g. Schedule placement for cooler periods of the day to control concrete temperature and hydration. 3. Place massive concrete in accordance with ACI 211.1, ACI 224R, ACI 301 and ACI 305R during hot weather placement. a. Continuously monitor temperature gradients in massive concrete at several locations. Adjust concrete temperature and curing to be in accordance with specified concrete temperature gradients. 3.04 FINISH OF UNFORMED SURFACES — A. Finish slabs to further consolidate, level and provide the required surface finish. Perform in manner at the interval required to prevent concrete chipping, scaling, spalling and other durability problems. B. Float Finish -- 1. After completion of screeding to required elevation and tolerance, apply float finish to surfaces in accordance with ACI 301. — 2. Check and level surface plane to indicated tolerance requirements. Cut down high spots and fill low spots while concrete is still plastic. a. When sloped concrete is indicated,maintain a uniform slope to drain as indicated. 03300-17 3. Float to provide a uniform appearance,texture,and planeness and with coarse aggregate beneath the surface_ 4. Tool corners and edges to provide uniform radius and planeness. C. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish on monolithic slab surfaces that will receive a concrete topping or concrete fill. 1. After placing slabs to indicated tolerances,roughen surface before final set to provide 1/4 inch surface amplitude. D. Trowel Finish 1. Apply trowel finish to interior slab and floor surfaces that will be exposed to view,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Finish concrete free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance_ a. Perform troweling operations and its sequence in a manner that will not result in _ a low durability or high water,cement or mortar content concrete surface. E. Broom Finish 1. Exterior slabs,platforms, stoops,aprons,steps and sidewalks. a. After float finish,brush with stiff bristled broom perpendicular to traffic direction — so as to produce a slightly textured surface finish that will provide increased slip resistance for wet surfaces, and a surface that will be uniform in texture and appearance. 3.05 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. General 1. Immediately after removal of forms,examine concrete surfaces for areas of unsound _ concrete and defective surfaces. Concrete with porosity,honeycombs, segregated materials or that is otherwise defective,shall be removed and replaced with new or repaired when approved by ENGINEER. a. Do not perform Ordinary Surface Finish,removal or repairs until ENGINEER has observed concrete surface and has evaluated extent of required modifications. b. In general, small surface voids may be repaired with mortar; larger areas may require removal and replacement with new concrete. 2. Ordinary Surface Finish: Provide on all formed surfaces of concrete structures. 3_ Rubbed Surface Finish: Provide on formed surfaces that will not be in contact with earth or that will not be covered by building materials,other than coating systems, in addition to the required Ordinary Surface Finish. 03300-18 13. Ordinary Surface Finish 1. Remove fins and projections from exposed surfaces and from non-exposed surfaces that will be covered with a waterproofing system. a. Bonding agent,mechanical bonds,or both may be required for the repair. b. Cure and protect work in accordance with requirements of this Section for Cast-In-Place Concrete. 2. Repair small surface cavities produced by form ties,holes with diameters of approximately 3/8 inch and greater but less than 1.5 inches,and smaller holes spaced so closely as to be conspicuous. a. Remove contaminants that could interfere with complete bond of the repair and remove unsound areas prior to installing repair material. b. Completely fill cavities and voids with mortar and compact into place. Point and trim mortar flush to match adjacent concrete surfaces. Remove mortar stains and streaks on surface exposed to view. c. Mortar: Consist by weight of 1.part Portland cement,2 parts silica sand, bonding agent,and the amount of water required to produce required mortar consistency while keeping mortar as dry as possible to prevent shrinkage and cracking of the installed mortar. (1) To further reduce plastic shrinkage,mix mortar approximately 1 hour before use, protect from drying, and re-mix prior to use. Do not utilize mortar that has dried or set. (2) Incorporate an approved compatible latex or acrylic-based bonding agent into mortar mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. d. Continuously moisten cure mortar and protect from freezing for a minimum of 48 hours and as required to provide completely bonded,crack-free, dense and durable repair. When work is performed prior to completion of the concrete curing period,minimize interruption of the curing and protection of concrete section. e. When dry, color of repaired areas that will be exposed and not covered by coatings, shall match that of adjoining concrete. C. Rubbed Surface Finish 1. Provide Rubbed Finish on exterior and interior concrete surfaces in accordance with the following: a. Full height of interior faces of walls and beams and projecting surfaces and bottom face of elevated slabs and beams, inside pump station, bypass structure and channels. b. Exterior face of exterior walls to depth of one foot below finished grade. 03300-19 2. Perform Ordinary Surface Finish prior to Rubbed Surface Finish. a. Small holes and pinholes may be filled by Rubbed Surface Finish when the required completed surface is provided. 3. Prior to mortar application,sandblast surfaces until blemishes,discolorations and thin _ mortar films covering surface voids have been removed. 4. When structure has been completed to extent that further blemishes and discolorations on surface will not result from remaining work,finish in accordance with the following: — a. Clean the surface to remove contaminants that would interfere with complete bond of the finishing materials with the concrete. — b. Saturate surface with water. Maintain moist surface at time of mortar application. — c. Mortar: Consist by weight of 1 part white cement, 1 part Portland cement,2 parts silica sand,bonding agent and water in the amount required to produce moderately thick paste. (1) Incorporate an approved compatible latex-or acrylic-based bonding _ agent into the mortar mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for project conditions. d. Apply mortar with a rubber float and completely fill all voids,beginning at highest point of section. e. Cure mortar at a temperature above 40 degrees F., and maintain a continuously damp surface for the period required to provide indicated surface finish,but not for less than 48 hours. Mortar that is allowed to dry or is intermittently allowed to dry and then re-wetted will not be considered to have been adequately cured. — f. Complete the surface finish of any area in same day and make limits of a finished area at natural breaks in the surface. — g_ Completed Surface: Uniform in color, texture and appearance,except for difference in texture between filled voids and remainder of surface,fully bonded to the concrete and free of blemishes,cracks,delaminations, discolorations, peeling,surface voids,and conspicuous form marks. 3.06 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION — A. General Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying,freezing temperatures,high temperatures, abrupt temperature changes, vibrations,and prematurely applied loads. a. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for required hydration of cement and strength development of concrete and without distress to the concrete. 2. Start curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after concrete placing and finishing. 03300-20 13. Curing Systems 1. Cure concrete by moist curing,moisture-retaining cover curing or by membrane curing, unless a specific curing system or combinations of curing systems are specified. a. Membrane Curing: Do not apply to concrete that will receive a subsequent concrete placement,a coating,or other material that is intended to bond to the substrate concrete. b. Form Surfaces: Moist cure concrete with forms in place. If forms are removed prior to end of curing,maintain a curing system for the duration of the required curing period. 2. Moist Curing a. Maintain concrete continuously wet during the curing period. Concrete allowed to dry or intermittently allowed to dry and then re-wetted shall not be considered to have been adequately cured. b. Cover concrete directly with a continuous absorptive cover that is maintained in a saturated condition to maintain the concrete surface continuously wet during the curing period. Lap at edges,maintain free of holes and other discontinuities, cover and restrain to keep cover in continuous contact with the concrete surface throughout the curing period. 3. Moisture-Retaining Cover Curing a. Cover concrete surfaces directly with a continuous moisture-retaining cover that will retain concrete in continuous moist condition during the curing period. b. Lap at edges,maintain free of holes and other discontinuities,and restrained to keep cover in continuous contact with the concrete surface throughout the curing period. 4. Membrane Curing a. Apply two continuous, uniform coats in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent moisture loss from concrete and the requirements of this Section. The second coat shall be applied in direction perpendicular to first coat. Re-coat areas subjected to rainfall during first 3 hours after membrane application. Protect and maintain continuous, uniform coating and repair damage to coating during curing period. b. Use white pigmented liquid membrane-forming curing compound for massive concrete exposed to sunlight. Protection 1. Maintain continuous concrete curing and protection in accordance with ACI 301, 305R, — 306R,308 and in accordance with the following, but not less than 7 days, 14 days for Massive Concrete: a. Obtain compressive strength prior to exposure to freezing temperatures of not less than the following: 03300-21 (1) 4,000 psi minimum for concrete that,in the construction phase or in its service environment, will be exposed to water,or to freeze/thaw conditions. (2) 3,000 psi minimum for other concrete. b. Obtain compressive strength required to resist superimposed loads. c. For the concrete to obtain its designated 28 day design compressive strength. 2. Utilize covers,enclosures,insulation,or heat to prevent concrete from freezing and provide extra protection to areas more subject to freezing such as corners and edges of concrete sections. a. Heat enclosure to continuously maintain concrete within required temperatures, utilizing steam, forced hot air,or other methods that will not damage the — concrete. Vent heater exhaust gas outside of enclosures. Do not use open fires, salamanders or similar methods that can damage the concrete. b. When hot air type heaters are utilized,utilize measures required to prevent dehydration of concrete. 3. Termination of Curing and Protection a. Maintain covering, enclosures and other protection in place but without further wetting and heating to allow the concrete to gradually obtain ambient temperature and moisture conditions and reduce the potential for shrinkage and thermal related concrete distress. b. Control rate of temperature reduction so as not to exceed 5 degrees F. in any 1 hour period and 20 degrees F.during any 12 hour period,unless otherwise noted. (1) Massive Concrete: Control rate of temperature reduction or increase adjacent to concrete surface to not exceed 3 degrees F. in any 1 hour period and 30 degrees F. in any 24 hour period. 4. Protect slabs cast against earth, including tank bottoms,with a covering of non-staining insulating material or by other means required to prevent frost penetration into Subgrade. 5. Cold Weather and Hot Weather Concrete Temperature: Record time,date, weather conditions,outside air temperature,and temperature of concrete at time of concrete placement. Record maximum and minimum temperatures,during each 24 hour period,at — several locations within enclosures and on concrete surfaces,edges,and corners to monitor temperatures throughout the concrete during the curing period. Embed accurate temperature measuring devices in concrete or place a thermometer against surface under — a temporary cover of thick insulation until a constant temperature is registered_ Monitor temperatures and take measures required to maintain concrete within temperatures specified. 03300-22 I). Strength Gain 1. Strength gain shall not be credited for any period of time in which concrete does not indicate presence of surface-moist condition, except those surfaces cured by membrane curing and not required to be cured by moist curing or moisture-retaining cover,or for any period of time when temperature at concrete surface is less than 40 degrees F. In the event of exposure of concrete to freezing temperatures or the curing not complying with indicated requirements, ENGINEER will deem affected section, or partial section,to be defective. 2. Depending on extent of damage caused by exposure,as determined by ENGINEER, affected section shall be: a. removed and provided with new concrete; b. removed to a depth specified by ENGINEER, sandblasted and over-layed with approved repair materials; c. subject to a reduction in payment as determined equitable by ENGINEER;or d. subject to a combination of these remedies. 3.07 EPDXY GROUTED DOWELS A. Install grouted reinforcement dowels indicated on Drawings. 1. Embedment Length: If not indicated on Drawings, provide the following: a. Deformed reinforcement bars: Provide minimum embedment depth of 15 times bar diameter, and maintain 6 bar diameter minimum clearance from bottom of bar to far face of concrete. 2. Edge Distance: When not indicated on Drawings,provide minimum clearance to edge of concrete of 6 bar diameters. B. Locate reinforcement with pachometer or other non-destructive means prior to drilling hole. Adjust location of hole,without imposing on required clearances, to prevent cutting or damaging reinforcement and maintain a minimum of 1 inch clearance between reinforcement and new bar. C. Drilling of Holes 1. Utilize carbide tipped drill bits and drilling equipment that will not crack,spall or otherwise damage concrete and to provide a rougher cut for increased bond of the grout to the concrete substrate. a. Do not drill holes in newly placed concrete until concrete has reached design — compressive strength. 2. Drill hole diameter 1/8 inch larger than reinforcing bar diameter and as recommended by grout manufacturer to obtain full strength with limited grout creep, to limit entrapped air, and to provide a completely bonded bar. 03300-23 a. Drill hole straight and in alignment required for the bar to be at the indicated location and angle while centered in the hole throughout the bar length. 3. Prepare drilled hole to provide completely bonded bar and in accordance with the following: a. Clean hole utilizing oil-free compressed air nozzle,blow-bulb or vacuum nozzle in conjunction with nylon brush to provide clean and dry hole. D. Grout Mixing 1. Grout components shall be thoroughly mixed by static mixer tube. Dispense and discard approximately one ounce of material to ensure proper blending.E. Grout and Bar Installation 1. Air, concrete substrate and grout temperatures at time of placement and during curing period: Within temperature range of 40 degrees F.and 90 degrees F. and as recommended by grout manufacturer for complete strength development and curing. — 2. General a. Reinforcement bars: Clean, dry and free of oil,grease and loose rust at time of grout placement. b. Hole: Clean and dry at time of grout placement. — (1) Bar may be grouted in damp hole provided there is no standing or visible water on hole surfaces,bar is dry,and provided grout is recommended by grout manufacturer for use in a moist or damp hole. 3. Grout Installation a. Install static mixer tube to bottom of cleaned hole and inject grout into hole. Fill hole to approximately one-half depth while slowly withdrawing nozzle. Insert bar by hand to bottom of hole,using slow twisting motion to ensure complete filling of the hole without voids and entrapment of air,provide complete bond of the grouted bar,and provide the indicated strength. Position and secure bar in center of hole with template or wedges and protect until grout has cured. F. Curing and Protection I. Maintain at temperature required to obtain complete strength. G. Loading — 1. Do not load or stress grouted rods or reinforcement until grout and concrete design strengths have been obtained. 03300-24 — 3.08 TOLERANCES A. Concrete shall meet the tolerances of ACI 117 and the requirement that the completed concrete shall be compatible and not interfere with the Contract Document requirements for the adjacent equipment,materials and structures. Remove and provide new or modify as required by the ENGINEER,concrete which does not provide for the tolerance requirements. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent testing laboratory shall perform indicated Field Quality Control tests, and submit test reports to ENGINEER and Contractor. Refer to Section 01400 for additional requirements. B. Independent testing laboratory shall sample and test concrete for Field Quality Control during placement of concrete as follows: 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM CI72,except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C94. 2_ Slump: ASTM C143, one test for each concrete load at point of discharge; and one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 3. Air Content: ATM C231,pressure method; one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 4. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C31, 1 set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test. Mold and store cylinder for laboratory cured test specimens. 5. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F.and below and when 80 degrees F.and above and test each time a set of compressive test specimens is made. 6. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39, the greater of the following: I set for each 50 cubic yards,or fraction thereof,of each concrete designation placed in a one-day period but not less than 1 set for each 500 square feet of surface area placed. Test 1 specimen at 14 days and test 2 specimens at 28 days and test l specimen at 56 days. a. When total quantity of a given concrete designation is less than 50 cubic yards and concrete will not be in contact with water,wastewater materials or subject to freezing temperatures during or prior to its intended service environment, strength tests may be waived by ENGINEER if, in ENGINEER's opinion, adequate evidence of satisfactory concrete strength is provided. b. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion _ laboratory-cured cylinders,evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. C. Testing laboratory shall report test results in writing to ENGINEER and Contractor on same day tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain project identification name and number, date of concrete placement,name of contractor,name of concrete supplier and truck number,name of concrete testing service,concrete type and class,location of concrete batch in structure,design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix designation,compressive breaking strength,and type of break for 14-day,28-day,and 56-day tests,air content and slump. 03300-25 1. Additional Tests: Perform additional tests of in-place concrete required by ENGINEER when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained. Testing service shall conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by — cored cylinders in accordance with ASTM C42,or by other methods, as required by ENGINEER. a. Such tests and other additional testing as may be required shall be at the Contractor's own expense. If tests indicate concrete does not meet the indicated requirements,remove defective concrete and provide new at Contractor's own expense. D. Performance Testing I. Failure of concrete toppings,patches,overlays,and repairs to bond to concrete substrate will be evaluated by ENGINEER,as evidenced by a hollow sound when tapped or chain dragged on a clean,dry,cured concrete surface. Maintain concrete surface in clean — condition until ENGINEER has completed this evaluation. 2. The hollow sound,disintegration,or other failure of concrete topping,overlay,patch or — repair will be considered to be failure of materials and workmanship. Contractor shall remove,prepare surface and provide new, the defective work as required by ENGINEER at Contractor's own expense. 3.10 CONCRETE REPAIRS A. General — I. Repair defects in concrete installed by Contractor which adversely affects appearance, durability, strength or tolerances. a. Defects include items such as the following: Crack width in excess of 0.01 inch, cracks penetrating to reinforcement or completely through sections,crazing, — delaminations,honeycomb, rock pockets,scaling, spalling, inadequate strength or other physical properties,color and texture irregularities, and defective clearances and tolerances. 2. When defects in concrete are such that in the opinion of ENGINEER,satisfactory repairs with required appearance, durability,section strength,clearances and tolerances cannot _ be made, the section shall be removed and replaced with new. 3. Repair concealed surfaces that contain defects that adversely affect durability or strength of section. If defects cannot be repaired to required condition,remove and provide new. '- 4. Damp spots and leaks: Repair concrete that is otherwise acceptable,utilizing injection of sealing material and other methods required to permanently stop the leak without damage to concrete and as accepted by ENGINEER. 5. Temperature of repair mixes: Between 50 degrees F. and 70 degrees F., and mixes not more than 10 degrees F. from temperature of concrete substrate against which it will be placed. 03300-26 13. Surface Tolerance 1. Test surfaces,such as slabs, for smoothness and to verify surface is plane, and sloped where indicated,to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. 2. Correct high areas by grinding,when approved by ENGINEER,after concrete has cured sufficiently to prevent damage. Coat areas corrected by surface grinding to acceptable surface and thickness tolerances with surface sealer approved by ENGINEER. Upon completion of corrective work,the areas shall be acceptable in appearance and tolerances or they will not be considered as being corrected satisfactorily. 3. Correct low areas during, or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete that is completely bonded to substrate. Finish repaired areas to match adjacent concrete. Manufactured patching compounds may be used when acceptable to ENGINEER. C. Defective Concrete 1. Repair, unless otherwise indicated, by cutting out to sound concrete and replacing with new concrete. a. Provide clean, square cuts perpendicular to surface. If reinforcement is exposed on over 30 percent of its perimeter,perform additional removal to provide minimum 3/4 inch clearance all around perimeter of reinforcement bar. b. Clean to remove dust and other contaminants and dampen concrete surfaces. c. Apply concrete bonding agent and place patching concrete before bonding agent dries and loses its bonding capacity. Provide concrete of same type and class as — original concrete. Place, compact,and finish to blend and match adjacent concrete. Cure and protect repair as required for concrete section and as required to provide repair that is crack-free,durable,sound and completely bonded to substrate. 2. Repair isolated random cracks greater than 0.1 inch wide and single holes less than 1 inch in diameter by dry-pack method,except as otherwise indicated. a. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to crack-free sound concrete. b. Clean to remove dust and other contaminants and dampen concrete surfaces. Apply bonding agent and place dry-pack before cement grout dries or loses its bonding capacity. Mix dry-pack, consisting of 1 part Portland cement of same brand as concrete substrate to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a no. 16 mesh sieve, and only enough water as required to facilitate placement and compaction. Pre-hydrate and re-mix prior to placement to assist with shrinkage prevention. Modify mix as required by project conditions to provide crack-free,durable, sound, and completely bonded repair. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Maintain repaired areas above 50 degrees F. and continuously moist for not less than 72 hours and as required for repair to be crack-free,durable, sound and completely bonded to substrate. 03 300-27 D. Crack Filling of Slabs 1. Clean surfaces and assist ENGINEER in evaluating concrete surfaces of all slabs. ENGINEER will designate cracks that shall be filled. a. When extent or width of cracks or other concrete defects are extensive,concrete — shall be removed and replaced with new or otherwise repaired as required by ENGINEER_ 2. Crack Filling: Completely fill isolated,random cracks with designated material. — Temporarily seal the back face of cracks,and the front face of injected cracks,as required to ensure complete filling of the crack. Remove material and residue from exposed concrete surfaces without damage to the work. a. Gravity Crack Filling: Apply material to fill the crack and repeat operation until crack is filled. Widen top of exposed crack in a controlled manner as required to — facilitate crack filling and as acceptable to ENGINEER. b. Injected Crack Filling: Inject material as recommended by the manufacturer,through ports spaced as required to fill the crack but not exceeding a spacing equal to the section depth. E. Miscellaneous Repairs 1. Fill holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise indicated. Mix,place,finish and cure concrete to provide a fully —' bonded,durable section equal to the adjacent concrete and that blends with in-place construction. 3.11 CLEANING A. Exposed Concrete Surfaces — 1. Surfaces not designated to receive an opaque coating: Provide a clear,uniform appearance free of stains and discolorations. Clean when required,with materials that will not damage the work or leave residue that could damage the work. 2. Surfaces designated to receive an opaque coating: Provide a surface that will not _ interfere with the uniform appearance and performance of the completed surface. END OF SECTION 03300 03300-28 SECTION 03610 NON-SHRINK GROUT PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes grouting where non-shrink grout is indicated. B. Related Sections 1. General Specifications for Construction and Supplemental General Specifications for — Construction,General Special Provisions and Division 1 Sections apply to the work of this Section. 2. Section 03100-Concrete Formwork 3. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete — 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute(AC!) 1. 305R Hot Weather Concreting. 2. 306R Cold Weather Concreting. 3. 308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. — B. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) 1. C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2. C109 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars. — 3. C531 Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical -Resistant Mortars,Grouts,and Monolithic Surfacings. 4. C666 Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing. 5. C827 Test Method for Early Volume Change of Cementitious Mixtures. C. United States Army Corps of Engineers Handbook for Concrete and Cement (CRD) 1. C 621 Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-Shrink Grout. 1.03 SUBMITTALS — A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300. 1. Manufacturer's Data: Manufacturer's data and product information. 03610-1 2. Test Results: Submit copies of manufacturer's test data indicating compliance with this Section. a. Submit test data for coarse aggregate when additional coarse aggregate will be incorporated in the grout mixture. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's undamaged,unopened containers. B. Store materials in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Maintain storage conditions within the required conditions and ranges. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS — A. Form Materials 1. Refer to Section 03100 for requirements. B. Grout Materials 1. Portland cement based grout with graded,washed natural fine aggregates, fluidity improvers and expansion/shrinkage control additives. 2. Free of chlorides,gypsum,aluminum,iron aggregates,gas producing or gas liberating agents,oxidizing agents and epoxy materials. 3. Coarse aggregate within the manufactured grout mixture and field added coarse aggregate: ASTM C33,CIass 4S. 4. Water: Clean potable water. 2.02 GROUT A. Physical Properties of Cured Grout 1. Compressive strength-ASTM C 109: fc'=5,000 psi minimum at 28 days. 2. Non-Shrink: No shrinkage when tested in accordance with ASTM C 827 and — CRD C 621. 3. Expansion: In accordance with CRD C 621 and shall be zero or positive when tested in accordance with ASTM C 827. 4. Environment: Cured grout shall be stable in dry,moist,wet,or alternating environments. — 5. Installed grout shall not produce a vapor barrier. 6. Durability Factor-ASTM C 666: Minimum durability factor of 94 percent at 300 cycles. 03610-2 7. Coefficient of thermal expansion-ASTM C 531: Grout mixture shall be within the range of 5.2 x 10-6 to 6.5 x 10-6 per degree F. 2.03 MANUFACTURED GROUT PRODUCTS A. Equipment and Base Plate Leveling Grout 1. Grout utilized for interior,exterior and freeze-thaw service or construction environments: a. Five Star Grout; U. S. Group Corp. b. Crystex; L&M Construction Chemicals,Inc. c. Or Equal. B. Patching Grout l. Grout utilized for interior, exterior and freeze-thaw construction or service environment: a. Durapatch Hiway;L&M Construction Chemicals,Inc. b. Set Non Shrink Grout; Set Products,Inc. c. Five Star Structural Concrete;U. S.Group Corp. d. Or Equal. 2.04 GROUT MIX A. Mix manufactured grout in accordance with grout manufacturer's recommendations for the project conditions and the requirements of this Section. 1. Utilize additional coarse aggregate in the mix when recommended by the grout manufacturer for the specific installation and as required to comply with requirements of this Section. B. Mix grout to provide uniform mixture and with the minimum amount of water necessary to provide the required grout properties, to place and consolidate the grout and to assist in preventing shrinkage and thermal cracking of the cured grout. 2.05 FORM FABRICATION A. In accordance with Section 03100 and the following: 1. Design and fabricate formwork to provide for a positive head on the grout, grout placement from one side,and to prevent air entrapment or voids. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine moisture condition and temperature of substrate surfaces at time of application or placement of grout materials. 03610-3 1. Verify that moisture condition and temperature is as required by this Section and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Verify that members that will be grouted are set to correct alignment,elevation,and are plumb and level. C. Schedule grouting to prevent vibration induced damage to the grout. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean the surface of in-place concrete and other materials against which grout will be in contact, of coatings,dirt, form coatings, grease,concrete laitance,oil,and other contaminants that could impair or impede the subsequent bond to the grout. 1. Remove loose,unsound,and deteriorated concrete prior to grouting. B. Soak cleaned concrete surfaces with potable water for 24 hours prior to grout placement. 1. Substrate shall be free of standing water at time of grout placement and shall be slightly — drier than saturated as indicated by change of color from dark to light as surface dries back from having been saturated. C. Temperature of substrate materials and grout: Between 45 degrees and 75 degrees F.at time of grout placement. 3.03 INSTALLATION — A. Rod and pack grout into place to provide a dense,solid continuous grouted section. B. Grout shall be in full contact with and completely bonded to the grouted joint surfaces. 3.04 CURING AND PROTECTION A. In accordance with Section 03300 and the following: 1. Commence curing immediately following grout placement. a. Maintain continuous moist curing and cover for the curing period except as otherwise recommended by the grout manufacturer. 2. Maintain curing and temperature of the section until a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi has been obtained. — 3. Temperature: Maintain between 45 degrees F.and 90 degrees F. during the curing and protection period. — a. Discontinue curing in a manner that will not result in thermal shock to the grout. 3.05 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Finish in accordance with Section 03330. 03610-4 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Failure of non-shrink grout to bond to the substrate will be evaluated by the ENGINEER,as evidenced by a hollow sound when tapped or otherwise sounded,on clean,dry,cured grout. Maintain the work in a clean condition until the ENGINEER has completed the evaluation. l. A hollow sound,disintegration,or other failure of the grout will be deemed failure of materials and workmanship. Remove and provide new non-shrink grout in areas of such failures delineated by the ENGINEER at Contractor's own expense. B. If grouted section cracks,but is completely bonded to the substrate, the section will not require — removal and replacement with new grout materials if the section is not located in an exterior or freeze-thaw service environment and if,in the opinion of ENGINEER, the section is not visually objectionable and will provide the required durability and performance in its intended service environment. Remove and replace with new grout materials,all other cracked grout sections. END OF SECTION 03610 03610-5 SECTION 03740 CONCRETE REMOVAL AND PATCHING PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes concrete removal and demolition of a portion of existing concrete structures, preparation and installation of concrete patching materials within the concrete removal limits. B. Related Sections 1. General Specifications for Construction and Supplemental General Specifications for Construction,General Special Provisions and Division 1 Sections apply to the work of this Section. 2. Section 03100-Concrete Formwork 3. Section 03200-Concrete Reinforcement 4. Section 03300 -Cast-In-PIace Concrete 1.02 REFERENCES A. Work of this Section shall be in accordance with Section 03300 of the Contract Documents except as modified in this Section. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Structures: Existing and new construction including pavements, slabs,walks,buildings,tanks, structural elements and systems. B. Contaminants: Materials and substances that will interfere with obtaining complete bond of the existing concrete and the new bonding agent and concrete system. Materials that could interfere with required bond include items such as concrete laitance, release agents, soil,grease,oil, paint, wax,curing compounds and other materials foreign to the original concrete mix. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Utilize qualified professional engineering personnel to check sheeting,bracing, and shoring,and for other Project conditions requiring skilled technical knowledge. 1.05 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions 1_ Existing structures and facilities are designed for in-place loads only and for the support provided by elements of the existing structure. a. Brace and support to replace the structural strength provided by the systems that will be removed until the new materials and systems are complete, in place and obtained design strengths. 03740-1 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS — A. Form Materials 1. Provide in accordance with Section 03100. B. Reinforcing Materials 1. Provide in accordance with Section 03200. C. Concrete Materials — 1. Concrete: Provide in accordance with Section 03300 except as modified in this Section_ 2. Non-Shrink Grout: Provide in accordance with Section 03610. 2.02 CONCRETE AND GROUT MATERIAL SELECTION A. Type of concrete or grout utilized at patching repairs shall be in accordance with the following, except where specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings. 1. Non-Shrink Grout shall be used for patching at the following locations: a. When depth is less than four inches and surface area of patch,at each exposed face,is less than two square feet. 2. Concrete, in accordance with Section 03300 shall be used for patching at the following locations: a. When the minimum depth is at least three inches and surface area of the patch,at each exposed face, is at least two square feet with a minimum dimension of one foot in each direction. b. When the minimum depth is at least two inches and surface area of the patch is at least four square feet. 3. Concrete in accordance with Section 03300 requirements for the indicated concrete — section shall be utilized at all other locations except when noted otherwise. PART 3: EXECUTION -� 3.01 CONCRETE WORK A. Perform concrete work in accordance with Part 3 of Section 03300 except as modified in this Section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Locate existing utilities in areas of work. Prevent damage to utilities that will remain in place. 03740-2 — I3. Prior to commencing removal operations,Contractor shall locate and mark reinforcement at the removal area,except when reinforcement is noted to be removed. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect all structures from unbalanced loading,overloading,overstressing,or other damage caused by removal of portions of this structure,settlement,increased soil pressure, lateral — movement, undermining, washout,flooding,groundwater uplift and other undesirable conditions created by removal or disposal operations. 1. Maintain excavations and stockpiles to prevent heaving,caving, slides,and increased pressure on adjacent structures. El. install interior and exterior bracing,shoring,and other support systems required to prevent — damage to the structures or portions of the structures that are to remain caused by the superimposed loads of the work or to compensate for the removal of the structural support provided by existing systems. 1. Maintain and monitor shoring,bracing,and other support systems in a secure condition prior to the removal operation and until the removal operation is completed and all of the new supporting elements or structures are complete,in place, and have achieved their design strength. 3.04 CONCRETE SAW CUTTING AND CORING A. Non-circular Openings: Saw cut perimeter of new openings in existing structures. — 1. Round the immediate corner by coring or other methods that will prevent a sharp re-entrant corner from occurring during the work,prior to saw cutting edges of an intersection corner,so as to reduce the potential for cracking of the concrete at the corners. a. Do not over-cut intersection corners of saw cut lines except as required to obtain one inch deep saw cut. 2. Depth of saw cut and core shall be in accordance with the following: a. Full Depth Opening: Saw cuts and cores may be full depth unless the Drawings indicate that existing reinforcement or a portion of the reinforcement is to be protected or remain. (I) When existing reinforcement or a portion of it is to remain,saw cut and core depth shall be in accordance with requirements for partial depth patching. (2) Uniformly taper the top of openings between the inside face and outside face of a full depth vertical opening to facilitate concrete or grout placement and reduce entrapment of air at the top of the opening when the top of opening will be filled with concrete or grout. 03740-3 b. Partial Depth Removal: Saw cuts and cores shall be a depth of 1 (one)inch except if a lesser depth is required to prevent damage to existing reinforcement, unless Drawings specifically note otherwise. (1) Partial depth patches shall be undercut slightly at the removal limit so as to provide a light key for the repair materials. _ (2) Utilize mechanical concrete removal operations for the balance of required concrete depth removal. 3.05 MECHANICAL REMOVAL A. Remove concrete to depth and cross section indicated on Drawings and as designated by the — ENGINEER. 1. Prevent cracking and otherwise damaging the surrounding concrete, or bond of concrete -- to reinforcement that will remain. a. Jack hammers used in the general concrete removal work: Do not utilize — hammers exceeding a 30-pound rating. b. Sharp or pointed bits for power hammers: Do not utilize for partial depth removal. c. Power and chipping hammers heavier than a normal 15-pound class: Do not utilize for removal around reinforcement or below the top layer or outer layer of reinforcement unless full depth removal is indicated. 2. Utilize concrete removal equipment which will not damage adjacent concrete or undercut — aggregate in the existing concrete that will remain. 3. Protect existing reinforcement bars and anchorages from cuts,nicks or other situations that would impair or reduce the strength of the material_ 4. Reinforcement damaged by Contractor's operations shall be replaced,as required by ENGINEER,at Contractor's expense. a. Provide additional reinforcement when diameter of damaged reinforcement is reduced below 15 percent of original diameter or thickness. 5. When over one-half of the reinforcement perimeter is exposed,remove additional concrete around the entire reinforcement bar perimeter to provide a clearance of at least one inch. 3.06 SURFACE PREPARATION — A. When concrete or grout will be placed against existing concrete surfaces,clean and prepare concrete surfaces after mechanical removal. — 1. Remove loose,unsound and fractured concrete materials and remove contaminants that would impede complete bond of the existing and new materials. 03740-4 2. Sandblast,wet sandblast,or high pressure water blast concrete surfaces to the extent required to remove all contaminants immediately prior to bonding agent or concrete placement. 3. Roughen concrete to provide surface amplitude of 1/4 inch. B. Surfaces that will receive a grout bonding agent: Maintain surfaces in a wet condition with potable water for 24 hours prior to the repair mix placement. 1. Concrete surfaces shall be clean and slightly drier than saturated as indicated by change — of color from dark to light as surface dries back from having been saturated when the bonding grout is placed. C. Surfaces not required to receive a bonding agent: Maintain surfaces in a wet condition with — potable water for 24 hours prior to the repair mix placement. 1. Concrete surfaces shall be clean and slightly drier than saturated as indicated by change -- of color from dark to light as surface dries back from having been saturated when the bonding grout is placed. D. Surfaces that will receive an epoxy bonding agent: Concrete shall not be pre-wetted and shall be dry at time of placement. 3.07 FORMS A. Comply with Section 03100 except as modified as follows: 1. When formwork is required to be set as patching and filling progress, formwork shall be fitted prior to placement of concrete or grout materials. -- 2. Concrete or Grout Placement within an existing vertical Section: Utilize a formed chimney above the top of the placement or other system to maintain full contact of the concrete or grout against the existing concrete surfaces. a. Construct formwork in manner required so that pressure may be applied to the concrete or grout in the chimney cap to ensure a completely filled and bonded repair. 3. Install formwork mortar-tight between the forms and existing concrete to prevent the loss of mortar. 3.08 SUBSTRATE MOISTURE CONTENT A. Moisture condition of the substrate concrete surface shall be as required by the applicable specification for the materials being utilized. -- 3.09 CONCRETE SUBSTRATE TEMPERATURE A. Temperature of the substrate concrete surface at the time of placement of the materials shall be as required by the applicable specification for the materials being utilized. 03740-5 3.10 BONDING AGENT A. Comply with the requirements of Section 03300 except as modified in this paragraph section. — I. A bonding agent shall be applied to existing concrete surfaces that will be in contact with new patching mixes except at the following locations where the bonding agent may be omitted: a. When the placement is the full depth of the member or section and the height of the placement exceeds three(3)feet and the width of the placement exceeds five — (5)feet. 3.11 POST PLACEMENT OPERATIONS — A. Vertical Surfaces: Apply pressure to the placement material in the upper level of the placement as required to ensure complete filling and bond of the placement material to the existing concrete. — 1. Perform in manner required to prevent the formation of a film of water at the top of the placement section that would reduce or prevent bonding to the existing concrete. — 3.12 CURING AND PROTECTION A. In accordance with Section 03300 with the following modifications: 1. Apply membrane curing compound within 30 minutes of completion of concrete finishing and install moist curing within 30 minutes of membrane curing application. -" 3.13 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FORM REMOVAL A. Comply with"Section 03300 -Concrete Work" except as modified below: I. Projections left on the section shall be removed in a manner required to prevent damage to the installed materials or the bond with the existing concrete. 2. Finish as required to produce a surface comparable and flush with that of the surrounding area. Do not plaster the surface to produce the required surface. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Performance Evaluation 1. Failure of the concrete, fill or patch to bond to substrate will be evaluated by the ENGINEER(as evidenced by a hollow sound when tapped or chain dragged)on a clean, dry and cured concrete surface. The Contractor shall maintain the concrete area in a clean condition until the ENGINEER has completed his evaluation. — 2. The hollow sound,disintegration, or other failure of the concrete will be considered to be failure of materials and workmanship. Replace and repair the patch area of such failures — as required by the ENGINEER. END OF SECTION 03740 03740-6 DIVISION 4 MASONRY Section 04200 Unit Masonry SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY PART 1- GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concrete unit masonry. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. 1. Division 2 Section"Flashing and Sheet Metal"for exposed sheet metal flashing installed in masonry. 2. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include the following: a. Wood nailers and blocking built into unit masonry and specified in Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry". b. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings are specified in Division 8 Section"Steel Doors and Frames". 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths(f m): 1. For concrete masonry: As follows: a. 3000 psi 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General 1. Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. a. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product indicated. 04200-1 b. Samples for verification purposes of the following: (1) Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required showing full range of exposed color,texture and dimensions to be expected in completed construction. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unit Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6"Specifications for Masonry Structures", except as otherwise indicated. 1. Revise ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 to exclude Sections 1.4 and 1.7;Parts 2.1.2,3.1.2,and 4.1.2; and Articles 1.5.1.2, 1.5.1.3,2.1.1.1,2.1.1.2,and 2.3.3.9 and to modify Article 2.1.1.4 by —' deleting requirement for installing vent pipes and conduits build into masonry. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform -- texture and color,or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually related surfaces. _ C. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality from one manufacturer for each Cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition. B. Store and handle masonry units off the ground,under cover,and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture,temperature changes,contaminants,corrosion,and other causes. If units become wet,do not place until units are in an air-dried condition. C. Store Cementitious materials off the ground,under cover,and in dry location. D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. E. Store masonry accessories,including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During erection,cover tops of walls,projections,and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. _ 04200-2 C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout,mortar,and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately any grout,mortar and soil that comes in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges,and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames,as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes from mortar droppings. I). Cold Weather Construction: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard for cold weather construction and the following: 1. Do not lay masonry units that are wet or frozen. .� 2. Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions. E. Hot Weather Construction: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements specified in this Section applicable to each material indicated. 2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. General: Comply with requirements indicated below applicable to each form of concrete masonry unit required. 1. Provide special shapes where indicated and as follows: a_ For lintels,corners,jambs, sash,control joints,headers, bonding,and other special conditions. b. Bullnose units for interior outside corners. '- B. Size: Provide concrete masonry units complying with requirements indicated below for size that are manufactured to specified face dimensions within tolerances specified in the applicable referenced ASTM specification for concrete masonry units. 1. Concrete Masonry Units: Manufactured to specified dimensions of 3/8 inch less than nominal widths by nominal heights by nominal lengths indicated on drawings. 2. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units with dry-block. 04200-3 C. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where special finishes are indicated,provide units with exposed faces of the following general description matching color and texture of ENGINEER's sample: a. Top Course,smooth face with dry block.Color-Earthtone/Tan b. No score, split(rock)face with dry block. Color-Earthtone(Tan. D. Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C90, Grade N and as follows: — 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net area compressive strength indicated below: a. 2800 psi 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight. E. Solid Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C145,Grade N and as follows: _ 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net area compressive strength indicated below: a. 2800 psi 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150,Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold weather construction. Provide natural color cement as required to produce required mortar color. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91. 1. For pigmented mortars, use premixed,colored masonry cements of formulation required to produce color indicated,or if not indicated,as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight for mineral oxides nor 1 percent for carbon black. C. Dry Block Mortar Admix: All mortar to include manufacturer's recommended amount of dry block mortar additive. D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides,compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. 1. Mortar to match color of block-EarthtoneTTan E. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207,Type S F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C144, except for joints less than 1/4 inch use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. 04200-4 G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404. H. Water: Clean and potable. 2.04 REINFORCING STEEL A. General: Provide reinforcing steel complying with requirements of referenced unit masonry standard and this article. B. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Material and grade as follows: I. Billet steel complying with ASTM A615. 2. Grade 60 C. Deformed Reinforcing Wire: ASTM A496. 1✓�_ Plain Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM Al 85. E. Deformed Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A497. 2„05 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide joint reinforcement complying with requirements of referenced unit masonry `- standard and this article, formed from the following: 1. Galvanised carbon steel wire, coating class as required by referenced unit masonry standard for application indicated. B. Description: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units,and complying with requirements indicated below: 1. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1483 inch(9 gage). 2. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1483 inch(9 gage). 3. For single-wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of side rods: a. Truss design with continuous diagonal cross roads spaced not more than 16"o.c. C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturer's offering products which may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to, the following: 1. AA Wire Products Co. 2. Dur-O-Wa1,Inc. 3. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America 4. National Wire Products Industries 5. Southern Construction Products,Inc. 04200-5 2.06 TIES AND ANCHORS A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with requirements _ for metal and size of referenced unit masonry standard and of this article. B. Galvanized Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A82,coating class as required by referenced unit masonry standard for application indicated. 1. Wire Diameter: 0.1875 inch 2.07 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Vinyl Sheet Flashing: Flexible sheet flashings especially formulated from virgin polyvinyl chloride with plasticizers and other modifiers to remain flexible and waterproof in concealed masonry applications,black in color and of thickness indicated below: 1. Thickness: 30 mils. 2. Application: Use where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Vinyl Sheet Flashing a. "Lexsuco Water Barrier",International Permalite, Inc. b. "Nervastral",Nervastral,Inc. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Non-metallic Expansion Joint Strips: Pre-molded filler strips complying with ASTM D1056, Type 2 (closed cell),Class A(cellular rubber and ribber-like materials with specific resistance to petroleum base oils), Grade 1 (compression-deflection range of 2-5 psi),compressible up to 35 percent,of width and thickness indicated,formulated from the following material: 1. Polyvinyl chloride B. Preformed Control Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below,designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall;size and configuration as indicated. 1. Polyvinyl Chloride: ASTM D2287,General Purpose Grade,Type PVC-65406. C_ Bond Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt felt).D. Weep Holes: Provide the following: 1. Wicking Material: Material as indicated below,in length required to produce 2 inches exposure on exterior and 18 inches in cavity between wythes: a. Cotton sash cord. 04200-6 2.08 INSULATION A. Loose Granular Vermiculite Insulation: ASTM C516,Type II(surface-treated for water repellency and limited moisture absorption), Grade 3(Fine),complying with 29 CFR 1926 by containing less than 0.10 percent by weight of asbestos and that demonstration shows will not release asbestos fibers in excess of 0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter under reasonably foreseeable jobsite conditions. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturer which may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Zonolite Masonry Insulation-Grace Construction Products 2.09 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner. Manufacturer's standard-strength,general-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains,efflorescence,and other new construction stains from new masonry surfaces of type indicated below without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned: 1_ For masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains,use formulation consisting of a -"' concentrated blend of surface-acting acids,chelating,and wetting agents. 2. For dark colored masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains,use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of surface-acting acids and special inhibitors. 3. For masonry subject to metallic oxidation stains,use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of organic and inorganic acids and special inhibitors. 4. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. "Sure Klean No. 600 Detergent",ProSoCo, Inc. b. "Sure Klean No. 101 Lime Solvent",ProSoCo,Inc. c. "Sure Klean Vana Trol",ProSoCo,Inc. — 2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not add admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout 2. All mortar to include manufacturer's recommended amount of dry block mortar additive. 3. Mortar to have colored pigments to match concrete block -Earthtonercan. B, Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270,Proportion Specification, for job mixed mortar and ASTM C 1142 for ready mixed mortar, of types indicated below: 04200-7 1. For masonry below grade and in contact with earth, and where indicated,use type indicated below: a. Type M 2. For reinforced masonry and where indicated,use type indicated below: a. Type S C. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color — desired. 1. Mortar to match color of block-Earthtone/Tan.D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476 and referenced unit masonry standard. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other specific conditions,and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry.B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. — C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements indicated applicable to each type of installation included in Project. 1. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated. a. Build classes and recesses as shown or required to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Provide not less than 8 inches of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses. — b. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installation of equipment, complete masonry to match construction — immediately adjacent to the opening. c. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp,un-chipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to Fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without cutting where possible. 04200-8 3.03 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES Comply with construction tolerances of referenced unit masonry standard. A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns,walls and arises, do not exceed 1/4"in 10'or 3/8"in a story height not to exceed 20',not 1/2"in 40' or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints,and other conspicuous lines,do not exceed 1/4"in any story or 20' maximum,not 1/2"in 40' or more. For vertical alignment of head joints do not exceed plus or minus 1/4"in 10', 1/2"maximum. B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels,sills,parapets,horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines,do not exceed 1/4"in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 1/2"in 40' or more. For top surface of bearing walls do not exceed 1/8"between adjacent floor elements in 10' or 1/16"within width of a single unit. C:. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position in plan and related portion of columns, walls and partitions,do not exceed 1/2"in any bay or 20' maximum,nor 3/4"in 40' or more. D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown,do not exceed minus 1/4"or plus 1/2". E. Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: Do not exceed bed joint thickness limited to 1/2". Do not exceed head joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8". 3.04 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement-type joints,returns,and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners,jambs,and where possible at other locations. 1. Lay up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with corners accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction. -- B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond patterns; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. -_ 1. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course,rake back 1/2-unit length for one-half running bond or 1/3-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry,wet clay masonry units lightly(if required),and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. D. Built-In Work: As construction progresses, build-in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 1. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. a. At exterior frames, insert extruded polystyrene board insulation around perimeter of frame in thickness indicated but not less than 3/4 inch to act as a thermal break between frame and masonry. 04200-9 2. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units,place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 3. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses(24 inches)under lintels and similar items,unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers,columns, — and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted,spread out full mortar bed -- including areas under cells. B. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to be concealed or to be covered by other materials,unless otherwise indicated. 3.06 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated"L"and"T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at — returns,offsets,column fireproofing,pipe enclosures and other special conditions. 3.07 MOVEMENT(CONTROL AND EXPANSION) JOINTS — A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build in related items as the masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement. 1. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: a. Fit bond breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of block units on one side of control joint. Fill the resultant core with grout and rake joints in exposed faces. 2. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows: a. Build in joint fillers where indicated. — b. Form open joint of width indicated but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealers". Maintain joint free and clear of mortar. 04200-10 :3.08 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 1'-0"for brick size units and 2'-0"for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide precise or formed-in-place masonry lintels. Cure Precast lintels before handling and installation. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels. 1. For hollow concrete masonry unit walls,use specially formed bond beam units with reinforcement bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.09 FLASHING/WEEP HOLES A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels,ledges, other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wail, and where indicated. 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so that they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing.with adhesive/sealant/tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer before covering with mortar. 2. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately above embedded(lashings and as follows: a. Form weep holes with product specified in Part 2 of this Section_ b. Space weep holes 24 inches o_c. 3.10 REPAIRING,POINTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped,broken,stained,or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units and in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints,enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes,and completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints including corners,openings, and adjacent construction to provide a neat,uniform appearance,prepared for application of sealants. C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured,clean exposed masonry as follows: -- 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Protect adjacent non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent,polyethylene film,or waterproof masking tape. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 04200-11 4. Clean brick by means of bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA "Technical Note No.20 Revised"using the following masonry cleaner: a. Proprietary acidic cleaner;apply in compliance with directions of acidic cleaner manufacturer. 5. Clean concrete masonry by means of cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 45 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces. D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 04200 04200-12 DIVISION 5 METALS — Section 05990 Metal Fabrications SECTION 05990 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes work fabricated from ferrous and non-ferrous metals which are not a part of other metal systems of other Sections. I. Miscellaneous Metals include,but are not necessarily limited to, the following: a. Trash Racks and Framing b. Rough Hardware c. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports d. Fasteners B. Related Sections 1. General Specifications for Construction and Supplemental General Specifications for Construction,General Special Provisions and Division 1 Sections apply to the work of this Section. 2. Section 03252-Concrete Inserts and Anchorages 3. Section 09800-Special Coatings 1.02 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Association(AA) 1. Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 2. Engineering Data for Aluminum Structures. 3. Specifications for Aluminum Structures. B. American Institute of Steel Construction(AISC) 1. Manual of Steel Construction-Allowable Stress Design. C. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) 1. A36 Specification for Structural Steel_ 2. AI 23 Specification for Zinc(Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled,Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates,Bars and Strip. 3. A153 Specification for Zinc Coating(Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware. 05990.1 4. A193 Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High- Temperature Service. 5. A307 Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. 6. A325 Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. 7. A436 Specification for Austenitic Gray Iron Castings. 8. A500 Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 9. A501 Specification for Hot-Funned Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 10. A563 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 11. A666 Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel, Sheet Strip,Plate and Flat Bar for Structural Applications. 12. B209 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 13. B221 Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,Rods,Wire, Shapes and Tubes. 14. B308 Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Shapes, Rolled or Extruded. 15. B429 Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. 16. B633 Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. D. American Welding Society(AWS) 1. DI.1 "Structural Welding Code-Steel" E. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) 1. SP-1 Solvent Cleaning 2. SP-2 Hand Tool Cleaning 3. SP-3 Power Tool Cleaning 4. SP-7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's data, member data,connections and anchor details, coatings and design load and test results. 05900-2 2. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and erection. Include plans,member profiles,sizes, elevations and details of anchorages and connections. a. Welds: Indicate in accordance with AA and AWS standards. 1..04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver,store and handle materials in manner which protects materials from corrosion, deformation,discoloration and other damage. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Perform prior to preparation of Shop Drawings and fabrication drawings to ensure required fit and dimensions. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. For work that will be exposed to view,utilize materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting,seam marks,roller marks and rolled trade names. E. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36 C. Steel Tubes: ASTM A500 D. Steel Tubes (round): ASTM A500,Grade B,Fy=42 ksi. E. Steel Pipes: ASTM A53,Type E or S, Grade B,Fy=35 ksi or ASTM A501,Fy= 36 ksi. —. F. Aluminum Extruded Bars,Pipes,Rods, Shapes and Tubes: ASTM B221,alloy 6061-T6_ G. Aluminum Plate: ASTM B209,alloy 6061-T6. H. Aluminum Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B429,alloy 6061-T6. I. Aluminum Standard Structural Shapes,Rolled or Extruded: ASTM B308,alloy 6061-T6. J. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 304-Annealed-Fy=30 ksi. K. Fasteners 1. Utilize fasteners of same type of metal as connecting materials unless a specific type is indicated and in accordance with the following: a. Utilize stainless steel when materials are dissimilar. b. Utilize stainless steel when installed in exterior environments or connected to structures containing or retaining water or other liquids. c. Galvanized: ASTM A153. d. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 304 or 316. 05990-3 2. Bolt and Nut Combinations a. ASTM A307,Grade A regular hexagon head bolt with ASTM A563, Grade A — hex nuts. B. ASTM A325-N regular hexagon head bolt with ASTM A563,Grade C heavy hex _ nuts. 3. Washers a. Plain Washers-ANSI B 18.22, round carbon steel. b. Beveled Washers -ANSI B 23.1. 4. Lock Washers: ASTM A436,helical spring type carbon steel. 5. Anchor Bolts: Refer to Section 03252. 6. Concrete Adhesive Anchors: Refer to Section 03252. 7. Wedge Anchors: Refer to Section 03252_ 8. Anti-seize Compound: to be applied to threads of stainless steel fasteners. L. Brackets,Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type material and finish as supported rails,unless otherwise indicated. M. Metal Primer Paint: Non-lead,red oxide zinc chromate rust inhibitive primer paint,compatible with subsequent finish coatings, providing sound base for field-applied top coats despite -� prolonged exposure. Coordinate selection with finish coating requirements of Division 9. N. Galvanizing ._ 1. ASTM A123 for rolled,pressed and forged steel shapes,plates,bars,and 1/8-inch thick and thicker strips. -_ 2. ASTM A153 for iron and steel hardware and fasteners. O. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Military Specification MIL-P-21035 (Ships),high zinc dust content paint for small nick or scratch repair of ga[vani7ed steel. P. Bitumastic Paint: Asphalt based bitumastic coating. -' Q. Isolation Material: Dense,closed cell neoprene sheet stock material of 1/8-inch thickness. For isolating aluminum products from dissimilar metals. R. Alkali-Resistant Paint: Paint shall prevent aluminum and concrete from interaction-zinc chromate paint. 05990-4 2.02 FABRICATION A. General — 1. Fabricate of indicated material. System components shall be of same material,unless othenvise indicated. a. Utilize isolation material between dissimilar metals,except when one material is stainless steel to prevent galvanic reaction. 2. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles,surfaces and with straight square edges. a. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. b. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius practical without damaging or otherwise impairing work. 3_ Provide continuous welds at corners and seams. Perform welding in accordance with indicated welding standards. a. At exposed connections and seams,grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. 4. Provide for anchorage to type indicated,coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide support for intended use. 5. Fabricate joints which will be exposed to weather in a manner to prevent water accumulation. a. Provide weep holes to drain water when water could accumulate in the fabrication. 6. Aluminum Protection a. Isolate aluminum from contact with dissimilar metals,concrete or masonry. (1) Dissimilar Metals: Apply two (2)coats of alkali-resistant paint to the more active metal and provide approved isolation material between dissimilar metals. (2) Concrete or Masonry Contact: Apply two (2)heavy coats bitumastic or zinc chromate paint to aluminum product. b. Anchors and Fasteners for Aluminum Products: Aluminum or stainless steel unless type is specifically noted on Drawings. B. Rough Hardware 1. Provide bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts,plates,anchors,hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for anchorages,connections and framing systems. 05990-5 2. Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes,shapes and dimensions required. a. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood connections. C. Shop Finishing 1. Provide shop finish on steel members,except on the portion of members that will be _ embedded in concrete and masonry,surfaces and edges that will be field welded,and galvanized surfaces,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Surface Preparation a. Remove grease,oil and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1. b. Remove heavy rust and loose mill scale and other deleterious materials in accordance with SSPC SP-2, SSPC SP-3,or SSPC SP-7. 3. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and provide uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils for each coat. a. Maintain coating thickness at corners, edges,joints and exposed surfaces. b. Apply one shop coat of fabricated metal items,except apply two coats to surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to — distinguish it from first coat. 4. Refer to Section 09800 for additional surface preparation and finish requirements. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Utilize templates and other systems required to ensure accurate placement. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with indicated requirements and manufacturer's instructions. B. Install items accurately fitted in required location,alignment and elevation and plumb, level, true and free of distortion and rack as measured from established lines and levels. Provide required temporary bracing and support systems. 1. Install isolation material between aluminum and non-aluminum metals except at stainless steel. C. Install anchorages in accordance with Section 03252. — 1. Do not load or stress anchorages and fasteners until materials and substrate materials have obtained design strengths. _ 2. Utilize oversize washers on oversized or slotted holes. 05900-6 D. Touch-Up Painting: After erection,clean damaged coatings, field welds and abraded areas, corroded areas,and previously unpainted areas in accordance with surface preparation requirements of Part 2 of this Section. 1. Touch-up with same paint brand name and color utilized for shop finish with minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils_ 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation from plumb: 1/4 inch per 10 feet. B. Maximum offset from true alignment: 1/4 inch_ 3.04 CLEANING A. Provide clean,uniform appearance and finish. B. Do not clean with abrasives, acids or chemicals that will damage the work or materials. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Prevent damage to the finish and coating. END OF SECTION 05990 05990-7 SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART I: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Loose-fill building insulation. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Thermal Resistivity: Where the thermal resistivity of insulation products are designated by "r-values", they represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity(k-values). Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogeneous material exactly 1 inch thick Thermal resistivities are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F.between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: 1. Product data for each type of insulation product specified. 2. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by qualified independent testing laboratory evidencing compliance of insulation products with requirements including r-values(aged values for plastic foam insulations),fire performance characteristics,perm ratings, water absorption ratings and other properties,based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials identical to those whose indicated fire performance characteristics have been determined per the ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations,acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E84. 2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E136. 07210-1 B. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. — 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling,storage and protection during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight,except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to project site ahead of installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each _ area on construction. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering — products which may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Corp. b. Manvill: Building Insulations Div.,Manville Sales Corp. c. Owens/Corning Fiberglas Corp. — 2.02 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. B. Glass Fiber Loose Fill Insulation: Glass fibers processed to comply with ASTM C764 for Type —` (method of application)indicated below;maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 5 and 5,respectively, and as follows: 1. Type 1 for pneumatic application. 2. Type 2 for poured application. — 07210-2 — PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of the Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removal of projections that might puncture vapor retarders. 3.03 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with installation of insulation. B. Extend insulation full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required,to make up total thickness_ 3.04 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Place glass fiber loose fill insulation into spaces and onto surfaces as shown,either by pouring or my machine-blowing. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated,lightly settle to uniform density,but do not excessively compact. B. Stuff glass fiber loose fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume(to a density of approximately 2.5 pcf). 3.05 PROTECTION A. General: Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures,physical abuse and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07210 07210-3 SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Gutters and downspouts(rain drainage). 2. Exposed metal trim/fascia units. 3_ Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories. B. Integral masonry flashings are specified as masonry work in sections of Division 4. 1..03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 -- Specification Sections. 1. Product data,Flashing, Sheet Metal and Accessories: Manufacturer's technical product data, instructions and general recommendations for each specified sheet material and fabricated product. _ 2. Samples of the following flashing, sheet metal and accessory items: a. 8-inch-square samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces. 3. Shop drawings showing layout,profiles, methods of joining and anchorage details, including major counter-flashings, trim/fascia units,gutters,downspouts,scuppers and expansion joint systems. Provide layouts at 1/4-inch scale and details at 3-inch scale. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and protection of materials and finishes. 07600-1 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS — A. Zinc-coated Steel: Commercial quality with 0.20 percent copper, ASTM A526 except ASTM A527 for lock-forming, G90 hot-dip galvanized(mill phosphatized for painting),24 gauge, extra — smooth finished one side with Kynar 500 (Fluoropolymer based coating) 1.010.1 mil total dry film thickness. 1. A wash coat of.3-.4 mil dry film thickness shall be applied to the reverse side. 2. The pre-finished side shall be provided with a factory applied strippable vinyl film for protection of finish during shipping and handling(this material must be removed — immediately after installation). 3. Color shall be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. — B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: — 1. ColorKlad by Vincent Metals 2_ PacClad by Peterson Aluminum Corp. 3. UnaClad by Copper Sales,Inc. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Solder: For use with steel or copper,provide 50-50 tin/lead solder(ASTM B32),with rosin flux. B. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or other non-corrosive metal as recommended by — sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. C. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene;non-hardening,non-skinning, non-drying, non-migrating — sealant. D. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by manufacturer of metal and fabricator of — components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealers". E. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part non-corrosive metal seam cementing compound,recommended by — metal manufacturer for exterior/interior non-moving joints,including riveted joints. F. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for waterproof/weather-resistant — seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet. G. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb. rosin-sized building paper. — I-I. Polyethylene Underiayment: Minimum 6-mil carbonated polyethylene film resistant to decay when tested in accordance with ASTM E154. — 07600-2 1. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips,straps,anchoring devices and similar accessory units as required for installation of work,matching or compatible with material being installed, non-corrosive,size and gage required for performance. — J. Elastic Flashing Filler: Closed-cell polyethylene or other soft closed-cell material recommended by elastic flashing manufacturer as filler under flashing loops to ensure movement with minimum stress on flashing sheet. -' K. Roofing Cement: ASTM D2822,asphaltic. 2.03 FABRICATED UNITS A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"and -- other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant performance, with expansion provisions for running work,sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning,buckling and tool marks,true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. B. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. For metal other than aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, form seams and solder. Form aluminum seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where required. C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof,form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges,not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant(concealed within joints). D. Sealant Joints: Where movable,non-expansion type joints are indicated or required for proper — performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA standards. E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from non-compatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact,with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator. — PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated,comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations and with SMACNA"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated,providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. B. Underlayment: Where stainless steel or aluminum is to be installed directly on Cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment. C. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. 07600-3 D. Install elastic flashing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where required, provide for movement at joints by forming loops or bellows in width of flashing. Locate cover or filler strips at joints to facilitate complete drainage of water from flashing. Seam adjacent — flashing sheets with adhesive, seal and anchor edges in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Nail flanges of expansion joint units to curb nailers, at maximum spacing of 6 inches o.c. Fabricate seams at joints between units with minimum 3-inch overlap,to form a continuous, waterproof system. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces,removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. B. Protection: Advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and protection of flashings and sheet metal work during construction to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07600 07600-4 SECTION 07901 JOINT SEALERS PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY -- A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below: a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. b. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames or doors and windows. c. Other joints as indicated. 2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Control,expansion and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Other joints as indicated_ 3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames_ b. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures. c. Other joints as indicated. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 7 Section"Flashing and Sheet Metal"for sealing joints related to flashing and sheet metal for roofing. 2. Division 8 Section"Glass and Glazing"for sealants used in glazing. 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no staining or deterioration of joint substrates. 07901-1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 _ Specification Sections. 1. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required. _ 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. C. Product Testing: Provide comprehensive test data for each type of joint sealant based on tests conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory on current product formulations within a 24-month period preceding date of Contractor's submittal of test results to Architect. _ 1. Test elastomeric sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C920. Include test results for hardness,stain resistance, adhesion and cohesion _ under cyclic movement(per ASTM C719),low-temperature flexibility,modulus of elasticity at 100 percent strain, effects of heat aging and effects of accelerated weathering. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original,unopened container or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer,product name and designation,color,expiration period for use,pot life, curing time and mixing instructions for multi-component materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures,contaminants or other causes. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg.F. (4.4 deg. C.). 2. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 07901-2 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence installation of joint sealants to occur not less than 21, nor more than 30,days after completion of waterproofing, unless otherwise indicated. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.0I MATERIALS, GENERAL A_ Compatibility: Provide joint sealants,joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: l. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. 2.02 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A_ Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomeric sealants that comply with ASTM C920 and other requirements indicated,including those requirements referencing ASTM C920 classifications for Type, Grade, Class and Uses. B. One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,Uses NT, G A and 0, as applicable to non-porous joint substrates indicated, formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior joints with non-porous substrates and subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes. C. Multi-Part Non-sag Urethane Sealant for Use NT: Type M, Grade NS,Class 25, and complying with the following requirements for uses: 1. Uses NT,M, A and 0,as applicable to joint substrates indicated. D. Multi-Part Non-sag Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type M,Grade NS, Class 25,and complying with the following requirements for uses: 1. Uses T,M,A and 0,as applicable to joint substrates indicated. E. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: 1. One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Dow-Coming 786; Dow Corning Corp. SCS 1702 Sanitary; General Electric Co. 863#345 White;Pecora Corp. Rhodosil 6B White; Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. Proglaze White;Tremco Corp. — OmniPlus; Sonnebom Building Products Div.,Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc. 07901-3 2. Multi-Part Non-sag Urethane Sealant for Use NT: Chem-Calk 500;Bostik Construction Products Div. — Vulkem 227;Mameco International,Inc. Vulkem 922;Mameco International,Inc. Dualthane;W.R.Meadows — Dynatrol II;Pecora Corp. Permapol RC-2;Products Research&Chemical Corp. Sikaflex-2c NS; Sika Corp.Sonolastic NP 2; Sonnebom Building Products Div.,Rexnord Chemical Products,Inc. Dymeric;Tremco, Inc. 3. Multi-Part Non-sag Urethane Sealant for Use T: Chem-Calk 500;Bostik Construction Products Div. Vulkem 227;Mameco International,Inc. Dynatred;Pecora Corp. PRC 280; Products Research&Chemical Corp. Sikaflex-2c NS; Sika Corp. — THC-901;Tremco,Inc. 103 JOINT SEALANT BACKING — A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates,sealants,primers and other joint fillers;and are approved for applications — indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible,resilient,non-staining,non-waxing, non-extruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size,shape and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Proprietary, reticulated,closed-cell polymeric foam,non-out gassing,with a density of 2.5 pcf and tensile strength of 35 psi per ASTM D1623,and with water absorption less than 0.02 gms/cc per ASTM C1083. — C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid,inflexible joint filler materials or joint — surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Non-porous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials,free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent non-porous surfaces,and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates, — C. Masking Tape: Non-staining,non-absorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. 07901-4 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust,paints (except for permanent,protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil,grease,waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt and frost. 2. Clean concrete,masonry,unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile and similar porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing,grinding, blast cleaning,mechanical abrading or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. i 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal,glass,porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile and other non-porous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. — B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable of products and applications indicated,except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated. C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: 1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint width that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 07901-5 a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. b. Do not stretch,twist,puncture or tear joint fillers. _ c. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. 2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used between sealants and joint fillers or back of joints. D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates,completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration,and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed. E. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins,tool sealants to form smooth,uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets,and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM Cl 193,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide flush joint configuration,per Figure 5B in ASTM C1193,where indicated. a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints. 3. Provide recessed joint configuration,per Figure 5C in ASTM C1193,of recess depth and at locations indicated. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,despite such protection,damage or deterioration occurs,cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that any installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 07901 07901-6 SECTION 08111 STANDARD STEEL DOORS &FRAMES _ PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following products manufactured in accordance with SDI Recommended Standards: 1. Doors: Flush,hollow or composite construction standard steel doors for interior and exterior locations. 2. Frames: Pressed steel frames for doors,sidelights, mullions and other exterior openings of following type: a. Welded unit type. 3. Assemblies: Provide standard steel door and frame assemblies as required for the following: a. Thermal rated(insulated). 4. Provide factory primed doors and frames to be field painted. B. Fainting primed doors and frames is specified in Division 9 Section"Painting". C. Door hardware is specified in another Division 8 Section. Glass and Glazing are specified in another Division 8 Section. E. Building in of anchors and grouting of frames in masonry construction is specified in Division 4. 1.1)3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: 1. Product data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials,dimensions,hardware preparation,core,label compliance, sound ratings, profiles and finishes. 2. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types,conditions at openings,details of construction, location and installation requirements or door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 08111-1 a. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on contract drawings. b. Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. B. Label Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated and exceeding limitation of labeled assemblies,submit manufacturer's certification that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design,materials and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute"Recommended Specification Standard Steel Doors and Frames"ANSI/SDI-100 and as herein specified. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and _ job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch high,wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide —' 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART 2: PRODUCTS — 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering standard steel doors and frames which may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the following: — 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames a. Amweld Building Products,Inc. b. Ceco Corp. c. Curries Company d. Republic Building Products — e. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co. 08111-2 2.02 MATERIALS A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel,pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A569 and ASTM A568. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel,complying with ASTM A366 and ASTM A568. C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality,complying with ASTM A526 or drawing quality,ASTM A642,hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A525,with A60 or G60 coating designation, mill phosphatized. 1). Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18-gage sheet steel; galvanized where used with galvanized frames. E. Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into exterior walls,hot-dip galvanize in compliance with ASTM A153, Class C or D as applicable. F. Shop Applied Paint: Apply after fabrication. I. Primer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints complying with ANSI A224.1,"Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames". 2.03 DOORS A. Provide metal doors of SDI grades and models specified below or as indicated on drawings or schedules: 1. Interior Doors: ANSI/SDI-100,Grade II, heavy-duty,Model 3 or 4, minimum 16-gage, cold-rolled sheet steel faces or as required for fire rating. 2. Exterior Doors: ANSI/SDI-100,Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 4, minimum 16-gage galvanized steel faces. 2.04 FRAMES A. Provide metal frames for doors, sidelights and other openings,of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings,unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 16-gage,cold-rolled steel. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered, coped or welded corners. 2. Form exterior frames from 16-gage, galvanized steel. B. Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 26-gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. C. Door Silencers: Except on weather stripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door frames. 08111-3 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid,neat in appearance and free from defects,warp or buckle. Wherever practicable,fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment,to assure proper assembly at project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI-100 requirements. 1. Internal Construction: Manufacturer's standard honeycomb,polyurethane,polystyrene, unitized steel grid,vertical steel stiffeners,or rigid mineral fiber core with internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets where appropriate in accordance with SDI standards. — 2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads except between non-fire-rated pairs of doors,not more than 1/4 inch. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. — B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels,including stiles and rails of non-flush units, from only cold-rolled steel. C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117"Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames". — D. Fabricate frames,concealed stiffeners,reinforcement,edge channels, louvers and moldings from either cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel. — E. Fabricate exterior doors,panels and frames from galvanised sheet steel in accordance with SDI-112. Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 16-gage inverted steel channels. F. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated,provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. G. Thermal-Rated(Insulating)Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled,provide doors fabricated as thermal insulating door and frame assemblies and tested in — accordance with ASTM C236 or ASTM C976 on fully operable'door assemblies. 1. Unless otherwise indicated,provide thermal-rated assemblies with U factor of 0.41 Btu (hr x sq. ft. x def.F.)or better. H. Hardware Preparation: Prepare frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware in accordance with final Door Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 Series Specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. I. Reinforce frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at project site. J. Locate hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware on Standard Steel Doors and Frames". published by Door and Hardware Institute. — K. Shop Painting: Clean,treat and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. — 1. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale,rust,oil,grease,dirt and other foreign materials before application of paint. — 08111-4 2. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint. L. Glazing Stops: Minimum 20-gage steel or.040-inch thick aluminum. 1. Provide non-removable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass,louvers and other panels in doors. 2. Provide screw applied removable glazing beads on inside of glass,louvers and other panels in doors. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A, Genera[: Install standard steel doors,frames and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data and as herein specified. B,. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105"Recommended Erection Instructions For Steel Frames", unless otherwise indicated. 1. In masonry construction,locate three wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry Tee anchors. C. Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames,within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI-100. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN -- A. Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection,sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer, B. Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection,remove protective plastic wrappings from pre-finished doors. C. Final Adjustments: Check and re-adjust operating hardware items,leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. END OF SECTION 08111 08111-5 SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE — PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hinges 2. Lock sets 3. Closers 4. Weather-stripping for exterior doors. 5. Thresholds B. Related Sections: The following Section contains requirements that relate to this Section: I_ Division 8 Section"Standard Steel Doors and Frames"for silencers integral with hollow metal doors. 1.02 SUBMTITALS A.. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: 1. Product data including manufacturer's technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. 2. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand function and finish of door hardware. a. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated,organize schedule into"hardware sets"indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information. -- 1) Type,style,function,size and finish of each hardware item. 2) Name and manufacturer of each item. 3) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 08710-1 4) Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. 5) Explanation of all abbreviations,symbols and codes contained in schedule. 6) Mounting locations for hardware. 7) Door and frame sizes and materials. 8) Keying information. 2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data,samples,shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware and other information essential to the coordinated review of -- schedule. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware(latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.)from a single manufacturer. — B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier,with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity,type and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant(AHC)who is available to Owner, Architect and Contractor,at reasonable times during the course of the Work,for consultation. I. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing. C. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey,FM,or other _ testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule,and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. B. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation(shop or — Project site). 08710-2 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to, the following: I. Butts and Hinges: a. Bomrner Industries,Inc. b. McKenney Products Co. c. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works 2_ Overhead Closers: — a. LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group b. Sargent Manufacturing Company 3. Door Stripping and Seals: a. Pemko Manufacturing Co.,Inc. b. Reese Enterprises,Inc. c_ Zero International,Inc. 4. Thresholds: a. Pemko Manufacturing Co.,Inc_ b. Reese Enterprises,Inc_ c. Zero International, Inc_ 2,.02 SCHEDULED HARDWARE A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish,size and other distinctive qualities of each type -- of finish hardware are indicated in the"Hardware Schedule"on the drawings. 2.03 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturer's products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in visible location(omit removable nameplates)except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy,composition,temper and hardness,but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized)quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSUBHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSUBHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish"optional"materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. 08710-3 C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. 1. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed(exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or,if exposed in surfaces of other work,to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including"prepared for paint"surfaces to receive painted finish. 2. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work,provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use hex screw fasteners. 2.04 HINGES,BUTTS AND PIVOTS A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves)into wood doors and frames,provide only template-produced units. B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements: 1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes. 2. For wood doors and frames install wood screws. 3. For fire-rated wood doors install#12 x 1-1/4-inch, threaded-to-the-head steel wood screws. 4. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots. B. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated,provide hinge pins as follows: 1. Out-Swing Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins. 2. Interior Doors: Non-rising pins. 3. Tips: Flat button and matching plug,finished to match leaves,except where hospital tip (HT) indicated. C. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height. 2.05 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required either new or integrated with Owner's existing system. 087104 B. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel or nickel silver. l. Comply with Owner's instructions for master-keying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. C. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only. D. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock,key to existing master system. 2.06 LOCKS,LATCHES AND BOLTS A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt,with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set,unless otherwise indicated. 2.07 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door,exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. 2.08 WEATHER-STRIPPING AND SEALS A. General: Provide continuous weather-stripping on exterior doors and smoke seals on interior — doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide non-corrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. _. C. Weather-stripping at Jambs and Heads: Provide bumper-type resilient insert and metal retainer strips,surface applied unless shown as mortised or semi-mortised,and of following metal, finish and resilient bumper material: 1. Extruded aluminum with color anodized finish as selected from manufacturer's standard color range,0.062-inch minimum thickness of main walls and flanges. 2. Solid neoprene conforming to MIL R 6855, Class II,Grade 40. a. Flexible,hollow bulb or loop insert. D. Weather-stripping at Door Bottoms: Provide threshold consisting of contact-type resilient insert and metal housing of design and size shown and of following metal, finish and resilient seal strip: 1. Extruded aluminum with color anodized finish as selected from manufacturer's standard color range,0.062-inch minimum thickness of main walls and flanges. 2. Solid neoprene wiper or sweep seal complying with MIL R 6855, Class 11,Grade 40. 2.09 THRESHOLDS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated,provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size and profile as shown or scheduled. 08710-5 2.10 HARDWARE FINISHES A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets(or push-pull units if no latch or lock sets). B. Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA_ C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating(if any), composition,hardness and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. D. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze and aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix"-NL"is used with standard finish — designations to indicate"no lacquer". E. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the industry- -- recognized standard commercial finishes,except as otherwise noted. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications,except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect. 1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute. 2. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors". 3. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way,coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. 4. Set units level,plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. 5. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space — fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. B. Weather-stripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. 08710-d B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware fmishes. 3.03 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section"Door Hardware",hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule located on drawings. END OF SECTION 08710 08710-7 DIVISION 9 FINISHES Section 09800 Special Coatings Section 09900 Painting SECTION 09800 -- SPECIAL COATINGS PART 1: GENERAL l,01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: l. Special coatings for interior/exterior use: a. 2-part pigmented acrylic polyurethane finish_ b. 2-component high performance polyamidoamine epoxy coating. c. 2-component high performance polyamide epoxy. d. 1-component modified-acrylic. e. 1-component modified-epoxy finish. 2. The work required under this section consists of all special coating work and related items necessary to complete the work indicated on drawings,described in the specifications and listed in the Schedule included herein. 3. This work includes the application of special coating systems to items and surfaces as scheduled, including surface preparation, priming and topcoats. 4. List of items included: Without restricting the volume or generality of the above under "Extent",the work to be performed under this section shall include,but is not limited to, the following: a. Special coating system for exposed ductile iron pipe,pumps, fiberglass duct,and mechanical equipment. b. Special coating system for interior concrete walls and ceilings. c. Special coating system for lintels and doors. d. Special coating system for submerged steel surfaces in water. 5. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, apply special coatings to these the same as adjacent similar materials or areas. B. Section does not include: 1. Primers and finish coats specified to be factory or shop applied as work of other sections. C. Related Sections: l. General Specifications for Construction and Supplemental General Specifications for Construction,General Special Provisions and Division I Sections apply to the work of this Section. 2. Shop priming of ferrous metal: Division S. 09800-I 1.02 REFERENCES A. Good Painting Practice(Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. 1); Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC); 1982. B. Systems and Specifications(Steel Structures Painting Manual,Vol.2); Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC); 1982 (with 1985 Supplement). C. ASTM D16-84- Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint,Varnish,Lacquer and Related Products; 1984. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Special Coating Systems: Materials and methods of application requiring more than normal skills and techniques for mixing,handling and application and including applied materials used in prime, intermediate and finish coats. B. "Exposed Surfaces"is defined to include areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers,covers for funned tube radiation grilles,etc., are in place in areas scheduled to be coated. However,extend special coatings in these areas as required to maintain the coating — system integrity and provide the desired protections. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information including,but not limited to: basic materials analysis,coating profile,performance criteria and application instructions for each — coating material specified. Products that are of other generic type, will not be considered. 1. All products and colors shall be certified by the manufacturer to be"lead and chromate free". 2. All products shall have a VOC(volatile organic compound)content of less than 3.50 lbs. per gallon (thinned). 3. Coatings for potable water applications must be tested and certified by NSF International ANSI/NSF Std 61, Section 5, Protective(Barrier)Materials. 4. List each material and cross-reference to the specific coating and finish system and application. 5. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 6. Color selected by ENGINEER. B. Samples: 1. Prior to beginning work, submit samples for the ENGINEER's review of color and texture only. Label and identify each material application and location for each coat of each finish sample. a. Provide samples of each color and material to be applied,with texture to simulate the actual conditions,on representative samples of the actual substrate. — 09800-2 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat material produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Use only thinners recommended by the manufacturer; use only within recommended limits. I. Use only the approved products of the coating manufacturers listed in Part 2 of this Section or approved under provisions for substitutions specified in Division 1. B. Applicator: Firm with not less than 3 years of successful experience in work similar in scope of the work of this project. C. Coordination of Work: Ensure compatibility of the total coating systems for various substrates. Upon request,furnish information on the characteristics of specified finish materials to ensure that compatible prime coats are used. 1. Notify the ENGINEER in writing of any anticipated problems involved in using the coating systems as specified. I). Field Samples: On actual surfaces,as directed by ENGINEER,provide full-coat finish samples until required sheen, color and texture is obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work. 1. Final acceptance of colors will be from field samples. 2. Accepted sample may remain as part of the work. E. Coordination of Work: Review other sections of these specifications to ensure compatibility of total coatings systems for substrate. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, new,unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Name or title of material. 2. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 3. Manufacturer's name. 4. Contents by volume for major pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. -- 7. Color name and number. 8. Handling instructions and precautions. 13. Storage and Handling: Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F.and in a well-ventilated area. 09800-3 1. Maintain containers used for storage of coatings in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Protect from freezing where necessary. 3. Keep storage area neat andorderiy. 4. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 5. Take all necessary precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and health hazards. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when the temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are above 45 degrees F. B. Do not apply coatings in snow,rain,fog or mist,or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent,or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain the temperature and conditions specified — before proceeding with or continuing with the coating operation. C. Provide lighting level of not less than 80 footcandles measured mid-height at substrate surface. — D. Provide continuous ventilation and heating to prevent accumulation of hazardous fumes,and maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F. for 24 hours before, during and for 48 hours after application of finishes_ PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products complying with requirements of contract documents and made by one of the following: 1. Sherwin Williams Company(SWC). — 2. Tnemec Company,Inc. (TCI}. 3. Ameron Protective Coatings 2.02 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS A. For each type of coating,provide one of the products listed. B. Material Quality: 1. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a standard, best-grade product will not be acceptable. C. Colors, Surface Treatment and Finishes: 1. As indicated in the schedule. 09800-4 D. Color Pigments: I. Pure,non-fading types applicable to substrates and service indicated. 2.03 EXTERIOR COATING MATERIALS A. Primer: 1. Metal primer recommended for use over ferrous and non-ferrous metal or aluminum under 2-part pigmented polyurethane coatings. a. Tnemec Series 69-Hi Build Epoxy II. b. SWC: Per manufacturer's published recommendations_ B. Finish Coats: 1. 2-part pigmented acrylic polyurethane coating recommended over primed ferrous and non-ferrous metal aluminum. a. Tnemec Series 75 Endurashield IV (Semi-Gloss) 74 Endurashield IV(Gloss) 2. 1-component self priming Modified-Epoxy recommended for concrete. a. Tnemec Series 55 Tneme Crete 3. Polyurethane as a fmish coat should be proceeded by a coat of epoxy. 2.04 INTERIOR COATING MATERIALS A. Primers: i. Metal primer recommended for use over ferrous and non-ferrous metal or aluminum under 2-component high performance polyamidoamine epoxy. a. Tnemec Series 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 2. Metal primer(tie coat)recommended for use over factory finished equipment under 2-part pigmented polyurethane and/or epoxy coatings. a. Tnemec Series 27 Typoxy B. Finish Coat: 1_ 2-component high performance polyamidoamine epoxy coating recommended over ferrous and non-ferrous metal,aluminum,concrete and concrete floors. a. Tnemec Series 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II (1) SWC: B50W3 Galvite Paint White(for galvanized metal). (2) SWC: (No primer required for aluminum)_ 09800-5 2. 1-component self priming Acrylic Emulsion recommended for concrete. a. Tnemec Series 6 Tneme Cryl 3. Do not use epoxy as a topcoat on galvanized metal,use acrylic. C. Finish Coats: 1. High performance polyamide epoxy coating(HIPAC): High gloss polyamide epoxy coating recommended for use over concrete,concrete masonry units,wood,ferrous metal, galvanized metal or aluminum. a. SWC: B67W30/1360V3 Tileclad II Coating(not recommended for wood). b. TCI: Series 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline(not recommended for wood). 2.05 INTERIOR/EXTERIOR COATING MATERIALS — A. Finish Coats: 1. High Performance Polyamide Epoxy Coating(HIPAC): High gloss polyamide epoxy coating recommended for use on concrete floors. a. SWC: TCII Epoxy PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready for work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. 1. Report any unsatisfactory conditions in writing to the Contractor. 2. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the applicator. 3. Starting of coating work will be construed as acceptance of surfaces within any particular — area_ Do not paint over any code required labels,equipment identification,performance rating,name or nomenclature plates. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Clean surfaces to be coated before applying coatings or surface treatments. Schedule cleaning and coating application so that dust and other contaminates will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces. 1. If necessary for complete coating of the items or adjacent surfaces,remove hardware, hardware accessories,machined surfaces,plates, lighting fixtures and similar items which are not be coated,or provide surface applied protection prior to surface preparation and coating operations. — a. Following completion of coating operations in each space or area,reinstall the items removed using workmen skilled in the trades involved. — 09800-6 B. All shop primed metals subject to immersion service that have been exposed to the sunlight for 60 days or longer shall be scarified by brush blasting before field coat application. C. Allow new concrete to cure a minimum 28 days. — I). Perform preparation procedures for each substrate in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's written instructions and as outlined in the following schedule: _ 1. Cl: SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning. a. The removal of all visible oil,grease, soil,drawing and cutting compounds and _ other soluble contaminants from surfaces with solvents or commercial cleaners using various methods of cleaning such as wiping,dipping, steam cleaning or vapor degreasing. 2. C2: SSPC-SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning-Not Used. 3. C3: SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning-Not Used. 4. C4: Pressure Wash — a. The entire surface shall be high pressure washed at a minimum 1500 psi, removing all loose paint, dirt or foreign matter. Upon completion of pressure washing procedure,rinse all areas with potable water and allow to dry. Dryness of surface shall be verified by use of polyethylene moisture test or a reading of 17%or less utilizing a moisture meter. 5. CS: Concrete/Gypsum a. Prepare Cementitious surfaces of concrete,concrete block,cement plaster and mineral fiber board to be painted by removing all efflorescence,chalk, dust, — laitance, release agents,curing compounds,dirt,grease, oils and by roughening as required to remove glaze. Scrape and grind fins and protrusions flush with surface. Rake mortar joints clean. 6. CO: SSPC-SP6 or NACE 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning-Not Used. 7. C7: SSPC-SP7 or NACE 4 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning-Not Used. 8. C8: High Pressure Wash a. The entire surface shall be high pressure(minimum 2500 psi)washed with a biodegradable,phosphate and residue free additive. A stiff bristle brush shall be used to assist in the removal of all dirt,mildew,dust and other foreign matter. 9. C9: Acid Etching — a. Remove residual dust and dirt with water using a high pressure hose. Remove excess water and allow concrete to dry until the surface is damp. Uniformly apply a solution of I part Muriatic Acid and 2 -4 parts fresh water, utilizing low — pressure spray equipment or sprinkling cans. When bubbling begins to subside, immediately rinse with clean water while scrubbing with a stiff bristle broom. Test with pH paper and continue the rinsing operation until a pH of 7 or higher is obtained. Allow floor to dry thoroughly before coating. 09800-7 10. CIO: SSPC-SP10 or NACE 2 Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning a. The removal of all visible oil,grease,dirt, dust,mill scale rust,paint, oxides, corrosion products and other foreign matter by compressed air nozzle blasting,centrifugal wheels or other specified method. Discoloration caused by certain stains shall be limited to no more than 5% of each square inch of surface area. A blast profile of 1.5-2.0 mils shall be achieved. _ 11. C 11: Wood-Not Used. 12. C12: Concrete(Severe Exposure, including immersion) a. Abrasive blast all surfaces to remove all laitance and solid contaminants. _ Blasting shall be performed sufficiently close to the surface so as to open up surface voids,bugholes,air pockets and other subsurface irregularities. 13. C13: SSPC-SP11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal-Not Used. 3.03 SCHEDULE A. Coatings listed are based on products manufactured by Tnemec Company. Names and numbers shown on the following schedule are for the convenience identifying specific coating and are not intended to preclude the use of any other manufacturer's product or procedures. They are given for the purpose of establishing a type and grade of material required and the quality of construction and workmanship. Equivalent materials may be submitted providing they meet or exceed the following ASTM testing requirements. I. Abrasion: Method ASTM D4060 2. Adhesion: Method ASTM D4541 3. Humidity: Method ASTM D4585 4. Salt Spray Fog: Method ASTM B 117 5. Fresh Water Immersion — B. "Mils"indicated shall be minimum dry film thicknesses (DFT). C. Refer to Article 3.02 for detailed procedures of surface preparation. D. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare materials in compliance with the coating manufacturer's directions. 1. Do not mix materials produced by different manufacturers,unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturer's instructions. — E. Protect his work at all times,and shall protect all adjacent work and materials by suitable covering or other method during progress of his work. Upon completion of the work,he shall remove all coating spots from floors,glass and other surfaces. He shall remove from the premises all rubbish and accumulated materials of whatever nature not caused by others and shall leave his part of the work in a clean,orderly and acceptable condition. _ F. Remove and protect name plates,hardware,accessories, device plates,lighting fixtures,factory finished work and similar items,or provide ample in-place protection. Upon completion of each space,carefully replace all removed items. 09800-8 G. Remove electrical panel box covers and doors before painting walls. Coat separately and reinstall after all coating is dry. H. All materials shall be applied under adequate illumination, evenly applied and flowed-on smoothly to avoid runs,sags,holidays and air bubbles. I„ Coverage and hide shall be complete. When color,stain,dirt or undercoats show through final coat,the surface shall be covered by additional coats until the coating film is of uniform finish, color,appearance and coverage,at no additional cost to the Owner. J. All coats shall be dry to manufacturer's recommendations before applying succeeding coats. K. All suction spots or"hot spots"in cement after the application of the first coat shall be touched up before applying the second coat. 1. SC-1: Steel Surfaces (Non-Submerged)Copper,and ductile iron. Lintels and doors. a. Surface Preparation: C6: Shop Primer: 37H78 H.S. Chem Prime 2.5 mils Spot Prime after erection: 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 3.0 mils Finish Coat (Interior): 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 5.0 mils (Exterior): 75 Endurashield IV 3.0 mils Total Minimum DFT (Interior): 7.0 mils (Exterior): 6.0 mils 2. SC-2: Steel Surfaces(Submerges,Non-Potable) a. Surface Preparation: CIO Shop Primer: 37H78 H.S. Chem Prime 2.5 mils Finish: First Coat: 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline 11 6.0-8.0 mils Second Coat: 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 6.0-8.0 mils Total Minimum DFT 12.0-16.0 mils 3. SC-3: Not Used. 4. SC-4: Not Used. 5. SC-5: Not Used. 6. SC-6: Interior concrete(non-submerged) Surfaces of concrete walls,concrete ceilings. 09800-9 a. Surface Preparation: C5 b. Finish: First Coat: 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 6.0 mils (Sprayed and Backrolled) Second Coat: 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 6.0 mils Total Minimum OFT 12.0 mils 7. SC-7: Not Used. 8. SC-8: Not Used. 9. SC-9: Factory finished equipment except switchgear shalt be coated as follows: a. Surface Preparation: Cl and C3 Primer: 27 Typoxy 2.0 mils b. Finish: — (Interior): 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 4.0 mils (Exterior): 75 Endurashield IV 3.0 mils 10. SC-10: Not Used. 11. SC-11: PVC and Fiberglass Pipes and Ducts — a. Surface Preparation: Sand to produce matte finish. b. Finish: Cl Primer: 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 3.0 mils Finish Coat: 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 3.0 mils Total Minimum DFT 6.0 mils 3.04 COLOR CODING A. Provide the color coating as selected by ENGINEER and Owner. END OF SECTION 09800 — 09800-10 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation,painting and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation,priming and finish coats specified in this section are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in schedules, except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned,paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated,the ENGINEER will select from standard colors or finishes available. 1. Painting includes field-painting exposed base and covered pipes and ducts(including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Painting is not required on pre-finished items, finished metal surfaces,concealed surfaces, operating parts and labels. I). Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications"for shop-priming ferrous metal. 2. Division 8 Section"Standard Steel Doors and Frames"for shop-priming steel doors and frames. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. "Paint"includes coating system materials,primers,emulsions, enamels, stains,sealers and fillers and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. -` 1.04. SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project that have resulted in a construction record of successful in-service performance. 09900-1 B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING — A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original,unopened packages and containersbearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: — 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description(generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7_ Color name and number. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum -- ambient temperature of 45 deg. F. (7 deg. C.). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition,free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg.F. (10 deg. C.)and 90 deg_F. (32 deg. C_). B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg.F. (7 deg. C.)and 95 deg.F. (35 deg. C.). C. Do not apply paint in snow,rain,fog or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; -- or at temperatures less than 5 deg.F. (3 deg.C.)above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. I. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: 1. Devoe and Raynolds Co.(Devoe). 09900-2 2. Diamond Vogel(D.Vogel). 3. Fuller O'Brien(Fuller). 4. The Glidden Company(Glidden). 5. Iowa Paint Mfg.Co.,Inc. (Iowa Paint). — 6. Benjamin Moore and Co.(Moore). 7. PPG Industries,Pittsburgh Paints (PPG). — 8. Pratt and Lambert(P &L). 9. The Sherwin-Williams Company(S-W). 2.02 PAINT MATERIALS,GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers,primers,finish coat materials and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application,as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best-quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. — C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the ENGINEER from the manufacturer's full range of standard colors. — 2.03 MASONRY BLOCK FILLER A. High-Performance Block Filler: Heavy-duty block fillers used for filling open textured interior and exterior concrete masonry block before application of top coats: 1. Block filler under high performance 2-component polyamide epoxy coatings: a. Iowa Paint: 3005 Latex Block Filler b. Glidden: 5318 Ultra-Hide c. S-W: Heavy-Duty Block Filler,B42W46 d. Tnemec: 54-660 Epoxy Masonry Filler 2.04 PRIMERS A. Primers: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated primers that are compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated. 09900-3 B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,prime coat materials that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Gypsum Drywall Primer _ a. Iowa Paint 515 One-O-Seal b. Tnemec Primer 66-1211 Epoxiline Primer 2. Concrete Block Primer a. Iowa Paint 3005 Latex Block Primer b. Tnemec Primer 66-1211 Epoxiline Primer 3. Ferrous Metal Primers: Alkyd-type primers used under high-gloss alkyd enamels. a. D. VogeI: P.N.5521 -Rust Inhibitive Primer b. Iowa Paint: 1064 Rust Inhibitive Primer c. Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint#163 d_ PPG: 6-612 Speedhide Inhibitive White Primer e. P&L: Effector Primer Red or White f. S-W: Kern Kromik Metal Primer B50N2B50W 1 4. Galvanized Metal Primers: Primer used under gloss alkyd enamels,interior flat latex paints and odorless, semigloss or gloss alkyd enamels. a. D. Vogel: D.V.P10602 Galvanized Primer b. Iowa Paint: 1069 Galvanized Primer c. Moore: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer#155 d, PPG: 6-215/216 Speedhide Galvanized Steel Primer _ e. P &L: P&L Interior Time Primer f. S-W: Galvite B50W3 2.05 EXTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated fuush-coat materials that are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, finish coat materials that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: 1. Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Weather-resistant,high-gloss enamel,used on exterior ferrous metal for a high-gloss alkyd enamel finish. 09900-4 a. Iowa Paint: 480 Alkyd/Urethane Enamel b. Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel#133 c. PPG: 54 Line Quick-Thy Enamel d. P&L: Effector Enamel e. S-W: B56 Silicone Alkyd Enamel 2. Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Weather-resistant,high-gloss enamel, used on galvanized metal for a high-gloss alkyd finish. a. Iowa Paint: 18835 Waterborne Industrial Enamel b. Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel 4133 c. PPG: 54 Line Quick-Dry Enamel d. P& L: Efecto Enamel e. S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series 206. INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated finish-coat materials that are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated. EL Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, finish coat materials that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: 1. High Performance Polyamide Epoxy Coating(HIPAC): Satin Finish coating over drywall and concrete masonry units_ a_ Iowa Paint: 16470/16473 1PM Gloss Epoxy b. Glidden: Y-5240 Chemical-Resistant Epoxy c. P&L: Palguard Epoxy Coating d. S-W: Tile-Clad II Epoxy Enamel B62 Series e. Tnemec: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline 2. Interior, Semigloss,Latex Enamel-Based Paint: Ready-mixed, latex-based paint for a semigloss finish used over ferrous metal and zinc-coated(galvanized)metal surfaces. a. Iowa Paint: 302 Series Semigloss Enamel b. PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel c. P &L Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel d. S-W: D.M.200 Alkyd Semigloss 09900-5 PART 3: EXECUTION — 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. Surfaces receiving paint must be thoroughly dry before paint is applied. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request,furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the ENGINEER about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by other. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories,plates, machined surfaces, lighting _ fixtures and similar items already installed that are not to be painted,or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items,if necessary, to completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in _ each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments,clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate conditions and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime. Notify ENGINEER in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish-coat material with substrates primed by others. _ D. Ferrous Metals: Clean un-galvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop-coated; remove oil, grease,dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical _ cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council (S SPC). 1. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before painting. 2. Touch-up base areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer and touch-up with the same primer as the shop coat. E. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non-petroleum-based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. — 09900-6 F. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's directions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2_ Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. G. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish �- coat,but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.03 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. EL Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture,scuffed surfaces or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 1. Paint colors,surface treatments and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as — recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce a smooth,even surface according to the manufacturer's directions. — 4. Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces,including edges,comers,crevices,welds and exposed fasteners, — receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 5. The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, _ convector covers,covers for finned tube radiation,grilles and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas,as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts,where visible through registers or grilles,with a flat, nonspecular black paint. 8. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 9. Finish exterior doors on tops,bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces. 09900-7 10. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up painted. C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm,does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. D. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush,roller,spray or other applicators according to the manufacturer's directions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet,velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the — manufacturer for the material and texture required. E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. F. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats,apply a prime coat of material,as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime-coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears,to ensure a finish coat with no bum-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. G. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks or other surface imperfections. H. Pigmented (Opaque)Finishes: Completely cover to provide a smooth,opaque surface of uniform finish,color,appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,holidays, laps,brush marks,runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. I. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not complying with specified requirements. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean-up: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans,rags,rubbish and other discarded paint materials from the site. B. After completing painting,clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades,whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning,repairing or replacing,and repainting,as acceptable to the ENGINEER. 09900-8 B. Provide"Wet Paint"signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades,touch-up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.06 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE — A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates indicated: L Ferrous Metal: Primer is not required on shop-primed items. — a. Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Two finish coats over primer. (1) Primer: Synthetic rust-inhibitive primer. D.Vogel: No recommendation Iowa Paint: 1064 Rust Inhibitive Metal Primer — Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint#163 PPG: 6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer P&L: Effecto Rust-Inhibiting Primer — S-W: Kern Kromik Metal Primer B50N2fB50W1 (2) First and Second Coats: (Gloss alkyd enamel) D. Vogel: No recommendation Iowa Paint: 480 Alkyd Urethane Enamel Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel #133 — PPG: 54 Line Quick-Dry Enamel P &L: Effecto Enamel S-W: B56 Silicone Alkyd Enamel 2. Zinc-Coated Metal: — a. High-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Two Finish coats over primer. (1) Primer: Galvanised metal primer D. Vogel: PIO 602 Galvanized Primer Iowa Paint: 1069 Waterborne Galvanized Primer Moore: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer#155 — PPG: 6-215/216 Speedhide Galvanized Steel Primer P &L: Interior Trim Primer S-W: Galvite B50W3 (2) First and Second Coats: Glass alkyd enamel — D. Vogel: No recommendation Iowa Paint: 18835 Waterborne Industrial Enamel Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel#133 — PPG: 54 Line Quick-Dry Enamel P&L: Effecto Enamel S-W: Industrial Enamel B54 Series 09900-9 3.07 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates,as indicated: 1. Interior Primer and Sealers: Provide factory formulated prime and seal coat materials compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated. a. Sealer and Primer Over Drywall Iowa Paint: 515 One-O-Seal Tnemec Primer: 66-1211 Epoxiline Primer 2. Finish Coats: Provide factory formulated, finish coats compatible with the substrate and prime, base or intermediate coat indicated. a. High Performance Polyamide Epoxy Coating(HIPAC): Satin finish coating over drywall and concrete masonry units. Iowa Paint: 16470/16473 1PM Gloss Epoxy P &L: Palguard Epoxy Coating S-W: Tile-Clad II Epoxy Enamel B62 Series Tnemec: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline 3. Concrete Masonry Units a. Interior Block Fillers: Provide factory formulated block filler materials for — coarse and porous concrete masonry block surfaces,that are compatible with the substrate,primer and finish coating materials indicated. b. Block filler under high performance 2-component polyamide epoxy coatings: Iowa Paint: 3005 Latex Block Filler Glidden: 5318 Ultra-Hide S-W: Heavy-Duty Block Filler,B42W46 Tnemec: 54-660 Epoxy Masonry Filler c. Interior Primers and Sealers: Provide factory formulated prime and seal coat materials compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated. d. Primer Over Block: Iowa Paint: 3005 Latex Block Primer _ Tnemec: 66-1211 Epoxoline Primer e. Finish Coats: Provide factory formulated,finish coats compatible with the _ substrate and prime,base or intermediate coat indicated. (1) High Performance Polyamide Epoxy Coating(HIPAC): Satin finish coating over drywall and concrete masonry units. Iowa Paint: 16470/16473 1PM Gloss Epoxy Glidden: Y-5240 Chemical-Resistant Epoxy P&L: Palguard Epoxy Coating S-W: Tile-Clad II Epoxy Enamel B62 Series Tnemec: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline — 09900-10 4. Ferrous Metal: a. Semigloss Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. (1) Primer: Synthetic,quick-drying,rust-inhibiting primer. D. Vogel: P.V. 5521 Rust Inhibitive Primer Iowa Paint: 1064 Rust Inhibitive Primer Moore: IronClad Retard()Rust-Inhibitive Paint#163 PPG: 6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer P&L: Effecto Rust-Inhibitive Primer S-W: Kern Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W 1 (2) Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat D.Vogel: C.V. 1401 Iowa Paint: 301 Enamel Undercoat Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody#217 PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Dry Enamel Undercoater P&L: Interior Trim Primer S-W: ProMar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200 (3) Finish Coat: Interior, semigloss, odorless,alkyd enamel — D. Vogel: C.S. 1302 Semigloss Alkyd Iowa Paint: 302 Series Semigloss Enamel Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel#235 PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel P&L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel S-W: D.M.200 Alkyd Semigloss 5. Zinc-Coated Metal: a. Semigloss Finish: Two coats over primer, with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. (1) Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer D. Vogel: No recommendation Iowa Paint: 1069 Acrylic Galvanized Primer Moore: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer#I55 PPG: 6-215/216 Speedhide Galvanized Steel Primer P &L: Interior Trim Primer S-W: Galvite B50W3 (2) Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat D.Vogel: No recommendation Iowa Paint: 501 Alkyd Enamel Undercoat Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody#217 PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Dry Enamel Undercoater P&L: Interior Trim Primer _ S-W: ProMar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200 09900-11 (3) Finish Coat: Interior,semigloss,odorless, alkyd enamel D. Vogel: No recommendation Iowa Paint: 302 Series Semigloss Enamel Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel#235 PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel • • P&L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel — S-W: D.M. 200 Alkyd Semigloss END OF SECTION 09900 09900-12 DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT Section 11200 Equipment—General Provisions Section 11210 Submersible Propeller Pumps SECTION 11200 PROCESS EQUIPMENT-GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General Specifications for Construction and Supplemental General Specifications for Construction,General Special Provisions,and Division 1 Sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work under this Division and following sections of the specifications consist of all labor, material,tools and skills necessary for the furnishing,installation,testing and adjustment of the various items of process equipment required under this contract. Each item shall be furnished complete,and installed as shown on the drawings and in accordance with these specifications and the manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. Ft. The omission of any reference to parts necessary or incidental to a complete installation shall not be construed as releasing the Contractor from furnishing such parts. C:. The following equipment is included under this Division: 1. Section 11210 - Submersible Propeller Pumps 1.03 BASIS OF BID A. In order to assure uniform quality,ease of maintenance and minimal parts storage,it is the intent of these specifications that all equipment called for under each section,as listed in 1.02-C,shall be supplied by a single manufacturer or authorized sales representative. The equipment manufacturer or authorized sales representative shall, in addition to the Contractor, assume the responsibility for proper installation and functioning of the equipment 1.04 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 26-Electrical 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All furnished equipment and systems shall conform fully in every respect to the requirements of the respective parts and sections of the drawings and specifications. Equipment which is a "standard product"with the manufacturer,unless noted otherwise, shall be modified,redesigned from the standard mode if necessary,or shall be furnished with special features,accessories, materials or finishes as may be necessary to conform to the requirements of the specifications. B. All steel design and fabrication shall be in accordance with the prevailing practices of the American Institute of Steel Construction(AISC). 11200-1 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings for all items of mechanical equipment specified hereunder and related accessory items shall be submitted for approval as specified in the General Conditions of this specification. Shop drawings shall be specific to this particular project and shall be so noted and referenced to the particular piece of equipment and respective process system. B. PreIiminary characteristic performance curves for all process pumps shall be submitted with shop drawings. These curves shall show operating head,brake horsepower NPSHR and efficiency plotted against capacity and other data where required. C. Prior to review of any shop drawings,the manufacturer shall submit two (2)preliminary sets of all manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions specific to proposed equipment. — D. After installation and before acceptance of the equipment,four(4)copies of the final instruction manual containing complete information in connection with assembly, operation, adjustments, maintenance and repair of all equipment shall be furnished to the A/E for transmittal to the Owner. E. Experience information for identified items of equipment shall be furnished with shop drawings. The information shall include, but not be limited to,the following: 1. Name and location of installation. — 2. Name of person in direct responsible charge for the equipment. 3. Address and phone number of person in direct responsible charge. 4. Month and year the equipment was placed in operation. — 5. Brief description of equipment(size, capacity, horsepower,etc.). Manufacturers who cannot meet the experience information,shall provide a maintenance bond in the name of the Owner with shop drawing submittals. F. The manufacturer shall provide a certification statement that the equipment has been furnished by an authorized sales representative and shall identify the authorized service representative who will be responsible for warranty repair and service. The certification statement shall be provided _ on corporate letterhead and signed by an authorized corporate officer_ The certification statement shall include the name,address and phone number of all applicable representatives. A copy of the certification statement shall be included in the final 0&M Manual. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All mechanical equipment shall be cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job -- storage. All pipe and electrical connections shall be covered with suitable coverings,caps or plugs. B. Store all materials and equipment at building site under cover unless specific permission is granted by the A/E for off site storage. Store pumps,motors and electrical equipment in weather tight areas and maintain temperature of 50°F.minimum. Place equipment on wood-supports or — 11200-2 floors in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelter which could create a humidity chamber. Cardboard wrappers which become wet shall be removed immediately. 1.08 JOB CONDITIONS A. The Contract Documents (drawings)indicate the required size and general arrangement of all piping and equipment. The final exact dimensions and configuration will have to be determined by the exact equipment furnished. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for taking and/or verifying any dimensions of the in-place existing or new structure and piping or equipment required for the proper fabrication and installation of all new equipment and the necessary connections. _. C. The Contractor shall determine and be responsible for the proper locations and character of all anchor bolts,inserts,hangers, chases,sleeves and other openings. D. The drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either one shall be as binding as if called for in both. 1.09 GUARANTEE A. All equipment shall be guaranteed as specified under the General and Supplementary Conditions as specified herein. Guarantee on all equipment shall start after formal acceptance of equipment. B. Guarantee all equipment against: 1. Faulty or inadequate design. 2. Improper assembly or erection. 3. Defective workmanship or materials. 4. Leakage, breakage or other failure. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Equipment manufacturer shall furnish all anchor bolts of ample size and strength required to securely anchor each item of equipment. Bolts,washers and hex nuts shall be 304 stainless steel unless noted otherwise. Expansion-type anchors will not be acceptable. Anchor bolts shall be set by template and protected from misalignment by the Contractor. Equipment shall be placed on -- the foundations,leveled,shimmed,bolted down and grouted with a non-shrinking grout. 2.02 ENCLOSURES A. All control devices or similar items appurtenant to the major equipment shall be furnished with dust and moisture tight enclosures,unless otherwise specified; and all electrical conduit connections shall be of the threaded type. 11200-3 2.03 GUARDS A. All belts,couplings and rotating shafts shall be covered with a substantial,removable sheet metal guard having an expanded metal,hinged access cover having captive bolts or fasteners. 2.04 SHOP COATING A. Protect all steel and iron surfaces by suitable coatings applied in shop as noted in Division 11- Equipment Section. B. Protect, for life of equipment,surfaces which will be inaccessible after assembly. C. Finish smooth,thoroughly clean and fill exposed surfaces,as necessary, to provide a smooth, — uniform base for coating. D. Coat surfaces to be painted after installation with one or more coats of primer,to protect equipment until finish coats are applied. See specific equipment sections for specific finishes. E. Shop finish electric motors,speed reducers, starters and other self-contained or enclosed components with oil-resistant enamel. F. Apply rust preventative compound to all machined,polished and non-ferrous surfaces which are - not to be painted. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 FACTORY TESTS A. Process equipment shall be subject to factory testing in accordance with requirements specified for the particular equipment. B. Factory test on each piece of pumping equipment as specified in Section 11210 shall be made in accordance with the test code of Hydraulic Institute Standards. Pumping equipment which fails to meet the requirements of the test shall be replaced with pumping equipment which meets the specified requirements. Certified factory performance test curves for each pump shall be furnished which shall cover the full range of operation from shut-off to maximum capacity as well as plotted efficiency, NPSHR and horsepower. 3.02 INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall inspect all material or equipment as it is received to determine damage and/or missing parts. It shall be his responsibility to repair or replace damaged items in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Each item shall be furnished complete and installed as shown on the drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations,instructions and directions. All installed equipment shall be properly protected during subsequent construction operation. B. Oil and grease necessary for initial operation shall be provided by the Contractor in quantities and grades recommended by the manufacturer. 11200-4 C. All material shall be new,undamaged and conform to the latest standards listed. I). The Contractor shall provide all scaffolding required for the proper installation of this work in conformance with the standards of any local and state safety codes applying to scaffolding. E. Cooperate with other trades to avoid interferences in the installation of this work. Install all equipment and systems so as not to delay progress of construction and correlate with other trades to avoid delay. Should differences of opinion develop, the AIE's decision will be final. F. The Contractor shall keep premises clean and orderly during installation of this work,remove rubbish periodically and as may be directed by the AIE. Upon completion of this part of the project,remove all dirt,debris,tools,scaffolding, etc.,used or resulting from this work 3.04 TESTING AND OPERATION OF EQUIPMENT A. It is anticipated that portions of facilities will be in operation before final acceptance of the completed facilities, therefore,the following procedure shall be followed on all major equipment. Also,refer to specific equipment section. F3_ All process, mechanical and electrical equipment, including related control systems,shall be subjected to preliminary operation and testing by the Contractor before the individual facilities and systems are put into operation. Tests shall be made to determine whether the equipment has been properly assembled, aligned,adjusted,wired or connected. Any changes,adjustments or replacements of equipment which are due to errors or omissions on the part of the Contractor,or which may be otherwise necessary to comply with the requirements of this Contract, shall be done without additional cost to the Owner. Upon completion of the checking and adjustment,the Contractor shall demonstrate that each separate piece of equipment in each system of related items of mechanical equipment and the related instrumentation and control equipment operate in accordance with the requirements of the contract specifications. Where no specific performance requirements are stated in the specifications,the test shall show that the equipment operates in accordance with normal application practice of the equipment. The demonstration test shall show that the equipment operates smoothly and without excessive noise or vibration,that the equipment is responsive to manual and automatic controls, that control and protective devices are properly set,that the equipment will run on a controlled or intermittent basis when such operation is intended. The demonstration test for each piece of equipment shall include checkout from each remote control point. All alarm systems and safety lockout systems shall also be demonstrated for proper function along with all process instrumentation and controls. C. The demonstration test shall be arranged by the Contractor;however,the scheduling shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. The Contractor shall provide personnel from the various trades involved to operate and demonstrate the equipment. D. During the testing of equipment, the Contractor shall arrange for the presence of qualified representatives of the manufacturers of all the various pieces of equipment and instrumentation. F. Upon completion of the tests,the Contractor shall submit six(6) copies of a report describing the test,test conditions and the results. F. Upon receipt of the specified copies of the final operation and maintenance instructions and equipment testing report,the A/E shall promptly review these submittals and either shall request 11200-5 further information or tests or shall recommend acceptance of the equipment by the Owner. The Owner shall provide written notice of acceptance of the equipment within a reasonable time after receipt of the AIE's recommendation. G. After the equipment has been tested, adjusted and finally accepted,but before final acceptance of entire project,the Owner may place portions of the project into operation. In this instance, the guarantee period will start from the date of written notice of acceptance of the equipment by the Owner. At this acceptance time, the Owner will assume the operation and maintenance of the equipment. 3.05 INSPECTION START-UP AND ADJUSTMENT A. The Contractor shall place the various items of equipment into operation, along with the related control piping systems. B. Schedule for such start-up of the equipment and pumping systems will occur during the duration of the contract period and prior to final completion and acceptance of the overall project.After satisfactory start-up of these individual systems, including all of the related equipment,they will remain in continuous or intermittent operation as required by the Owner. — C. All equipment and accessories shall be adjusted and calibrated prior to any start-up. Any equipment placed into temporary operation prior to final completion of.the.total.project shall be re-adjusted and/or calibrated. D. The cost of the above personnel for supervisory purposes shall be included in the contract cost and no additional compensation will be paid the Contractor for this item. E. During the period thus provided, the Owner will arrange to have a full-time operating personnel available,and these operators will be paid by the Owner. F. The Contractor shall pay all power and fuel costs necessary for system start-up and placing the various items of equipment into operation. Upon written acceptance of the system, all future — power and fuel costs will be borne by the Owner. G. The manufacturer or single source supplier of equipment included in each section shall inspect the completed installation,make all necessary adjustments,corrections or modifications prior to start-up. 1. Verify that adequate clearance is available to permit maintenance and repair. 2. Assure that discharge tube channels and equipment is clean of debris which might clog equipment. 3. Check all overhead and leak detection sensors. 4. Check for sufficient lubrication. 5. Check for correct rotation. 6. Check for correct operation of flap valves. 7. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper operation and maintenance. 11200-6 H. After start-up is authorized by the AIE,the manufacturer or supplier shall supervise start-up procedures. The manufacturer shall make all final adjustments necessary for the intended use of the equipment and certify in writing that the equipment has been properly installed and adjusted and is operating satisfactorily. 1. Check for excessive noise and vibration. 2. Check for high bearing temperature. 3. Check temperature of packing glands or mechanical seals. 4. Check for motor overloading,take ampere readings. 5. Check out safety devices, limit switches and timers. 6. Select and optimize operating variables. _ 7. Give initial instruction to Owner's personnel in operation of the equipment. 3.06 WRITTEN REPORT A. Furnish to Owner,through A/E,a written report prepared by equipment supplier certifying that equipment: 1. Has been properly installed and lubricated; 2. Is in accurate alignment; 3. Is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts. El. Final acceptance of the equipment will not be given until this requirement has been fulfilled. 3.07 OPERATOR TRAINING A. The manufacturer or single source supplier shall provide the minimum number of hours of operator training as specified in each section on the proper use and maintenance of the equipment. The hours shall not necessarily be consecutive. Time spent fulfilling the requirements of Articles 3,03, 3.04 and 3.05 of this section are not applicable to this paragraph. Time of operator training shall be coordinated with and agreeable to the Owner. Up to twenty-five(25)percent of the operator training hours shall be scheduled by the manufacturer at the convenience of the Owner during initial start-up. The manufacturer shall notify the Owner at least two(2)weeks in advance. The remaining seventy-five(75)percent of the operator training hours shall be scheduled by the Owner within twelve(12)months after final acceptance of equipment. END OF SECTION 11200 11200-7 SECTION 11210 SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPS PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General Specifications for Construction and Supplemental General Specifications for Construction, General Special Provisions, and Division 1 Sections apply to the work of this Section. B. For electric control center,electrical equipment, and related items,see Division 16. C. The General Provisions as listed in Section 11200 apply to work in this section. — I). QUALITY ASSURANCE-REFERENCED STANDARDS: American iron&Steel Institute(AISI) American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) National Fire Protection Agency(NFPA) National Electric Code(NEC) National Electrical Manufacturers Association(NEMA) Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association(AFBMEA) —' International Standards Organization(ISO)-ISO9001 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and place in satisfactory operating condition two (2) submersible propeller axial flow,close coupled pump/motor units and associated items including -_ two(2) fabricated steel discharge tubes with two(2)electrically operated submersible propeller pump/motor units,with leakage and temperature monitoring systems,stainless steel lift cable systems and cable guide accessories. This shall also include bottom guide ribs,and/or anti-vortex plates and any additional components or pump station modifications as required by individual pump manufacturers. B. All furnished equipment and systems shall conform fully in every respect to the requirements of the respective parts and sections of the plans and specifications. Equipment which is a "standard product" with the manufacturer shall be modified,redesigned from the standard mode,if necessary,or shall be furnished with special features, accessories,materials,or finishes as may be necessary to conform to the requirements of the specifications. 1.03 OPERATING CONDITIONS A. Each propeller pump shall each be capable of operating under the following conditions: 1. Design Point:32,000 GPM @ 10 feet TDH 2. Operating Range: 10 feet TDH max. to 559 feet TDH min. 3. Maximum Motor HP: 160 4. Minimum Hydraulic Efficiency(at design point): 76.5 5. Maximum Motor/Pump RPM: 715 6. Maximum Discharge Column Diameter: 40 7. Electrical Service: 480 Volt,60 Hz,3 phase 11210-1 8. Motor service factor= 1.15 4. Solids handling capacity=4 The above total dynamic heads shall include static head, velocity head,all piping entrances and exit losses calculated from an elevation 20-inches above the pump motor. B. Each pump shall be designed as a completely submersible unit capable of pumping storm water, fibrous material and spherical solids no smaller than 4 inches in diameter. C. The design shall be such that pumping units will be automatically connected to the discharge tube when Iowered into place.The pumps shall be easily removable with a portable hoist for inspection or service,requiring no bolts,nuts or other fastenings to be removed for this purpose, and no need for personnel to enter pump wet well sump area. D. Units operating at lower rotating speeds will be considered,however,pumps operating at higher speeds will not be acceptable. E. The discharge column shalt be permanently installed in the sump area with all necessary bolts, nuts and anchors as referenced for installation be provided. 1.05 PUMP TEST A. Each pump shall be fully tested on clear water at the manufacturer's plant before shipment. Tests shall consist of checking the unit at its rated speed,head,capacity, efficiency and brake horsepower,and at such other conditions of head and capacity to properly establish the performance curve.Minimum hydrostatic text pressure shall be 1.5 times the shutoff head at maximum design pump speed.The Standards of the Hydraulic Institute shall govern the procedure and calculations for these tests. B. Certified factory performance test curves shall be furnished and approved prior to shipment. C. Motor and cable insulation tests shall be conducted for moisture content after the pumping unit has been tested on clear water. 1.06 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings submitted shall include pump curves and two sets of the operation and maintenance manuals before they will be accepted for review. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE PUMP MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following are acceptable: KSB Model Amacan PA4 1000-700/15510UTG — B. All products, whether named as"acceptable"or proposed as"equal"must fully comply with these specifications. Standard product must be modified,if required,for compliance.The contractor shall base his bid price on product offered by KSB, Inc. for purposes of determining the successful bidder on this project.The contractor may submit,with the bid, an alternate proposal as provided in Section 01100 for supplying product other than KSB. Alternate proposals must include a clear statement of each point of difference between the proposed alternate product and these specifications.The Owner and Engineer reserve the right to reject any bid not based on KSB product. 11210-2 A. MATERIALS — I. Pump Case: Cast Iron,ASTM A 48,Class 30 B 2. Inlet Nozzle: Cast Iron,ASTM A 48, Class 30 B 3. Motor Housing: Cast Iron, ASTM A 48,Class 35 B 4. Propeller: Stainless Steel, ASTM A 743,CD 4 MCu 5. Pump/Motor Shaft: Stainless Steel,ASTM A 276,Type 420 6. Wear Ring, Case: Stainless Steel,ASTM A 276,Type 316 Ti 7. 0-Rings: Nitrile Rubber(NBR) 8. Fasteners: Stainless Steel,ASTM A 276,Type 316 Ti 9. Lower Seal Faces: Silicon Carbide/Silicon Carbide 10. Upper Seal Faces: Hard Metal Stationary/Carbon Rotating 11. Power Cable Jacket Chloroprene with non-wicking fillers 12. Carrier Cable: Stainless Steel,ASTM A 276,Type 316 — 13. Oil (seal lubrication): Ecologically safe,mineral or parifin base 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. POWER CABLE Provide sufficient length of power/control cable with each pump,suitable for submersible application, sized in accordance with NEC requirements to facilitate easy installation,removal and operation of the pumps. Provide cable terminal box on top of motor housing,with cable entry sealed to insure that no entry of moisture is possible into the high-voltage motor/terminal area even if the cable is damaged or severed below water level. Cable entries providing only rubber grommet(external cable jacket)seals will not be accepted. The power and control cables shall be strain relief mounted to the pump lifting lug. B. TEMPERATURE PROTECTION Furnish temperature monitoring devices in motor windings for use in conjunction with and supplemental to external motor overload protection.Arrange controls to shut down pump should — any of the monitors detect high temperature and automatically reset once motor temperature returns to normal. Set temperature monitors at levels recommended by pump manufacturer. Provide a temperature monitor for the upper and lower bearing. Sensor to be a Resistance Type (RTD) temperature sensor with a linear relationship between temperature and resistance. C:. SEAL LEAK DETECTION Provide a detector in the motor's stator cavity which allows a control panel mounted relay to — indicate leakage into the motor. Provide a stainless steel mechanical float in a separate leakage collection chamber to indicate seal leakage prior to its penetration of the lower bearing assembly. — D. "PUMPSAFE"MOTOR SENSOR MONITORING RELAY The pump supplier shall furnish all relays required for monitoring all motor sensors.The relays shall be installed by the Contractor in the motor control panel and properly wired in accordance with pump manufacturer's instructions. Relays shall mount in standard 12-pin socket bases (provided) and shall operate on available control voltage of 24-240 VAC. If relays require an input voltage that is not available in the motor control panel an adequate transformer(with fused input) shall be provided by the pump supplier. Relays shall have a power consumption of no more than 2.8 watt,and shall be UL approved. Relays shall be modular in design,with each relay monitoring no more than two motor sensor functions. Each relay module shall include a dual color(red/green)LED to indicate the status of each monitored sensor. Green will indicate"status OK";red will indicate a failure or alarm condition. A self-corrected fault will allow the relay output contacts to reset, and cause the LED to change from a steady alarm indication to a flashing signal The LED shall continue to flash until locally 11210-3 cleared,providing the operator an indication of a potential intermittent fault.Each relay shall also include a power-on LED and both"test"and"reset"pushbuttons. An independent fail-safe(switch on power loss)for-C output contact shall be included for each monitored sensor to provide a normally-open/normally-closed dry contact to initiate a remote alarm device or shut down the motor. Contacts shall be rated for 5 amps at 120 volt. 2.03 FABRICATION A. MAJOR COMPONENTS Furnish major components(pump case,inlet nozzle and motor housing)of thick cross section cast material as specified with smooth surfaces devoid of blow holes and other irregularities. -- Designs employing fabricated components will be considered inferior and will not be acceptable. All mating surfaces where water tight sealing is required shall be machined and fitted with Nitrite rubber a-rings. All exposed fasteners shall be as specified. , B. PROPELLER(WITH EVERCLEAN BLADES) Propeller and hub shall be a single piece cast material as specified with smooth surfaces.The propeller shall be a four-blade, fixed pitch design that is available in 2 degree increments to — optimize pump performance and efficiency.The propeller shall be positively locked to the shaft with a stainless steel key and lock nut designed to not loosen,but be easily removed for _ maintenance.The propeller shall be capable of handling fibrous materials, silt and other matter found in the pumped media.The propeller blades shall be contoured such that the tangent line at any point on the leading edge is equal or less steep relative to the circumferential direction than the resulting force,causing fibrous materials to always slide toward the outer radius of the propeller(technical documentation and video tape required to verify this feature). C. PROPELLER SHAFT SEALS ._ The critical area of the propeller shaft shall be sealed by two tandem, independent, mechanical shaft seals,with there own spring system.The seal faces must be of the solid material specified capable of being relapped.The seals shall require neither maintenance nor adjustment,but be _. easy to check and replace. Seals shall be non-proprietary in design,and shall be available from another vendor in addition to the pump manufacturer. The lower mechanical seal shall be protected from solids in the pumped media by a labyrinth cast into the propeller hub/seal housing interface.An oil-filled chamber with drain/inspection plug(with positive anti-leak seal, .� accessible from outside the pump casing)shall separate the seals and provide lubrication.The upper mechanical seal shall have a normally dry chamber mounted above it where a float switch _ constantly monitors for leakage.The dry chamber shall be capable of being inspected,without having to disassemble the pump, through a plug on the outside of the pump case. Conventional double mechanical seals with a single or multiple springs acting in opposed direction,cartridge- type mechanical seals; seals with materials other than those specified;seals using the propeller — hub as a mounting surface shall not be considered adequate for this critical sealing area.The oiI and dry chambers must be user friendly-capable of being inspected and maintained without having to take the pump apart. Pumps without these features are not acceptable. — D. PUMP AND MOTOR BEARING ARRANGEMENT Furnish a solid, one piece,pump and motor shaft of the corrosion resistant material specified. _ Carbon steel pump shafts(in contact with the fluid or not)will NOT be accepted for this critical pump component.The shaft shall rotate on a minimum of three(3)permanently lubricated bearings and be of sufficient size to transmit full driver output with a maximum deflection of 0.002 inches measured at the lower mechanical seal.The upper bearing shall be a cylindrical roller bearing and the lower bearing shall consist of two single row angular contact bearings and 11210-4 one deep groove,single row,ball bearing.The bearing system shall be capable of handling all up and down vertical thrust loads plus any radial loads.The bearings shall be maintenance free, grease lubricated with a minimum B-10 bearing life of 40,000 hours at all anticipated axial and radial loads. ` E. PUMP CASING AND INLET NOZZLE The pump casing and inlet nozzle shall consist of two separate cast iron pieces,machined and bolted together for easy pump maintenance. Straightening vanes shall be provided in the inlet nozzle to deliver a smooth hydraulic velocity and directional transition into the pump casing and propeller with a minimum of turbulence. The pump casing/diffuser section shall include directional vanes to deliver the flow of water into the discharge column to maximize the hydraulic efficiency and minimize exit losses from the pump. F. WEAR RING Provide a stainless steel wear ring to protect the inside diameter,(adjacent to the outside radial edge of the propeller blades), of the inlet nozzle against cavitation and abrasive wear.The wear ring will insure maximum pump life and continuing high efficiencies.The wear ring shall be positively sealed and locked into place by the metal to metal contact surfaces between the pump casing and inlet nozzle. The wear ring shall be easily replaced without having to remove the propeller/propeller hub or any other pump components. Ci. MOTOR Motor shall be squirrel cage, induction in design,housed in a completely watertight and air filled chamber,with a min 1.15 service factor.Insulate the motor stator with,at minimum,Class F insulation rated for 311 Degrees F.Provide temperature protection and seal leak detection as specified above.Motors shall be designed,rated and warranted for continuous operation and shall be capable of sustaining a min. of 10 starts per hour for motors rated above 120 hp. Operating for extended periods in a dry mode shall not damage the motor or seals. H. DISCHARGE COLUMN — Each pump unit shall be furnished with a fabricated steel discharge column as shown on the drawings.The discharge column shall be of such size to accommodate the dimensions of the pump supplied in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements, and the existing facilities. The design shall be such that the pumps will be automatically and firmly connected to the discharge column when lowered into place and shall be in accordance with the pump manufacturer's instructions_ An 0-ring shall be provided that prohibits rotational movement of the pumping unit inside the column.The o-ring will rest on a 45 degree conical surface to ensure concentric positioning of the pump in the discharge column.The pumps shall be easy to install/remove for inspection and service without need to enter the pump column or sump.The pumps shall not require any bolts,nuts,or fasteners for connection to the discharge column. DISCHARGE COLUMN COVER The discharge column cover shall be circular, of a single or two piece design,as shown on the drawings. The cover shall be watertight with a flexible rubber gasket,o-ring,or profile gasket.A bracket shall be supplied on the bottom of the cover to hold the carrier cable turnbuckle.The cover shall be fastened to the column with stainless steel bolts.Two piece covers shall utilize stainless steel sleeves with input bushings of quantity and size to accommodate the power and control cable for the specified pumps. One piece covers shall utilize a lateral cable duct, assembly frame,pressure plate and sealing module. Both cable sleeves and lateral ducts shall provide strain relief and protect against kinking and twisting. Power and control cable penetrations shall be watertight. The discharge elbow shall be flanged for connection to flanged outlet piping.All fasteners shall be stainless steel. 11210-5 J. CARRIER CABLE Provide a stainless steel carrier cable system with each pump,to restrain the power and control cables securely during pumping operation. The power and control cables shall not be allowed to "flap"around while the pump is operating.The carrier cable will also be used for installation and removal of the pump thus eliminating any need to enter the discharge column or pump sump. The carrier cable system shall consist of stainless steel shackles on each end, stainless steel cable,and stainless steel carrier lifting eyes at minimum every 4 feet.One shackle will be attached to a stainless steel turnbuckle and the other end to the pump lifting lug. An EPDM spacer shall be provided between the power, control,and carrier cable for protection against binding and abrasion. The spacer shall be secured to the power/control/carrier cable bundle with a protective hose and clamp above and below each shackle and lifting eye. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL — A. FACTORY TESTS-Prior to shipment the pump manufacturer shall check each unit for proper balance and quiet vibration-free operation, proper electrical characteristics,and satisfactory performance.Tests shall be performed in accordance with the Test Code for Centrifugal Pumps per the Standards of the Hydraulic Institute.Tests shall be performed on the actual assembled pumps to be supplied-prior tests on similar units or prototype model tests are not acceptable. Tests shall cover the full pump operating range from the maximum to the minimum specified head conditions.Conduct test(s) pet-above specifications on all supplied pumps,generating a curve showing actual flow,head,BHP and hydraulic efficiency. 2.05 ELECTRICAL TERMINAL/JUNCTION BOX A. The box shall receive power and control cables from the pump. Construction shall be NEMA 4X, stainless steel,dead-front outer door, three-point latching,lockable, and shall contain barrier-type terminal blocks for connection to all conductors.Terminals shall be labeled. B. The electrical terminal/junction box enclosure shall be constructed of 14 gauge(minimum) 304 stainless steel.All hardware and hinges shall be stainless steel. Drip shield shall be provided. All seams shall be continuously welded and ground smooth.The exterior shall have a brushed I4 finish.The enclosure shall accommodate cable entry from the bottom as shown on the Drawings. A Iockable cable protector shall be provided and hinged to the back of the enclosure as shown on the Drawings. The cable protector shall be constructed of 14 gauge(minimum), 304 stainless steel. Other requirement shall be in accordance with Division 16. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 PAINTING A. All piping, tubing and fabrications shall be shop blasted after fabrication to SSPC-SP10 near- white metal and painted as follows: Shop Primer: 37H78 H.S. Chem Prime 2.5 mils Finish: 1st coat: 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 6-8 mils 2nd coat: 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 6-8 mils Total Minimum DFT 12-16 mils 11210-6 3.02 INSTALLATION AND TESTING A. The equipment shall be installed as shown on the drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.All necessary shims,grout, lubrication,and anchor bolts shall be furnished. B. All pumps shall be field tested after installation to demonstrate satisfactory operation without excessive noise,vibration,or overheating.Any pump which fails to meet any of the contract specifications will be modified,repaired or replaced by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner. 3.03 WARRANTY A. The pump manufacturer shall warrant the units supplied to the Owner against defects in workmanship and material for a period of five(5)years or 10,000 hours whichever should occur first under a"Municipal type"decreasing participation type parts and labor warranty. 3.04 SPARE PART A. Provide the following spare parts for each pump. _ 1. 0-ring seal between pump and discharge tube_ 2. One set of mechanical seals(upper and lower). 3. 0-ring and/or gaskets necessary to accomplish seal replacement. 3.05 SERVICE, START-UP,AND TRAINING A. The manufacturer's representative shall field test all pumps to demonstrate operation,verify — installation,check for vibration,recording voltage and verify rotations. Et. The manufacturer shall provide a written report documenting the on-site test procedure. C. The manufacturer shall provide a minimum of 8 hours training course on the removal of the pumps,complete disassembly and reassembly of the pumps for maintenance purposes.The Contractor shall provide the necessary crane for pump installation,removal and re-installation. END OF SECTION 11210 11210-7 TABLE OF CONTENTS GD- DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 26 0050 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 5 26 0519 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 3 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL 6 SYSTEMS 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL 2 SYSTEMS 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 6 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 3 26 2200 TRANSFORMERS 3 26 2416 PANELBOARDS 3 26 2701 UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE 2 26 2716 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 2 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES 4 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 4 26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 3 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS 11 E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA Elect Table of Contents SECTION 26 0050 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Electrical Division Sections, In addition to Architectural Division -General Requirements and items shown on elevations on Architectural Drawings. 1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. This contractor shall give proper authorities all requisite notices relating to work in his charge, obtain official permits, licenses for temporary construction and pay proper fees for it. B. This contractor is to be solely answerable for and shall promptly make good all damage, injury or delay to other contractors, to neighboring premises or to persons or property of the public by himself, by his employees or through any operation under his charge, whether in the contract or extra work. C. No attempt has been made to reproduce in these specifications any of the rules or regulations contained in city, state or federal ordinances and codes pertaining to the work cove-ed by these specifications that the contractor be thoroughly familiar with all such ordinances anu codes. D. The fact that said various rules, regulations and ordinances are not repeated in this specification does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of making the entire installation in accordance with the requirement of those authorities having jurisdiction. E. All work shall comply with the applicable recommendations of: 1. The National Board of Fire Underwriters 2. The ANSI-NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 3. The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 4. The Occupations Safety and Health Act(OSHA) 5. IBC Building Code (current) and any current applicable city building and or electrical codes. 6. Fire Protection: Conform to UFC and NFPA. 7, ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. F. Obtain permits and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction. G. Conform to latest approved versions of codes. 1.03 PROJECTISITE CONDITIONS A. Install work in locations shown on drawings unless prevented by project conditions. B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of work to meet project conditions, including changes to work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of owner and archii ectiengineer before proceeding. C. This contractor, before submitting his bid, shall visit the site of the project to familia-ize himself with locations and conditions affecting his work. D. it is the intent of this specification that the contractor furnish all labor and material required to complete the installation as outlined in the drawings and specifications. No additior s to the contract price will be allowed due to the failure of this contractor to properly evaluate the effect of existing conditions on the work to be done under this contract. E. Whenever renovation or remodeling or relocation of existing equipment is included n the contract, it is imperative that all locations of existing wiring conduits, electrical panels, E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0050 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS - 1 equipment,services and grades be noted an the job site before bid is submitted and that all elevations and grades be verified before roughing in new work. F. This contractor shall provide hole, as necessary,for the installation of his work and in accordance with materials other than the structure. 1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. This contractor shall arrange his work in order that it progresses along with the general construction of the building. B. This contractor shall be kept informed as to the work of other trades engaged in the project and shall execute his work in such a manner so as riot to delay or interfere with progress of other contractors. C. Where space for mechanical and electrical lines and piping is limited, it is imperative that all such trades coordinate their work so as to insure concealment in space provided. Where conflict exists, the engineer shall decide priority of space. if work is not property coordinated, the engineer may require removal and relocation of work without additional compensation. 1.05 GUARANTEE A. This contractor shall guarantee all of the apparatus,materials, equipment furnished, and labor installed under this contract for a period of one year after date of final acceptance, unless a longer period is specified. B. Neither final certificate of payment nor any provisions in the contract documents nor partial or complete occupancy of premises by owner shall constitute an acceptance for work not done in accordance with contract documents or relieve the contractor of liability in respect to any express warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship. C. Should any defects arise as the result of defective workmanship or material within the guarantee period set forth, this contractor shall make the necessary correction at his own expense. 1.06 SUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS A. When the engineer, at the request of the interested parties,including the contractor, supplier and manufacturer, approves substitute products for this project,such products are approved on the assumption that they will equal or exceed the performance of the products specified. B. If such products do not do so after being installed on this project, this contractor shall replace or modify the particular product as necessary to equal the performance of the products specified at no expense to the owner,architect or engineer. C. Request for substitute products shall be received by the architect/engineer before the last addendum has been issued. Requests for substitutions received after this date will not be considered. Substitution requests shall clearly state which products are being considered for substitution. Substitution requests shall include all pertinent product information needed to evaluate the substitution as an"equal". 1.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. This contractor shall do all cutting and patching necessary for the installation of his work in all existing and new buildings unless otherwise noted. B. In areas where the integrity of new or existing fire separation assembly/wall is compromised by the work, this contractor shall be responsible to patch and/or seal openings as necessary to maintain and/or return fire separation to rating as required by applicable codes. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0050 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS -2 C. This contractor shall do all cutting and patching required for his work beyond the remodeled areas unless otherwise noted. All finish work shall include patching to match existir g adjacent surfaces. Painting shall be by others. 1.08 CLEANING AND RUBBISH A. This contractor, upon completion of his work, shall remove all rubbish and debris resulting from his operation and shall remove it from site at his own expense. B. As far as his work is concerned, all equipment shall be cleaned and the premises left in first class condition. C. This contractor shall maintain the work area each day to prevent hazardous accumulation of waste from his work. 1.09 SEALING AND PENETRATION A. Clearance around the conduit,cable trays,and all other devices or assemblies passing through fire or smoke rated construction shall be sealed to maintain the rated integrity of the construction (1 hr., 2 hrs,etc.). For one-hour rated assemblies, single side patching is permitted. For two-hour rated assemblies,patch both sides of assembly. B. This contractor shall verify rating and location of all such construction with the architectural drawings and seal all penetrations. C. Manufacturer offering products to comply with the requirements include the following: 1. Dow Coming"Silicone RTV Foam" 2. 3-M Corporation"Fire Barrier Caulk and Putty" 3. Thomas & Betts"Flame Safe Fire Stop System" D. Installation of these products are to be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. E. This contractor shall submit shop drawings showing approved sealing assemblies tc be utilized on this project. 1.10 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. This contractor shall wire all magnetic starters, thermal protective switches, and speed changing switches furnished under the mechanical contract for all motor driven equipment and install such starters and switches and wire them to their respective motors as a part of the electrical contract. 1.11 ASBESTOS A. At no lime shall any product containing asbestos be incorporated into the work. B. If asbestos materials are encountered, report to the owner. The owner will be respc risible for asbestos removal. 1.12 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A. If the contractor stores any hazardous solvents or other materials on the site, he shall obtain copies of the safety data sheets for the materials and post them at the site. He shagl inform the owner and all employed of any potential exposure to this material. 1.13 ALTERNATES A. Refer to description of alternate bids under Architectural Specification Sections. E.6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0050 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS -3 1.14 REVIEW OF MATERIALS A. This contractor shall submit to the engineer for review ten (10) brochure copies giving a complete list of materials, fixtures, devices and panels he proposes to furnish. The brochure shall contain complete information as to the make of equipment, type, size,capacities, dimensions,and illustration. One of the returned copies shall be kept on the job at all times. B. Checking of submittal drawings by the engineer does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility for the accuracy of such drawings and for their conformity to drawings and specifications unless he notifies engineer, in writing,of such deviation at time such drawings are furnished_ C. All submittals shall have the date marked on them when the contractor receives them from the supplier. Submittals shall be submitted through the contractor and shall not come direct from the supplier to the architect or engineer. D. This contractor shall mark the date and sign each set. This indicates that each of them have been checked in their entirety before submitting to the engineer. Submittals that are not dated and signed by the contractor will not be accepted or checked and will be marked"resubmit" and sent back to the contractor. 1.15 TEST OF SYSTEMS A. This contractor shall, before concealed, test all systems installed under this contract as called for in these specifications and as required by local codes. Tests shall be made in the presence of the engineer, local authorities or their duly authorized representative. Any defects discovered in testing shall be corrected and the tests repeated until all defects are eliminated. B. This contractor shall be held responsible for all damage resulting from defects in the system. C. Each individual feeder circuit shall be tested at the panel and in testing for insulation resistance to ground; the power equipment shall be connected for proper operation. In no case shall the insulation resistance to ground be less than that required by the National Electrical Code(NEC). 1.16 SCOPE OF WORK A. This contractor shall furnish all the labor and material necessary to install a complete electrical system for the new building. The system shall include all items of work as outlined in these specifications and on the drawings. B. All work shall be performed by a well-qualified, licensed electrician with a thorough knowledge of the various systems involved in this building. It shall be this contractors responsibility to see that his employees are familiar with all the various codes and tests applicable to this work. C. All equipment shall be new and of the type specified by the engineer unless otherwise noted in these specifications or on the drawings to remain and or be reused. D. The intent of the specifications and drawings is for complete installation of the systems outlined in the specifications and drawings so that at the conclusion of construction the system will be turned over to the owner complete and ready for safe and efficient operation. The specifications and drawings cannot deal individually with the many minute items that may be eventually required by the nature of the systems. E. This contractor is required to furnish and install all such items normally included on systems of this type,which,while not mentioned directly herein or on the drawings are obviously essential to the installation and operation of the system and which are normally furnished on quality installation of this type. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0050 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS -4 F. This contractor, before proceeding with any work, shall review the architectural drawings. Any conflict between the electrical and architectural drawings shall be reported to the er gineer for clarification. G. If there is a discrepancy between the drawings and the specifications or within either document,the more stringent requirement shall be estimated unless brought to the engineer's attention and an addendum is issued for clarification. 1.17 DAILY HOUSEKEEPING AND CLEANING A. At the end of each workday, the contractor shall remove all of his debris, rubbish, tools, and surplus materials from the project work area. The work area shall be broom cleaned and felt in a neat and orderly condition. The contractor shall not use the owner's waste disposal facility for the removal of debris from the project. B. At end of construction, all equipment shall be cleaned and the premises left in first class condition as far as this contractor's work is concerned. 1.18 UTILITY COMPANY A. Any fees by the utility company are to be a part of the base bid. 1.19 WALL CONTINUITY(1 HR.) A. All items mounted in 1 hr. rated walls requiring an opening larger than a 4" square(16 sq. inches) require the 1 hr. rating not be degraded. B. Any branch panel in a 1 hr.wall will require the exterior of the recessed panel be covered with 5/8"fire rated gypsum board. This is true for any device requiring more than a 16 sq. inch opening. 1.20 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A. Each contractor is responsible for their own individual trenching and backfilling unle=s otherwise noted in the drawings or addendum. B. All underground utilities,telephone conduit, parking lot lighting, tunnels, etc shall be exactly located prior to digging. This contractor shall be held responsible for all damages caused by failure to do so. C. Any backfill shall be tamped and compacted to prevent future settling. The backfill shall be installed to a smooth and level grade and installed in accordance with local codes. D. All excess dirt shall be cleared from the area and disposed of as directed by the ow-ter. E. Refer to architectural specification sections for additional information. 1.21 LOW VOLTAGE CABLE INSTALLATION A. This contractor is to install conduit serving low voltage cables in conduit PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0050 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS -5 SECTION 26 0519 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Building wire. B. Wiring connectors. 1.02 REFERENCES -- A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NETA ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems(International Electrical Testing Association). C. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. D. Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type. E. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. Include wire and cable lengths within 10'of length shown. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and lengths required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BUILDING WIRE A. Manufacturers: 1. Okanite 2. BelllHubbell#BICC 3. American Insulated Wire 4. General Cable E.6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0519 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES - 1 5. Southwire 6. Engineer approved equal. B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. C. Conductor: Copper. D. Insulation Voltage Rating:600 volts. E. Insulation: NFPA 70, type#THHNITHWN-2. All cable installation procedures or sizing shall be based on 75 deg C temperature rating. 2.02 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Split Bolt Connectors: 1. Burndy 2, Engineer approved equal_ B. Spring Wire Connectors: 1. Thomas& Betts 2. Engineer approved equal. C. Compression Connectors: 1. Burndy 2. Thomas& Betts 3. Engineer approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway over 2" in size or buried below grade before installing wire. 3.03 WIRING METHODS A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, type#THHNfTHWN-2 insulation in raceway. B. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, type#THHN/THWN-2 insulation in raceway. C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire, type#THHNITHWN-2 insulation in raceway. D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire, type#THHNfTHWN-2 insulation in raceway. E. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire, type#THHNITHINN-2 insulation, in raceway. F. Underground Installations: Use only building wire,type#THHN/THWN-2 insulation, in raceway. G. Interior Installations: Use only building wire, type#THHNITHWN-2 insulation, in raceway. H. Use wiring methods indicated. E.6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0519 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES -2 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Route wire and cable as required meeting project conditions, B. Install cable in accordance with the NECA"Standard of installation." C. Use stranded conductors for feeders and branch circuits larger than 10 AWG. D. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power lighting circuits. E. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for control circuits. F. Use#10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet. G. Use#10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere,208/240 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet. H. Use#10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere,277 volt branch circuits longer than 300 feet. I. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. J. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire#4 AWG and larger. K. Protect exposed cable from damage. L. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. M. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment and panel boards. N. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. O. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no pet ceptible temperature rise. P. Use suitable reducing connectors or mechanical connector adaptors for connecting aluminum conductors to copper conductors. Q. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps,#6 AWG and larger. Tape non-insulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150% of insulation rating of conductor. R. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, #8 AWG and smaller. S. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, #10 AWG and smaller. T. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Specification Section 26 0553- Identification for Electrical Systems. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated. U. Do riot multi wire branch circuits. No sharing of neutral. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing. B. inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. C. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with manufacturer's recommended values. D. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor. END OF SECTION E. fith Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0519 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES - 3 SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Rod electrode and conductors. B. Mechanical connectors. C. Wire. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to properly install a grounding system conductor in all new branch wiring and feeder installations, which shall be in full compliance with all applicable codes as accepted by the authorities having jurisdiction. The secondary distribution system shall include a grounding conductor in all raceways in addition to the return path of the metallic conduit. B. In general,all electrical equipment(metallic conduit, motor frames, panelboards, etc.)shall be bonded together with a green insulated or bare copper system grounding conductor in accordance with specific rules of Article 250 of the NEC and local codes. The bond ng conductor through the raceway system shall be continuous from main switch ground bus to panel ground bar of each panelboard,and from panel grounding bar of each panelb_>ard to branch circuit equipment and devices. C. All raceways shall have an insulated copper system ground conductor throughout the entire length of circuit installed within conduit in strict accordance with NEC. The grounding conductor shall be included in total conduit fill determining conduit sizes, even though not included or shown on drawings. All grounding conductors that run with feeders in PVC conduit outside of building shall be bare only. D. Provide and install all grounding and bonding as required by the National Electrical Code(NEC) including but not limited to Article 800 of the NEC. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70- National Electrical Code. 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit record documents to accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes_ B. Submit test results of each ground rod. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROD ELECTRODE AND CONDUCTORS A. Material: Copper-clad steel. B. Diameter: 5/8 inch. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - 1 C. Length: 10 feet(min). Increase number and/or lengths of ground rod electrodes as required to meet and achieve specified resistance. D. Maintain separation of not less than 8' and not more than 20'between ground rod electrodes. 2.02 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS A. All grounding connectors shall be in accordance with UL 467 and UL listed for use with rods, conductors, reinforcing bars, etc., as appropriate. B. Connectors and devices used in the grounding systems shall be fabricated of copper or bronze materials,and properly applied for their intended use. All connectors and devices shall be compatible with the surfaces being bonded and shall not cause galvanic corrosion by dissimilar metals. C. Lugs: Substantial construction, of cast copper or bronze, with "ground"(micro-flat)surfaces, twin clamp, and two-hole tongue equal to Bumdy QQA Series. D. Grounding and Bonding Bushings: Malleable iron. 1. Manufacturers: a. Thomas &Betts b. Engineer approved equal. E. Piping Clamps: Burndy GAR-TC Series with a two-hole compression terminal. F. Grounding Screw and Pigtail: Race#983. G. Building Structural Steel:Thompson#701 Series heavy duty bronze"C"clamp with two-bolt vise-grip cable clamp or equal. H. Mechanical lugs or wire terminals shall be used to bond ground wires together or to junction boxes and panel cabinets, 2.03 WIRE A. Material: Stranded copper. B. Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements as a minimum. Increase size if called for on drawings or in these specifications. C. Insulated THWN (or bare as noted elsewhere). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.al GENERAL A, Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install grounding electrodes conductor, bonding conductors, ground rods, etc. with all required accessories. C. Grounding shall meet (or exceed as required to meet these specifications)all the requirements of the N.E.C., the NFPA, and applicable standards of IEEE. D. Where there is a conflict between these specifications and the above applicable codes/standards or between this section of these specifications and other sections. then the most stringent or excessive requirement shall govern. Where there is an omission of a code/standard requirement in these specifications then the current code/standard requirements shall comply. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -2 E. Requirement in these specifications to comply with a specific code/standard article, etc. is not to be construed as deleting of requirements of other applicable codes/standards and their articles, etc. 3.02 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. All connections shall be exothermic welded unless otherwise noted herein. All connections above grade and in accessible locations may be by exothermic clamping with devices UI listed as suitable for use except in locations where exothermic welding is specifically specified in these specifications or called for on drawings. B. Each rod shall be die stamped with identification of manufacturer and rod length. C. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated and/or as called for in these specificatiols. D. Ground Resistance: 1. Main Electrical Service: a. Grounding resistance measured at each main service electrode system. b. Other Locations: 1) Resistance to ground of all non-current carrying metal parts shall no:exceed 5 ohms measured at motors, panels, busses, cabinets, equipment rac<s, light poles, transformers, and other equipment. 2) Resistance called for above shall be maximum resistance of each ground electrode prior to connection to grounding electrode conductor. Where ground electrode system being measured consists of two or more ground rod electrodes then the resistance specified above shall be the maximum resistance with two or more rods connected together but not connected to the grounding electrode conductor. E. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground (specified ground resistance is for each ground rod location prior to connection to ground electrode conductor). 1. Provide grounding well with cover at each rod location. Install grounding well top flush with finished grade. 2. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. 3. Install ground rods not less than 1' below grade level and not less than 2' from structure foundation. 3.03 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR A. Conductor shall be sized to meet or exceed the requirements of NEC 250 to meet these specifications and/or drawings. 3.04 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Grounding conductors shall be provided with every circuit to meet (or exceed as required to meet these specifications and/or drawings)the requirements of NEC 250. B. At every voltage level, new portions of the electrical power distribution system shall ne grounded with a dedicated copper conductor, which extends from termination back to power r ource in supply panelboard. C. Provide separate, insulated (bare if with feeder in PVC conduit outside of building) inductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug D. Except as otherwise indicated, each feeder raceway on the load side of the service entrance shall contain a ground conductor sized as indicated and where not shown shall be:.,zed to meet (or exceed as required) these specifications and/or drawings the requirements of NEC 250_ The E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -3 conductor shall be connected to the equipment grounding bus in switchboards and panelboards, to the grounding bus in all motor control centers, and as specified to lighting fixtures, motors, and other types of equipment and outlets. The ground shall be in addition to the metallic raceway and shall be properly connected thereto, using a lug device located within each item enclosure at the point of electric power connections to permit convenient inspection. E. Provide green insulated ground wire for all receptacles and for equipment of all voltages. In addition to grounding strap connection to metallic outlet boxes,a supplemental grounding wire and screw equal to Raco No. 983 shall be provided to connect receptacle ground terminal to the box, F. Where integral grounding conductor is specified elsewhere in bus duct construction, provide equivalent capacity conductor from supply switchboard or panelboard grounding bus to the bus duct grounding conductor. Bond integral conductor to bus duct enclosure at each tap and each termination. G. All motors, all heating coil assemblies,and all building equipment requiring flexible connections shall have a green grounding conductor properly connected to the frames and extending continuously inside conduit with circuit conductors to the supply source bus with accepted connectors regardless of conduit size or type. 3.05 MAIN ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. Complete installation shall meet and exceed the requirements of the NEC 250. B. Artificial electrodes shall be provided for the main service in sufficient number and configuration to secure resistance specified. C. Bond To All Of The Following When Available On Site: 1. Ground Rods. 2. Metal Water Pipe (Interior and Exterior to Building) 3. Building Metal Frame, Structural Steel and/or Reinforced Structural Concrete 4. All Piping Entering or Leaving All Buildings. 5. A main ground, bare copper conductor, sized per applicable table in NEC 250, but in no case less than#210, shall be run in conduit from the main switchgear of each building to the building steel in respective building. This ground conductor shall also be run individually from the main switchgear and be bonded to the main water service ahead of any union in pipe and must be metal pipe of length as acceptable by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide properly sized bonding shunt around water meter and/or dielectric unions in the water pipe. D. Ground/bond neutral per NEC 250. E. Provide and install ground bus bar on wall near main service disconnect/switchboard. Connect to ground bar in disconnect/switchboard bonded to switchboard/disconnect enclosure/neutral with copper grounding conductor sized per applicable table in NEC 250. 3.06 TRANSFORMER GROUNDING A. Ground all transformers and enclosures of 120/208V and 277/480V"separately derived systems"as specified herein. 1. Ground per NEC 250 and these specifications. 2. Bond neutral to transformer frame/enclosure and the equipment grounding conductors of the derived system with copper ground conductor sized per applicable table in NEC 250. 3. Connect transformer neutral/ground to grounding electrode per NEC 250 with grounding electrode conductor sized per applicable table in NEC 250. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -4 4, Where neither building steel nor water pipe grounding electrodes are available (i.e.exterior locations with no available water pipe electrode) provide two ground connections: each to two or more 10' ground rod electrodes at no less than 30' spacing, driven vertical to a minimum depth of 10' plus 1'below grade. 5. Ground to water system service pipe as required by NEC 250. B. Provide additional ground electrodes as required to achieve specified ground resistance. C. Where two or more ground electrodes are used at any one required ground location, they shall be bonded together with a copper ground conductor, sized to meet applicable table in NEC 250, but in no case less than#210. D. Complete installation shall exceed the minimum requirements of NEC 250. E. Equipment ground conductors shall be provided in addition to above grounding. See 'EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR'. 3.07 LIGHT FIXTURES A. All new fixtures in building interior, and exterior fixtures shall be provided with green grounding conductor, solidly connected to unit. Individual fixture grounds shall be with lug to fixture body, generally located at point of electrical connection to the fixture unit. B. All suspended fixtures and those supplied through flexible metallic conduit shall have green ground conductor from outlet box to fixture. Cord connected fixtures shall contain a separate green ground conductor. C. Installation shall exceed minimum requirements of NFPA 780. 3.08 MISCELLANEOUS GROUNDING CONNECTIONS A. Provide bonding to meet regulatory requirements. B. Required connections to building steel shall be with UL accepted non-reversible crimp type ground lugs exothermically welded to bus bar that is either exothermically welded or bolted to steel in locations where weld will affect the structural properties of the steel. Required connections to existing building structural steel purlins/i beams shall be with heavy duty bronze "C"clamp with two bolt vise-grip cable clamp. C. Grounding conductors shall be so installed as to permit shortest and most direct path from equipment to ground; be installed in conduit; be bonded to conduit at both ends when conduit is metal; have connections accessible for inspection;and made with accepted solderless connectors brazed or bolted to the equipment or to be grounded; in NO case be a current carrying conductor; have a green jacket unless it is bare copper; be run in conduit with power and branch circuit conductors. The main grounding electrode conductor shall be exothermically welded to ground rods, water pipe, and building steel. D. All surfaces to which grounding connections are made shall be thoroughly cleaned to maximum conductive condition immediately before connections are made thereto. Metal rust proofing shall be removed at grounding contact surfaces, for 0 ohms by digital Vm. Exposed bare metal at the termination point shall be painted. E. All ground connections that are buried or in otherwise inaccessible locations, shall be welded exothermically. The weld shall provide a connection which shall not corrode or loosen and which shall be equal or larger in size than the conductors joined together. The connection shall have the same current carrying capacity as the largest conductor. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -5 F_ Install ground bushings on all metal conduits entering enclosures where the continuity of grounding is broken between the conduit and enclosure(i.e.metal conduit stub-up into a motor control center enclosure or at ground bus bar). Provide an appropriately sized bond jumper from the ground bushing to the respective equipment ground bus or ground bus bar. G. Install ground bushings on all metal conduits where the continuity of grounding is broken between the conduit and the electrical distribution system (i.e.metal conduit stub-up from wall outlet box to ceiling space. Provide an appropriately sized bond jumper from the ground bushing to the respective equipment ground bus or ground bus bar. H. Each feeder metallic conduit shall be bonded at all discontinuities, including at switchboards and all sub distribution and branch circuit panels with conductors in accordance with applicable table in NEC 250 for parallel return with respective interior grounding conductor. I. Grounding provisions shall include double locknuts on all heavy wall conduits. J. Bond all metal parts of pole light fixtures to ground rod at base. K. Install grounding bus in all existing panelboards of remodeled areas, for connection of new grounding conductors, connected to an accepted ground point. L. Bond together reinforcing steel and metal accessories in pool and fountain structures. M. Where reinforced concrete is utilized for building grounding system, proper reinforced bonding shall be provided to secure low resistance to earth with "thermite" type devices, and#10AWG wire ties shall be provided to not less than ten full length rebars that contact the connected rebar(by Division 26 Electrical Contractor). 3.09 TESTING AND REPORTS A. Raceway Continuity: Metallic raceway system as a component of the facilities ground system shall be tested For electrical continuity. Resistance to ground throughout the system shall not exceed specified limits. B. Ground resistance measurements shall be made on each system utilized in the project. The ground resistance measurements shall include building structural steel, driven grounding system,water pipe grounding system and other accepted systems as may be applicable. Ground resistance measurements shall be made in normally dry weather,not less than 24 hours after rainfall, and with the ground under test isolated from other grounds and equipment. Resistances measured shall not exceed specified limits. C. Upon completion of testing, the testing conditions and results shall be certified by the electrical contractor and submitted to the engineer. 3.10 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Interface with communications system installed under other specification sections. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Use suitable test instrument with current certificate of calibration to measure resistance to ground of system. Perform testing in accordance with test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using the fall-of-potential method. END OF SECTION E.6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -6 SECTION 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Product requirements. B. Formed steel channel. C. indoor housekeeping pads. D. Outdoor housekeeping pads. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data for fastening systems. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructicns for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of products. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the, purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Materials and Finishes: 1. Corrosion resistant. 2. Select materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the toads of equipment and conduit,including weight of wire in conduit. B. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors, powder actuated anchors and preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps and welded fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts. 6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws, 7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. 2.02 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturers: 1. Globe Strut 2. Uni-Strut 3. Kindorf E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - 1 4. Engineer approved equal. B. Description: Galvanized steel. C. Provide aluminum supports and hangers in pool area. 2.03 INDOOR HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. This contractor shall provide and install 4" high concrete housekeeping pads under all floor-mounted equipment he has supplied and/or installed_ The housekeeping pads shall extend a minimum of 6"beyond the largest dimensions of the equipment mounted on the pad. The housekeeping pads shall have wire mesh embedded in the pad to reinforce the structure. All edges shall be rounded with a 1/2" radius. 2.04 OUTDOOR HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. This contractor shall provide and install concrete pads under all electrical equipment installed outdoors. The pads shall be as detailed on the drawings unless indicated otherwise. This contractor shall install pads under all utility company supplied and installed transformers. The pad dimensions shall be detailed on the drawings unless indicated otherwise. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and utility company regulations where applicable. B. Provide anchors, fasteners and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation". 1. Do not fasten supports to pipes,ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. 2. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps. 3. Do not use powder-actuated anchors. 4. Do not drill or cut structural members. C. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel members or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. D. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of tour anchors. E. Use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1" off wall in all wet and damp locations. F. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. G. Reinforce outdoor concrete pads with 1/2"steel reinforcing bars on 12" centers or as shown on the drawings. END OF SECTION E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -2 SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART I GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit requirements. B. Conduit types. C. Box types. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI C80.1 -Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. B. ANSI C80.3-Electrical Metallic Tubing,Zinc Coated. C. ANSI C80.5-Rigid Aluminum Conduit. D. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. E. ANSI/NFPA 70- National Electrical Code. F. NECA"Standard of Installation." G. NEMA 250- Enclosures for Electric Equipment. H. NEMA WD 6-Wiring Device Configurations. I. NEMA RN I - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel C::3nduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. J. NECA (National Electrical Contractor's Association) Standard of Installation. K. NEMA WD 6-Wiring Device Configurations. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Specification Section 26 0543 - Underfloor Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inches. B. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes on project record documents. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSIINFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide dimensions, knockout sizes and locations, materials, Fabrication details, finishes, and accessories. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,and installation of product. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - 1 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to the site. B. Accept products on site. Inspect for damage. C. Protect products from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough in. C. Conduit routing is shown on the drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required completing the wiring system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Size: 112" for power wiring and 3/4"for low voltage wiring unless noted otherwise. B. Size conduit per ANSI/NFPA 70_ C. Underground Installations: 1. Within 5'from Foundation Wall Including Below Building Slab: Use rigid steel conduit or thick wall nonmetallic conduit. 2. More Than 5'from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit or thick wall nonmetallic conduit. Schedule 80. 3. Provide rigid steel turn-ups to above grade. 4. Minimum size is to be one inch. 5. Provide warning tape. D. Above Grade Outdoor Locations: 1. Use rigid steel and aluminum conduit. Aluminum conduit shall not contact concrete mortar or block. E. Above Grade In or Under Slab: 1. Use rigid steel conduit or thick wall nonmetallic conduit. 2. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab: Total of 50% of pour depth. 3. Minimum Size: 1 inch. 4. Provide rigid steel turn-ups above slab. F. Wet and Damp Locations: 1. Use rigid steel conduit and intermediate metal conduit. G. Dry Locations: 1. Concealed: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing. 2. Exposed: Use rigid steel conduit,intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing. 2.02 CONDUIT TYPES A. Metal Conduit: 1. Rigid Steel Conduit:ANSI C80.1. 2. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5_ E. fith Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -2 3. Intermediate Metal Conduit(IMG): Rigid steel. 4. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSIINEMA FB 1; material to match conduit. B. Flexible Meta!Conduit: 1. Description: Interlocked steel construction, 2. Fittings:ANSI/NEMA FB 1. C. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. 2. Fittings:ANSIINEMA FB 1. D. Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT): 1. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSIINEMA FB 1; steel compression type with steel lock nut,and ring or steel setscrew fittings. Install compression type fittings in all wet and damp areas. E. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: 1. NEMA TC 3 2. Install offsets at surface boxes. 2.03 BOX TYPES A. Outlet Boxes: 1. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSIINEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. a. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported. Include 112"male fixture studs where required. b. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete Type. 2. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, type#FD, cast alloy. Provide gasket cover by box manufacturer, B. Floor Boxes: 1. ANSIINEMA OS 1,semi-adjustable. 2. Material: Formed steel. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Conform to regulatory requirements to concrete tight floor boxes. C. Pull and Junction Boxes: 1. Sheet Metal Boxes: NRMA OS 1 galvanized steel. 2. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250,type#4 and#6, flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box: a. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 3. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket and stainless steel corer screws. 4. Fiberglass Hand Holes: a. Die molded fiberglass hand holes. b. Cable Entrance: Precut 6" x 6" cable entrance at center bottom of each side. c. Cover: Fiberglass weatherproof cover with nonskid finish and light traffic rating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA"Standard of Installation" B. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. C. Support conduit using coated steel, malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hancers,clevis hangers,and split hangers. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -3 D. Group related conduit support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel and provide space on each for 25%additional conduits. E. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces. F. Do not support conduit with perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. G. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. H. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. I. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. J. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings, parallel and perpendicular to walls. K. Route the conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. L. Do not cross conduits in stab. M. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. N. Maintain 12"clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 deg F. O. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends. P. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. Q. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to cast boxes. R. install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction (as around beams). Use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2" size. S. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. T. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses control and expansion joints. U. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. V. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. W. Ground and bond all conduits. X. Identify conduit. Y. Use flexible and liquidtight conduits where required by NEC. Z. Flexible conduit length shall be limited to 6'unless directed by the engineer. AA. Install insulated bushings on all conduits and sleeves serving low voltage wiring prior to pulling wire unless otherwise noted. AB. Install grounded insulated bushings on all conduits and sleeves serving data wiring prior to pulling wire unless otherwise noted. AC. All low voltage conduits shall be sized to have less than 30% fill. Each penetration through a surface of any kind shall have a conduit sleeve with insulated bushings. AD. Junction boxes shall not be installed over 4'above accessible ceiling prior written approval by owner. 3.02 BOX INSTALLATION A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -4 B. install electrical boxes in locations as shown on the drawings and as required for splices,taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. C. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as indicated. D. Electrical boxes are shown on the drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust box location up to 10'if required to accommodate intended purpose. Verify with architectural drawings and elevations for additional information. E. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring device orientation. F. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. G. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. Junction boxes shall not be installed over 4'above accessible ceilings. H. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6"from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. I. Fire-stop boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements. Boxes may be installed within a minimum of 24"separation with written approval prior to installation. J. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and back splashes. K. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on the drawings. If light fixture locations conflict with ceiling plans,the electrical contractor shall document discrepancies and send to the engineer for clarification. L. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches,thermostats,and similar devices. M. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. N. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. _ Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. O. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in wall,provide minimum 6"separation. P. Provide minimum 24"separation in acoustic rated walls. Q. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. R. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. S. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. T. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. U. Support boxes independently of conduit. V. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. W. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. X. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations. Y. Use cast iron floor boxes for installation in slab on-grade, formed steel boxes are acceptable for other installations unless otherwise noted. Z. Set floor boxes level. AA. Large Pull Boxes: Use set screw enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast metal box in other locations. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -5 AB. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. AC. Group devices associated with each other 8"on center(i.e. receptacle,data,voice outlet). AD. All floor mounted device locations shall have a dimensioned drawing from the Architect prior to installation. 3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit using materials and method to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements. B. Piping and Ductwork: Route conduits through roof openings or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation specified. C. Coordinate installation of outlet and junction boxes for equipment connection. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust floor box flush with finish flooring material. B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. C. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material_ B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. END OF SECTION E.6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -6 SECTION 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates and labels. B. Wire markers. C. Underground warning tape. D. Identification. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for th purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic white letters on black background. 8. Locations: 1. All electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. 2. Communication cabinets. 3_ Single mounted breaker. 4. Transformer. C. Letter Size: 1. Use 1/8"letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. Use 1/4"letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. 3_ Use 1/4" letters for identifying communications cabinets, transfer switches and transformers. D. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape with 3/16"white letters on black background. Us only for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles, control device stations, and communication outlets. 2.02 WIRE MARKERS A. Description; Tape feeders to indicate phases. B. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection. C. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnecti an diagrams. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - 1 2.03 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Manufacturers: 1. Seaton 2. Engineer approved equal. B. Description: Plastic 4" wide tape, detectable type, colored RED with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines and inscribed "CAUTION- ELECTRIC LINE BURIED BELOW C. Location: Along length of each underground conduit. 2.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify All Junction Boxes With Appropriate Marker As Follows: 1. 480 Volt System: Orange(circuit name and number) 2. 208 Volt System: Black (circuit name and number) B. Write the circuit number of each device inside the device box(not ON the device cover). C. Label all outlets and switch with an adhesive label identifying panel and circuit the device is energized by. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws. C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations. D. ldentify underground conduits or wiring using one underground warning tape per trench at 3" below finished grade. END OF SECTION E.6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -2 SECTION 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Light switches. B. Wall face plates. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Specification Section 26 0533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems B. Specification Section 26 2726-Wiring Devices 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels and markers. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage.handling,protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. 1.04 REFERENCES A. NECA-Standard of Installation. B. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. C. NEMA WD 6- Dimensional Requirements for Wiring Devices. D. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colc,rs and configurations. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this; section with minimum three years experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.07 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. All equipment specified in this specification shall be manufactured by one of the belc.w listed companies unless specified elsewhere. Model numbers stated in this specification E re for basis of design information only. 1. Light Switches: a. Pass&Seymour b. Hubbell c. Cooper d. Lutron e. Engineer approved equals. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - 1 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHT SWITCHES A. Toggle Style: 1. Basis of Design: Pass &Seymour#PS2OAC 2. Description: NEMA WD 1, heavy-duty, AC only general-use, toggle switch. 3. Ratings: Match branch circuit and load characteristics. Default rating to be 20 amps. 4. Provide 2, 3, or 4-way or lighted switch configurations as needed. Refer to drawings. 2.02 WALL FACE PLATES A. Cover Plate: 1, Basis of Design: Pass &Seymour#SL(Metal), to be confirmed by architect. 2. Provide cover plate for all devices and provide multiple gang plates where required. B. Jumbo Cover Plates: 1_ Basis of Design: Pass&Seymour#SLO (Metal)to be confirmed by architect. 2. Provide cover plate for all devices and provide multiple gang plates where required. 3. Provide jumbo plates on masonry rough-in. Verify with architect prior to work being performed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SAMPLES A. Upon request, electrical contractor is to provide a sample of any device specified in any available color. 3.02 COLOR A. All devices shall be gray. All faceplates shall be stainless steel. 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Verify that boxes are installed at proper height. B. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. C. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed,tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. 3.04 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean debris from outlet boxes. 3.05 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA"Standard of Installation_" B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. D. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. E. Install wall plates on switches in finished areas. F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. E.6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES -2 3.06 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Specification Section 26 0533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems to obtain mounting heights indicated on the drawings. Before roughing in any floor devices the electrical contractor shall obtain a dimensioned d-awing signed by the owner showing device locations, B. Install wall switch 48" on center above finished floor. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A, Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. 3.08 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3,09 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. END OF SECTION E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES -3 SECTION 26 2200 TRANSFORMERS PART I GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. EE type energy efficient transformers per NEMA TP1 with primary and secondary voltages of 600V and less and capacity ratings 15kVA through 750kVA. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Specification Section 26 0526-Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems B. Specification Section 26 0533-Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70- NEC B. NEMA ST20 C. UL 1561 D. NEMA TP1 E. NEMA TP2 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide outline and support point dimensions of enclosures and accessories, unit weight, voltage, kVA, and impedance ratings and characteristics, tap configurations, insulation system type, and rated temperature rise. B. Suppliers asking consideration, as an approved equal shall submit complete,warranted performance data and physical dimensions for similar transformers. Data shall be submitted for each size specified, and shall be received by the consultant engineer no less than 10 days prior to the bid due date for consideration. C. Test Reports: Indicate loss data, efficiency at 25%,50%, 75% and 100% rated load and sound level. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. nclude instructions for storage, handling,protection, examination, preparation, and installati(n of product. E. Record actual locations of transformers in project record documents. 1.05 STANDARDS A. Transformers 750kVA and smaller shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. B. Conform to the requirements of ANSIINFPA 70. C. Transformers are to be manufactured and tested in accordance with NEMA ST20. D. Transformers losses shall conform to NEMA TP1 requirements E. Transformers losses shall be tested in accord with NEMA TP2 procedures. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 2200 TRANSFORMERS - 1 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ENERGY EFFICIENT TRANSFORMERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Square 2. General Electric — 3. Cutler-Hammer 4. Engineer approved equal. B. Suppliers asking consideration, as an approved equal shall submit complete,warranted — performance data and physical dimensions for similar transformers. Data shall be submitted for each size specified, and shall be received by the consultant engineer no less than 10 days prior to the bid due date for consideration. C. All insulating materials are to exceed NEMA ST20 standards and be rated for 220C UL component recognized insulation system. D. Transformers 15kVA and larger shall be 150C temperature rise above 40C ambient — Transformers 25kVA and larger shall have a minimum of four-2.5%full capacity primary taps. The exact voltages and taps are to be as designated on the drawings or the transformer schedule. E. The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 50C rise above a 40C ambient F. Transformers shall be low loss type with minimum efficiencies per NEMA TP1 when operated at — 35% of full load capacity. Efficiency shall be tested in accord with NEMA TP2. SINGLE PHASE THREE PHASE kVA EFFICIENCY kVA EFFICIENCY 15 97.7% 15 97.0% 25 98.0% 30 97.5% 37.5 98.2% 45 97.7% 50 98.3% 75 98.0% 75 - 98.5% 112.5 98.2% — 100 98.6% 150 98.3% 167 98.7% 225 98.5% 250 98.8% 300 98.6% -- 333 98.9% 500 98.7% 750 98.8% G. Transformer coils shall be of the continuous wound construction and shall be impregnated with non-hygroscopic, thermosetting varnish. H. All cores are to be constructed with low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Magnetic flux — densities are to be kept well below the saturation point to prevent core overheating. Cores for transformers greater than 500 kVA shall be clamped utilizing insulated bolts through the core laminations to ensure proper pressure throughout the length of the core. The completed core and coil shall be bolted to the base of the enclosure but isolated by means of rubber — vibration-absorbing mounts. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact between the core and coil and the enclosure except for a flexible safety ground strap. Sound isolation systems requiring the complete removal of all fastening devices will not be acceptable. E.6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 2200 TRANSFORMERS -2 I. The core of the transformer shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by means of a flexible grounding conductor sized in accordance with applicable UL and NEC standards. J. The transformer enclosures shall be ventilated and be fabricated of heavy gauge, sheet steel construction. The entire enclosure shall be finished utilizing a continuous process consisting of degreasing, cleaning and phosphatizing,followed by electrostatic deposition of polymer polyester powder coating and baking cycle to provide uniform coating of all edges and surfaces. The coating shall be UL recognized for outdoor use. The coating color shall be ANSI 49. K. Sound Levels: 1. 15 to 50KVA-45dB 2. 51 to 150kVA- 50d B 3. 151 to 300kVA-55dB 4. 301 to 500kVA-60dB 5. 501 to 700kVA-62dB 6. 701 to 1000kVA- 64dB L. See transformer schedule on the drawings for additional notes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Set transformer plumb and level, use flexible conduit, under the provisions of Specifi ation Section 26 0533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems. Minimum 2' length for connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure. B. Mount wall mounted transformers using integral flanges or accessory brackets fumis-ied by the manufacturer. C. Mount floor-mounted transformers on vibration isolating pads suitable for isolating thc. transformer noise from the building structure. D. Use accessory brackets or integral flanges for all wall-mounted units. E. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Specification Section 26 0526 -G-ounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. :3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.2. 3,03 ADJUSTING A. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments. B. Check for damage and tighten connections prior to energizing transformer. END OF SECTION E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 2200 TRANSFORMERS -3 SECTION 26 2416 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Branch circuit panelboards. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Specification Section 26 0526- Grounding and Bonding for Electrical System B. Specification Section 26 0553- Identification for Electrical Systems 1.03 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical Contractors Association), B. NEMA AB1 -Molded Case Circuit Breakers, C. NEMA ICS 2- Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies. D. NEMA KS1 -Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards, F. NEMA PB 1.1 -instructions for Safe installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. G. NETA ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equ pment (published by the International Electrical Testing Association). H. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. C. Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements in F roject record documents. D. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies;and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. E. It is the electrical contractors and suppliers responsibility to confirm the appropriate sire and quantity of circuit breakers in the submitted panelboards with the information shown 01 the plan sheets, including the panelboard schedule, and the mechanical contractor prior to releasing the panelboards for construction. 1.05 QUALFFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 2416 PANELBOARDS - 1 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish two of each panelboard key. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D. #NQ and#NF 2. General Electric 3. Cutler-Hammer 4. Engineer approved equal. 8. Description: NEMA PB1,circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard. C. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard. D. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: See schedule on the drawings. E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on or(plug-on) type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers with common trip handle for all poles,listed as type#SWD for lighting circuits, type#HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. Handle ties to make multiple pole breakers are NOT permitted. F. Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with automatically resetting current limiting elements in each pole. interrupting rating 100,000 symmetrical amperes, let through current and energy level less than permitted for same size Class RK-5 fuse. Handle ties to make multiple pole breakers are NOT permitted. G. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1. type#1. H. Cabinet box is to be 6" D x 20"W for 240 volt and less panelboards. I. Cabinet Front: Flush or surface cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. J. Door: Provide hinged door-in-door trim. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and the NECA"Standard of Installation." B. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes. C. Height is to be 6'to top of the panelboard. Install panelboards taller than 6'with bottom no more than 4" above floor. D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 2416 PANELBOARDS -2 F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Specification Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems. G. Ground and bond the panelboard enclosure. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect in accordance with NETA ATS. B. Perform inspections listed in NETA ATS. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder;rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20% of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. END OF SECTION E.6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 2416 PANELBOARDS -3 SECTION 26 2701 UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metering transformer cabinets. B. Meter bases. C. Concrete pad for utility transformer. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Specification Section 26 1300- Distribution Switchgear 1.03 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation National Electrical Contractors Association. B. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System Characteristics: 480Y1277 volts, three phase, four-wire, 60 Hertz. B. Service Entrance:2,000 amps. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide ratings and dimensions of transformer cabinets and meter bases. B. Submit local utility company prepared drawings. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Utility Company: Mid American Energy B. Perform work in accordance with local utility company's written requirements. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.08 PRE-INSTALL ATIONMEETING A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. Review service entran:;e requirements and details with local utility company's representative. 1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the utility company's drawings. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 2701 UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE - 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2,01 METERING TRANSFORMER CABINETS A. Description; Sheet metal cabinet with hinged door, conforming to utility company requirements with provisions for locking and sealing. B. Size: As required by the local utility company. 2.02 METER BASES A. The electrical contractor shall furnish meter base and meter socket with test switch in accordance to utility company requirements. 2.03 CONCRETE PAD FOR UTILITY TRANSFORMER A. Description: Cast in place concrete pad with cable pit sized in accordance to utility requirements. Refer to transformer pad detail for additional information. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Arrange with utility company to obtain permanent electric service to the project. 3.02 UTILITY FEES A. All fees by the utility company are to be included in the base bid by the electrical contractor. 3.03 INSTALLATION A, Install transformer pad and meter base as required by utility company. Provide primary conductor conduit for utility company per their requirements. Verify with utility prior to bidding. END OF SECTION E,fith Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 2701 UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE -2 SECTION 26 2716 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Outdoor Pad-mount Enclosures. B. Terminal blocks, C. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Specification Section 26 0529-Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems B. Specification Section 26 2726-Wiring Devices 1.03 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NEMA 250-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum). C. NEMA ICS 4 -Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. D. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data for enclosures and cabinets. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipJlated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish two of each key. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTDOOR PAD-MOUNT ENCLOSURES A. Model: Hoffman "WeatherPro Outdoor Pad-Mount Enclosure". B. Size box to accomodate wiring and devices as shown on drawings. C. Construction: 14 gauge galvanized steel. NEMA Type 3R, D. Covers: Hinged door with padlock provisions in handle. Provide padlock for each bo), keyed alike. Provide 2 keys to owner. E. Provide interior plywood panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components. Finish with white enamel. F. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard. G. Provide outdoor housekeeping pad when mounted on grade. H, Provide wall mount rack when mounted on wall. E.Sth Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 2716 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES - 1 2.02 TERMINAL BLOCKS A. Terminal Blocks: NEMA ICS 4. B. Power Terminals: Unit construction type with closed back and tubular pressure screw connectors rated 600 volts. C. Signal and Control Terminals:Modular construction type, suitable for channel mounting with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts. D. Provide ground bus terminal block with each connector bonded to enclosure. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Plastic Raceway: Plastic channel with hinged or snaps on cover. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA"Standard of Installation." B. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner. C. Install cabinet fronts plumb. 3.02 CLEANING A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. C. Clean finishes and touch up damage. END OF SECTION E.6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 2716 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES -2 SECTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specification grade receptacles. B. Wall face plates. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Specification Section 26 0533-Raceway and Boxes for Electrical System B. Specification Section 26 0543 - Underfloor Ducts and Raceways for Electrical System C. Specification Section 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices 1.03 REFERENCES A. NECA-Standard of Installation. B. NEMA WD 1 -General Requirements for Wiring Devices, C. NEMA WD 6 - Dimensional Requirements for Wiring Devices. D. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels and markers. B. Samples: Submit two nameplates 4"x 4" in size illustrating materials and engraving quality. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and Limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling,protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors and configurations. B. Submit manufacturers installation instructions. C. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories. Inc., as suitable °'or the purpose specified and indicated. 1.07 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. All equipment specified in this specification shall be manufactured by one of the below listed companies unless specified elsewhere. Model numbers stated in this specification are for basis of design information only. 1. Pass&Seymour 2. Hubbell 3. Cooper E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES - 1 4. Engineer approved equals. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SPECIFICATION GRADE RECEPTACLES A. Duplex Convenience Receptacle-Traditional Style: 1. Basis of Design: Pass &Seymour#5362 2. Ratings: Match branch circuit and load characteristics. Default rating to be 20 amps. 3. Hard use specification grade with back and side wiring. B. GFCI Receptacle: 1. Basis of Design: Pass&Seymour#2094 with LED indicator light. 2. Provide GFCI models where indicated. 3. Ratings:Match branch circuit and toad characteristics. Default rating to be 20 amps. 4. Specification grade duplex GFCI. 5. Provide red devices where powered by a redundant power supply. 2.02 WALL FACE PLATES A. Cover Plate: 1. Basis of Design: Pass &Seymour#SL(Metal), to be confirmed by architect. 2. Provide coverplate for all devices and provide multiple gang plates where required. B. Jumbo Cover Plates: 1. Basis of Design: Pass &Seymour#SLO (Metal)to be confirmed by architect. 2. Provide coverplate for all devices and provide multiple gang plates where required. 3. Provide jumbo plates on masonry rough-in. Verify with architect prior to work being performed. C. Weatherproof Coverplates: 1. NEMA 3R"While-In-Use" weatherproof box and cover. Must meet NEC 2002 requirements for wet location covers. Provide with plate kits as required. Provide multi-gang or deep cover configurations as required for application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SAMPLES A. Upon request, electrical contractor is to provide a sample of any device specified in any available color. 3.02 COLOR A. Devices shall be gray. B. Faceplates shall be stainless steel. 3.03 ROUGH-IN A. All floor device locations shall be located from a scaled drawing provided by the Architect during construction. Locations shown on electrical drawings shall be used for bidding purposes only. 3.04 EXAMINATION A. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. B_ Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. C. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly. D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed,tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. E.6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES -2 E. Verify that openings in access floor are in proper locations. 3.05 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean debris from outlet boxes. 3.06 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. D. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. E. Install wall plates on switch,receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. G. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. H. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas,above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. Provide stainless steel cover plate in finished areas. 1. Install protective rings and split nozzles on active flush cover service fittings. J. The electrical contractor shall verify floor finish and location before ordering floor devices. —' 3.07 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Specification Section 26 0537- Boxes to obtain mounting heights indicated on the drawings. Before roughing in any floor devices the electrical contractor shall obtain a dimensioned drawing signed by the owner showing device locations. B. Install convenience receptacle 18"on center above finished floor. C. install convenience receptacle 8"on center above counter. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.Test with ground loop impedance tester. E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. 3.09 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. E.fith Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES -3 3.11 ELECTRICAL DEVICE SELECTION A. The electrical contractor shall provide five receptacles including wiring, back box, conduit, labor, and all other accessories required to energized each receptacle requested. Receptacle(s)may be added to scope at any time during construction at the architect/owner discretion. END OF SECTION E.6th Street Pump Station 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES 4 Waterloo, IA SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ballasts. B. Lamps. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI C78.379-American National Standard for Electric Lamps—Reflector Lamps -- Classification of Beam Patterns; 1994(R 2003). B. ANSI C82.1 -American National Standard for Lamp Ballast- Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast; 2004. C. ANSI C82.4-American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge R=nd Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type);2002. D. NECA/IESNA 500-Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association; 1998. E. NECA/IESNA 502-Recommended Practice for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems: National Electrical Contractors Association; 1999. F. NEMA WD 6-Wiring Devices- Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manifacturers Association; 2002. G. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005. H. NFPA 101 -Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association; 2003. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide cut sheet indicating dimensions and components for each luminaire. B. Provide ballast schedule for all ballasts used. Include manufacturer's data sheet for each type of ballast. C. Provide lamp schedule for all lamps used. Include manufacturer's data sheet for each type of lamp. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling,protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. E. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each product. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the pu pose specified and indicated. E. i6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING - 1 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and 101 B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BALLASTS A. T8 Fluorescent Ballast: 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Optanium b. OsramlSylvania c. Universal Lighting Technologies d. General Electric e. Engineer approved equal. 2. Ballast shall be"instant start". 3. "Instant start"ballast shall provide Independent Lamp Operation(ILO)for allowing remaining lamp(s)to maintain full light output when one or more lamp fails. 4. Ballast shall contain auto re-start circuitry in order to re-start lamps without re-setting power. 5. Ballast shall operate from 50I60 Hz input source of 120V through 277V with sustained variations of+1-10%(voltage and frequency)with no damage to the ballast. 6. Ballast shall be high frequency electronic type and operate at a frequency above 42 kHz through 52 kHz to minimize interference with infrared control systems and eliminate visible flicker. 7. Ballast shall have a power factor greater than 0.98 for primary lamp. 8. Ballast shall have a minimum ballast factor for primary lamp application as follows: a. 0.87 or 0.88 for normal light output. 9. Ballast shall provide for a lamp current crest factor of 1,7 or less in accordance with lamp manufacturer recommendations. 10. Ballast input current shall have Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)of less than 10%when operated at nominal line voltage with primary lamp. 11. Ballast shall have a Class A sound rating for all 4'lamps and smaller. 12. Ballast shall have a minimum starting temperature of-20 deg F or 0 deg F for standard T8 lamps and 60 deg F for energy-savings T8 lamps. 13. Ballast shall tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions without damage. 14. Ballast shall contain an anti-striations circuitry to prevent striations on energy-savings lamps. 15. The electronic ballast shall carry a five-year warranty from the date of manufacture against defects in material or workmanship, including replacement for operation at a maximum case temperature of 70 deg C. Ballasts with a 90 deg C designation in their catalog number shall also carry a three-year warranty at a maximum case temperature of 90 deg C. 2.02 LAMPS A. High Intensity Discharge(HID)Lamps: 1. Mogul and Medium Base Lamps: a. Manufacturers: 1) Venture Uni-Form 2) General Electric 3) Philips 4) OsramlSylvania 5) Ushio E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING -2 6) Engineer approved equal. b. Refer to fixture schedule on the drawings for details. c. Lamps shall be of"clear" type unless stated otherwise on fixture schedule. d. Coordinate tamp and ballast compatibility during submittal process. e. Lamps shall have a color rendering index of 65. f. Lamps shall have protective shroud for open rating for UV protection. g. Lamps shall maintain a color of+/- 100 deg Kelvin throughout lifetime. h. Maximum warm-up time shall be 2-3 minutes. i. Maximum re-strike time shall be 5-8 minutes. j. Lamps over 300W shall have 20,000 hour lamp life. k. Lamps less than 300W shall have 15,000 hour lamp life in vertical position, and 12,000 hour lamp life in horizontal position. B. T8 Linear Fluorescent Lamps: 1. Manufacturers: a. Philips Alto b. General Electric c. OsramlSylvania d. Ushio e. Engineer approved equal. 2. Lamps shall have a rated average life of 20,000 hours(based on 3-hour starts). 3. Lamps shall have a color rendering index of 85. 4. Lamps are to be TCLP compliant—low mercury level. 5. All fluorescent lamps shall be by same manufacturer, 6. Lamp color shall be 4100K PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Furnish products as specified in schedule on the drawings. C. Install ballasts, lamps, and specified accessories at factory. D. Install suspended luminaires and exit signs using pendants supported from swivel har-gers. Provide pendant length required suspending luminaire at indicated height. E. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling drawing and electrical lighting drawings. F. install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building tines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. G. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. H. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and fire stopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. I. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place. J. Install recessed can luminaires to fit in ceiling. Provide all necessary trim ring extenders or other accessories for proper installation of luminaire in ceiling. K. Install wall mounted luminaires.emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as scheduled. L. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. M. Connect all luminaires,emergency lighting units, and exit signs using fixture whips. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING -3 N. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. O. Bond products and metal accessories to the branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. P. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit,exit sign,and luminaire. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Aim and adjust luminaires as directed. B. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean all electrical parts to remove all of the conductive and deleterious materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Re-lamp all failed lamp luminaires that have failed lamps within 6 months after the substantial complete date. 3.06 SCHEDULES A. See the drawings. END OF SECTION E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING -4 SECTION 26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART I GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Luminaries and accessories. B. Fluorescent ballasts, C. Lamps. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI C78.379- Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High-Intensity Discharge Retiec:or Lamps - Classification of Beam Patterns. B. ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps-Specifications. C. ANSI C82.4-Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type). D. ANSI 05.1 - Specifications and Dimensions for Wood Poles. E. IES RP-8- Recommended Practice for Roadway Lighting. F. IES RP-20- Lighting for Parking Facilities. G. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not r: standard product of the manufacturer. B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data. C. Test Reports: Indicate measured illumination levels. D. Submit manufacturers installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product. E. Provide maintenance data for each luminaire. '1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three-years experience. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING - 1 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store and handle solid wood poles in accordance with ANSI 05.1. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Furnish bolt templates and pole mounting accessories to installer of pole foundations. 1.08 EXTRA PRODUCTS A. Furnish two of each type and wattage lamp installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES A. See schedule on drawings. 2.02 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A. Description: ANSI C82.1, high power factor type electromagnetic ballast. B. Provide low-temperature ballast suitable for lamps specified. C. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage. D. Source Quality Control: Certify ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc. 2.03 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE(HID) BALLAST A. See Specification Section 26 5100 Interior Lighting. 2.04 LAMPS A. See Specification Section 26 510D Interior Lighting PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install lamps in each luminaire. B. Bond luminaires metal accessories and metal poles to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and operation. B. Measure illumination levels to verify conformance with performance requirements. C. Take measurements during night sky without moon or with heavy overcast clouds effectively obscuring moon. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean all electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Clean finishes and touch up damage. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING -2 3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Re-lamp all luminaires that have failed lamps. This inventory shall take place within 6 months of substantial completion. END OF SECTION E. 65th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING -3 SECTION 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical controls and instruments. B. Pump control panels. C. Backup control system. D. Cellular alarm monitoring system. E. High ambient adjustable frequency drive system. F. Pump protection devices. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The pump supplier shall be responsible for providing the motor control center, pumj control panel, motor starters, variable frequency drives, sensors, and pump controls. B. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for wiring all power and control cables provided by the pump supplier. C. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for all building wire associated with the pump supplier's equipment. D. The pump supplier shall be responsible for the startup and commissioning of the pumps, pump controls, and sensors. 1.03 GUARANTEE A. The manufacturer of the control panel shall furnish a limited warranty for 18 months from the date of shipment or 12 months from start-up (whichever occurs first), that all equipment shall be free from defects in design, materials and workmanship. The manufacturer shall furnish replacement parts for any component proven defective, whether of his or other manufacturer during the warranty period,excepting only those items which are normally consumed in service, such as(but not limited to), light bulbs,oil, grease, packing, etc. '1.04 WORKMANSHIP AND EXPERIENCE A. All workmanship and materials throughout shall be of the highest quality. The controls shall be the product of a supplier who has been actively engaged in research, development and has supplied proven field installations of complete sewage pumping systems for not less than five (5)years, A list of ten (10)separate sewage pumping systems shall be provided on request. 1.05 CALIBRATION,ADJUSTMENT AND TESTING A. Devices requiring field calibration shall be calibrated in presence of Owner's represent itive and documented. 1.06 INSTALLATION AND START-Up A. Supplier shall provide skilled programmer/instrumentation engineer or technician who shall complete troubleshooting and start-up to place entire system into satisfactory operation; engineer or technician shall make necessary inspection of completed installation, make necessary final field adjustments and make program revisions as required for start-up. Demonstrate proper operation of all system features and functions to Owner and Engir ear. Coordinate installation and start-up scheduling with Owner and Engineer. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS -1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION A. In accordance with the plans and specifications, provide a complete working control system including all required equipment, accessories,wiring and adjusting as indicated in the project specifications, on the project plan, and installed in accordance with applicable National,State and Local Codes. B. Al! electrical controls including adjustable frequency drives and pump control panel shall be furnished by the pump supplier to provide a single source of responsibility C. Ali materials used and work performed under this section shall comply with rules and regulations of the latest edition of the State Electrical Code and local ordinances. D. As specified elsewhere within this Division and in accord with the Contract Documents,shop drawings and materials lists shall be submitted for equipment listed under this section. E. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to protect and maintain all materials and work furnished and installed under this section until acceptance. F. The base bid pump controls manufacturer shall be Stamet Technologies, Inc. or pre-approved equal. Alternate manufacturers desiring pre-approval shall submit complete drawings and data showing compliance with all specification requirements at least three weeks prior to bid date. Manufacturers pre-approved as equal will be listed by addendum prior to bid date. 2.02 PUMP CONTROL PANEL(PCP) A. Furnish and install a completely prewired automatic control panel for pump control and alarming. PCP shall be UL listed for use with circuits from Class 1, Division 1 hazardous locations. PCP shall be labeled per latest NEC and UL requirements regarding SCCR. Supplier shall provide short-circuit calculations stamped by a licensed Professional Engineer proving that the SSCR rating provided is adequate for the intended purpose. B. Devices included in the PCP shall include but not be limited to: 1, New primary control PLC. This PLC shall consist of an Allen-Bradley Compact Logix PLC including base unit,processor, real-time clock, I/O cards,expansion I/O cables adequate for all connected I/O plus 10% minimum spares for each 110 type. 2. Separate circuit breakers for primary and backup controls. 3. IVSS surge protection 4. Phoenix-Contact miniature relays for isolation of all discrete inputs and outputs. 5. Phoenix-Contact isolators for all analog inputs and outputs. 6. Labeled interconnection and field wiring terminal strips. 7. ISR relays and IS isolators for all float and transducer connections. 8. Backup Pump Controller PLC, Separate and independent of primary PLC with LCDIDisplay, Keypad,and Time Clock with expansion 110 cards as required. 9. DC UPS system wired to backup primary controller and wet well level transducer, and related devices. 10. Omni-Site Cellular Alarm Dialer- antenna to be remote mounted exterior to the building. C. Front of PCP shall include but not be limited to; 1. New primary control touchscreen. This touchscreen shall consist of an Allen-Bradley Panelview Plus 12"TFT with 64K Ram and 64K Flash Memory or C-H Pane!mate equivalent. 2. On/Off/Auto switch for each pump. 3. Reset Pushbutton for each pump. 4_ Run and Fail Indicators for each pump. 5. Elapsed time meter for each pump. E.6th Street Pump Station 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS -2 Waterloo, IA 6. Level Alarm Reset pushbutton 7. Backup Mode On/Off/Auto selector switch 8. Backup Active Indicator 9. Backup Mode Reset Pushbutton 10. High Alarm Indicator for wet well 11. Low Alarm Indicator for wet well D. The PCP/MCC shall be factory tested together and these tests shall be witnessed t y the owner prior to shipment. E. Field Devices to be connected to the new control system shall include but not be limited to: 1. Submersible Transducer 2. Suspended 10-point liquid level probe 3. All other floats, transducers, limit switches, beacons, horns, entry alarm switches and other devices as shown on the plans. F. The pump level control/alarm system shall be connected to the level sensors throug•m intrinsically safe module or relays. G. Control panel terminal blocks shall be provided and labeled to interface with audible alarm, external visual alarm, flasher for visual alarm, power monitor, pump monitors, and p.amp motor starters. H. All legend plates/name plates and equipment designations shall be engraved type. 1. Alf terminal blocks shall be identified by both number and graphic symbols, which clearly indicate the purpose of each terminal block. J. The control system shall provide total automatic control for the three storm water pun ps and one jockey pump. K. Programming and Sequence of Operations: The pumps shall be controlled as descr ced below: 1. The wet well shall be monitored by a submersible transducer installed in a stilling pipe, and a cable suspended 10-position level probe. 2. Each pump shall have a hand-off--auto selector switch. 3. A means shall be provided to simulate activation of the control points and alarms at the pump control panel. 4. The pump controller shall provide fully automated pump control despite failure in an individual pump, or manual selection of an OFF status. Alternation shall continue in the programmed sequence with the next pump in sequence replacing the failed or of pump. 5. After power failure, delay shall precede the sequential start of the pump cycle with no two (2)pumps starting within 30 seconds of each other. 6. Pump Alternation Capability: The control system shall have the ability to automa,'tally alternate pump outputs or select a fixed lead-lag pattern to accommodate user requirements. The system shall be field programmable to allocate pumps into separate groups and thereby select alternation patterns between groups of pumps. Any group of pumps can be set to alternate automatically or operate in a fixed lead arrangement, The control system shall be capable of alternating some or all of the pumps. 7. Time Delay Functions: The control system shall provide the following time delay functions for pump activation and deactivation: 8. Pump Start and Stop: The control system shall provide programmable activation and deactivation delays that are selectable from the touchscren, These delay settings can be used for pump starting and stopping in a user selected arrangement. 9. Interpump Delays: A programmable interpump delay shall be provided for non-coincidental starting or stopping of pumps which will allow for a smooth transition of pump activation and deactivation without harmful cycling. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS -3 10. Maximum Pump Off Time: The control system shall be capable of automatically activating a pump if a programmable maximum pump off time is reached. This function will allow a mm pump to be exercised for maintenance or other reasons. If a pump is activated using maximum off lime, the pump will run as long as there is sufficient liquid level to allow for pump activation. When the liquid level reaches the off point, the pump will be deactivated. 11. Maximum Pump On Time: The control unit shall be capable of turning a pump off when it is running and thereby force the running cycle to sequence between other pumps if desired. This function is useful in applications where there is not sufficient level change to cycle multiple pumps properly. L. Touchscreen Functions: A user friendly graphical interface shall be provided on the touchscreen allowing changing of setpoints, viewing all statuses and alarms, event logs, and trends. Touchscreen indicators shall include but not be limited to: 1. Pump running 2. Pump is in the HAND position. 3. Pump is in the OFF position. 4. Pump is in the AUTOMATIC position 5. Pump is available to run 6, Pump fault(Auto Reset) 7_ Pump lockout(Manual Reset) 8. Motor overtemp (thermal)fault 9. Motor seal failure fault 10. Pump alternation active indicator 11. Alternation sequence indicator 12. Miscellaneous programming indicators 13. Status Event Log 14, Alarm Event Log 15. Level Trends 16. Pump Run Trends 17. Pump Start/Stop Setpoints: The pump activation and deactivation points for each pump shall be user selectable from the touchscreen. 18. Pump Alternation: All lead select and pump alternation settings shall be programmable from the touchscreen. 19_ Security Functions: The control system shall provide security access to setpoint and control functions. 20. Pump Monitoring Functions:The PLC system shall communicate with pump MAS units via isolate RS485 Modbus RTU protocol. The system shall monitor and display the following signals from each Storm Water Pump MAS Unit: a. Three (3)thermal switches embedded in the stator windings b. One(1) RID sensor in the stator windings c. One(1) RTD sensor on the pump main bearing d. One(1) moisture leakage sensor in pump stator housing e. One(1) moisture leakage sensor in pump connection housing f. One(1) temperature sensor in pump connection housing g_ Monitoring of pump current in one(1) phase 2.03 BACK UP CONTROL SYSTEM A. Furnish and install a completely automatic backup control system, The backup control system shall be provided integral section to the PCP with all interconnections factory wired and tested. Backup system shall be UL listed for use with circuits from Class 1, Division 1 hazardous locations. B. Devices included in the backup system shall include but not be limited to: E_6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS -4 1. Backup controller. 2. Liquid level probe. 3. Intrinsic safe barrier. 4. Level indicator. 5. Primary/Backup/Auto selector switch. 6. Power on indicator. 7. Output indicators. 8. High level alarm indicator. C. The backup controller shall consist of a microPLC wired independently of the main avel control system. The controller shall include: 1. Alternation. 2. Lag pump time delays. 3. Variable speed control based on multiple discrete level inputs. D. The Liquid Level Probe shalt be a Conductive Level Sensing Device(Probe)designiA to detect conductive liquid level in tanks or sumps and interface with an electronic pump controller for control and management in multiple pump applications. Prove shall include the folic.ving features: 1. The level sensing probe shall be constructed from uPVC 32mm tubing with molded sensor units at regular intervals along the length of the probe. Each sensor unit assembly will contain two Avesta SM0254 stainless steel sensors mounted opposite to each other within the sensor unit assembly. Each Avesta sensor will be 24mm long and 2mm wide. Each sensor unit assembly will be PVC injected to seal the unit and prevent any moissure from entering the sensor assembly. Each sensor unit assembly shall have a metallic electrical connection tab protruding out from the sealed sensor unit to allow for conductor connections. 2. Each sensor unit shall be individually connected to a numbered, PVC insulated .75mm conductor which is part of a multi-conductor cable entering the level sensing probe. Each sensor unit containing two Avesta sensors on a multi-sensor probe will be rotated 90 degrees horizontally from the previous sensor along the probe length to eliminate tracking between sensors. The level sensing probe shall be pressure injected with an epoxy resin at final assembly to encapsulate all internal components and connections, thereby creating a rigid, sealed, homogeneous unit. 3. The flexible cable used for the Level Sensing Probe shall be comprised of PVC/PVC multi-conductor construction with a common over-sheath that is water and oil resistant. The mufti-conductor cable will be identified with numbering and text along the entire length of the outer sheath at required intervals. Individual conductors of the multi-conductor cable shall be numbered and colored light blue for easy identification and connection to the pump controls. The cable shall be secured to the top of the probe body by a synthetic rubber compression fitting for strain relief. The flexible cable shall be rated to physically support the combined weight of the level sensing probe and any suspended cable connected to the probe. 4. The probe shall be located in either a turbulent(preferred)or non-turbulent area o'a tank or sump, suspended on it's own cable and connected to a 6mm stainless steel hook. The stainless steel hook(provided as part of a mounting kit)would hang from a 30mm stainless steel angle bracket assembly. The angle bracket assembly shall be mounted at the entrance to the tank or sump with and approved anchoring method. The angle bracket assembly shall contain a polyurethane squeegee pad that has a 30mm hole and slot for the purpose of cleaning the level sensing probe at desired maintenance intervals. E. The Intrinsic Safe Barrier(Multitrode MTISB-10)shall be designed for use with the Liquid Level Probe and shall include the following features: 1. The intrinsically safe barrier shall provide 10 channels. 2. The device shall be panel mounted and designed to protect a multi-sensored conductive E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS - 5 probe. The barrier shall be certified intrinsically safe for use with Multitrode equipment in installations up to and including Class 1 Zone O.The intrinsically safe barrier shall have screw terminals for wire connections. 3. The intrinsically safe barrier shall be protected and current limited according to the requirements of UL Class I(Groups A, B,C&D), Class II (Groups E, F,&G)and Class Ill certification.The intrinsically safe barrier shall allow for a maximum short circuit current of 10 ma. F. The Level Indicator(Multitrode MTIC)shall be designed for use with the Liquid Level Probe and shall include the following features: 1. Ten-segment level indication. 2. 10 programmable NIO or NIC outputs. 3. Visual indication of set points. 4. Four sensitivities. 5. Four activation delays. 6. 4-20mA and 0-10V DC outputs. 7. Panel mounted. 8. Power On indication. G. The backup system shall provide back up as required when primary level control Malfunctions. H. The backup level controller shall be locked in until manually re-set. An alarm contact shall also be provided indicating back-up system is in operation. I. The backup controller shall use the ten discrete sensor levels to provide variable speed operation with multiple fixed preset speeds. 2.04 CELLULAR ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM A. Provide a cellular alarm monitoring system integral to the PCP for storm water station monitoring and analysis.The complete system provides the following standard calculations,presented in a user-friendly graphical format,to be overlayed onto the client's existing, private web-pages.The bid package price will include two years of prepaid cellular service in the bid price that includes the following storm water station daily reports and alarm notifications. B. Features of the alarm system shall include: 1. Indication of Cellular signal strength 2. Alarm notification using e-mail, pager, or voice call 3. Historical log showing all alarm history 4. Web-based graphs of historical data that can also be exported to Microsoft Word or Excel programs 5. Crew on-site notification intelligent key reader 6. Can be completely,programmed,setup viewed, monitored,adjusted from anywhere in the world using a web browser and appropriate password. 7. Upon Alarm condition:facilitates the compilation and transmission of alarm information to commercially available voice pagers. B. Upon Alarm condition:facilitate the compilation and transmission of alarm information over standard telephone tines to residential or commercial sites,or cellular phones, provide for verbalization of alarm information and allow for the password secured remote acknowledgment of such alarms. 9. Allows for Voice Dial-in Connection via telephone line to facilitate the Acknowledgment of active alarms. 10. Allows for Voice Dial-in Connection via telephone line to facilitate the inquiry of and the alteration of values of digital tags. 11. Both Voice Dial-in and Voice Dial-out access modes shall be protected by mandatory redundant password entry system. 12. Supplies the ability of text-to-speech conversion of typed-in alarm messages so that sound E.6th Street Pump Station 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS -6 Waterloo, IA files do not have to be manually recorded. This saves much time and programming complexity. Systems that do not employ advanced text-to-speech conversion will not be considered. 13. Allows for the configuration and maintenance of a set of"global"voice data files used in the construction of voice output messages. 14. Allows for the creation and maintenance of a"phone book" of destinations for alarm transmissions. The quantity of eligibility entries in the phone book shall be unlimited. 15. Allows for selection of recipient list for alarm transmissions along with recipient priority determination. 16. Allows for creation of user configurable delays prior to commencement of alarm transmissions. 17_ Allows for user selection of"single pass"or"continuous loop"modes through 'ecipient list until alarms are acknowledged. 18. Allows for user enable/disable of: data logging to disk file, automatic acknowledgment upon return to normal of alarm condition,mandatory user acknowledgment of alarms, 19. Provides Digital Alarm handling and allows a textual description field and voice verbalization files for each Digital Alarm. Standard alarm acknowledgment requires personal involvement. Each alarm can be selected to "acknowledge upon return to normal state", or allow for automatic acknowledgment of any alarm generated 20. Capable of displaying on screen,current alarm status and alarm history status of a minimum of 65.000 simultaneous alarm tags. 21. Allows for manual transmission of user entered alphanumeric or numeric pages by selection of destination from the phone book and message entry. 22. Shall be capable of maintaining a group by group activity log which may capture: Any alarms that may occur (along with user configurable time and date stamp), any return to normal transactions, any alphanumeric or numeric pages, any voice dial-outs, and any voice-dial-ins (including who has accessed the system and who has acknowledged alarms). C. The following I/O shall be pre-wired and configured: 1, Power Failure. Power Restore 2. Low battery alarm 3, Wet Well HWL Alarm Transducer 4. Wet Well HWL Float Switch 5, Building Intrusion alarm 6. Pump#1 Warning 7. Pump#2 Warning 8. Pump#3 Warning 9. Pump#1 Alarm 10. Pump#2 Alarm 11. Pump#3 Alarm 12. Pump#1 Run 13. Pump#2 Run 14. Pump#3 Run 15. Jockey Pump-Seal Failure 16. Jockey Pump-Over Temp 17. Jockey Pump-Run 18. Backup Control Mode ACTIVE D. The controller shall accept universal DI configurable to monitor dry contacts or any voltage range between 12VDCNAC to 120 VACNDC or to act as pulse counters, rain gauge input, and crew on-site intelligent key reader input in its base form. It shall have Phoenix type removable terminal blocks. E. The alarm unit shall include the following devices: E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 9000 PUMP STATION CON-ROLS -7 1. Gel!Cell Battery: On-board 12VDC,800mAH gell cell battery provides backup for up to 24 hours in the event of power loss. Battery is automatically recharged using temperature compensated floating battery charging circuit. 2. LCD display: (16 character X 2 line)Liquid Crystal display is viewable in very bright sunlight or total darkness or very high or low temperatures. This high visibility operator display is used to configure and monitor variables and eliminates the need for programming devices such as laptop computers. Includes built-in screen saver that continuously scrolls values of all inputs and calculations for easy viewing 3. SD Memory card slot:Trend log data from connected variables can be stored on the memory stick for later retrieval. Memory stick used for updates to the RTU operating system eliminating the need for field laptop computers to repair operating program errors. 4. Intelligent key reader: Intelligent key reader identifies operator on site and logs who visited site, took equipment out of service, etc. Keys can be reprogrammed by the RTU key reader on site, eliminating the need to contact the factory for key re-programming. One RTU key included with each RTU. F. A regulated 12 VDC power supply shall be provided for the radios and other monitoring system — components as required. The power supply shall include a terminal block for incoming AC, output DC and ground connections. The power supply shall be powered from a 120 VAC and include tapered charge type battery charging circuitry to maximize battery life. The power supply shall be rated at minimum of 2.0A @ 12 VDC. G. The power supply system shall include(1) 12 Volt battery sized to allow for 24 hours continued system operation during a power outage. H. The Systems supplier shall be responsible for installation, set-up, adjustment and tuning of the antenna to provide optimal communications for the system. I. The antenna installation shall be external to the enclosure and shall be outdoors. J. The systems supplier shall utilize the built-in Radio Frequency signal meter during antenna installation to ensure that the antenna is installed for optimum signal reception. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS -8 2.05 HIGH AMBIENT ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS(AFDS) A. For each pump provide a completely prewired adjustable frequency drive system designed to operate in an ambient room temperature of 45 Degree C (113 Degree Fahrenheit). All of the internal components within each AFDS enclosure shall be designed for operation up to 50 Deg C. and the enclosure ventilation shall be adequate to assure that ambient within the enclosure does not rise more than 5 Deg C above ambient room temperature under full load conditions. Each AFD System shall be UL508A listed. Each AFDS shall be labeled per latest NEC and UL requirements regarding SCCR. Supplier shall provide short-circuit calculations stamped by a licensed Professional Engineer proving that the SSCR rating is adequate for the intended purpose. B. Minimum Specification for the AFDS's shall be: 1. Voltage:480 Volt 3-Phase 2. Output Current: Pump FLA Continuous 3. Ambient Temperature Rating:45 Deg C Minimum-NOTE THAT 40 DEG C RATED ENCLOSED DRIVE SYSTEMS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED. Manufacturer must provide engineering data and calculations demonstrating that the internal cabinet temperature will not rise more than 5 Deg C above room temperature. 4. Harmonics:5%Maximum Current Harmonics. AFDS manufacturer shall provide calculations demonstrating that the drives will meet this requirement. Additionally, supplier must test and demonstrate that this requirement is met at startup by use of a calibrated digital oscilloscope equipped for harmonic analysis. 5. Ventilation: Forced air ventilation fans shall be top mounted on the AFDS cabinets so as to direct heat upward and minimize arc-flash hazard. C. Devices included in each AFDS shall include but not be limited to: 1. Harmonic Filter- Passive type including thermally protected reactors and contactor staged capacitors controlled to prevent leading power factor when AFDS is operating at reduced speed. Filter must be rated 50 Degree C at full load conditions. 2. Chassis mounted High Ambient Adjustable Frequency Drive suitable for 50 Degree C operation at full load. 3. Load Reactor-5%for motor dV/dT protection, sized properly to allow operation at 50 Deg C temperature. —' 4. MAS Unit with power supply and RS485 Isolator 5. Top mounted ventilation fans 6. Labeled interconnection and field wiring terminal strips. D. Front of each AFDS shall include but not be limited to: 1. AFD Keypad 2. Power On Indicator 3. MAS Unit Keypad 4. System Ready Indicator E. Chassis Mounted Drive used in AFDS shall comply with the following: 1. IEEE 519-1992:Guide for harmonic content and control 2. Underwriters Laboratories(UL508C:Power Conversion Equipment) 3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 4. ICS 7.0:Industrial Controls&Systems for AFD. 5. IEC 61800-2 and-3. EN 50082-1 and-2 6. The AFD shall be rated for 480 VAC.The AFD shall provide microprocessor-based control for three-phase induction motors. The controller's full load output current rating shall be based on 50°C ambient and 2 kHz switching frequency. 7. The AFD shall be of the Pulse Width Modulated(PWM) design converting the utility input voltage and frequency to a variable voltage and frequency output via a two-step operation. E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS -9 Adjustable Current Source AFD are not acceptable. Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBT's) shall be used in the inverter section. Bipolar Junction Transistors, GTO's or SCR's are not acceptable.The AFD shall run at the above listed switching frequency. 8. The AFD shall have efficiency at full load and speed that exceeds 97%. 9. The AFD shall have an integral EMI/RFI filter as standard. 10. The system containing the AFD shall comply with the 5%level of total harmonic distortion of line voltage and the line current limits as defined in IEEE 519-1992. 11. Incoming Power:Three-phase,480 Vac(+10%to-15%)and 50/60 Hz(+/-5 Hz)power to a fixed potential DC bus level. 12. Frequency stability of+/-0.05%for 24 hours with voltage regulation of+/-1% of maximum rated output voltage. 13. Speed regulation of+/-0.5%of base speed. 14. Insensitive to input line rotation. 15. Humidity: 0 to 95% (non-condensing and non-corrosive). 16. Altitude: 0 to 3,300 feet(1000 meters)above sea level. 17. Ambient Temperature: -10 to 50°C Storage 2.06 PUMP PROTECTION DEVICES A. For each pump provide a protective monitoring/status device as described below. Protective devices shall be a product of the pump manufacturer and shall be installed/wired integral to the AFDS for each pump. B. Jockey pump AFDS shall include a Flygt MInICAS solid state device that provides a signal to the pump mounted moisture and thermal sensors shall measure the moisture and thermal characteristics of the motor and provide an indication of an out of tolerance condition. Upon an over-temperature condition the unit mounted LED and inner door mounted pilot light will illuminate and the motor shall shut down. When the temperature reaches an acceptable level T the pump shall automatically re-start. Upon seal failure condition the pump will continue to run and the unit mounted LED and inner door mounted pilot light will illuminate. C. Each storm water pump AFDS shall include a MAS,(Monitoring and Status) module. The MAS shall be a two-piece product including the base module and an operator panel. MAS units shall comply with the following: 1. Protect the pump in case of failure,transmit warnings and alarms to operations personnel, and record pump operating data for historical recordkeeping. 2. The monitoring system shall consist of a base unit,operator interface and pump memory module. As an option, a power analyzer shall also be available. 3. The base unit shall contain a microprocessor and 2 Mbytes of memory storage for recording of pump historical data. The base unit shall contain embedded web pages accessible via Microsoft Internet Explorer and have capability to connect to operator computer directly or via modem,radio or LAN. The base unit shall also have provision to communicate to higher level control system via MODBUS RS-485 network. All sensors located in the pump shall connect to the base unit and shall include, as a minimum: a. Three (3)thermal switches embedded in the stator windings b. One(1) RTD sensor in the stator windings c. One(1) RTD sensor on the pump main bearing d. One(1) moisture leakage sensor in pump stator housing e. One(1) moisture leakage sensor in pump connection housing f. One(1)temperature sensor in pump connection housing g. Monitoring of pump current in one(1) phase 4. The base unit shall provide the ability to adjust trip points of each value sensed,and to designate specific alarm actions: either provides warning or shutdown pump. The base unit shall include three(3) relay contacts to provide annunciation of warning(NO/NC), annunciation of alarm (NO/NC), and to shutdown the pump(NC). E.6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS - 10 5. The operator interface shall include a two-line LCD backlit display, along with user friendly keypad and 2 LED display lights. Pump sensor data shall be viewable and parameters shall be adjustable via keypad and display. LED display lights shall indicate presence of warnings and/or alarms. A reset button shall also be included on the operator interface. 8. The pump memory module shall be located in the pump connection housing. The module shall be epoxy potted to provide proof against submergence. The memory muduie shall contain the pump data pate information as well as record pump starts and hours run. Pump sensor data shall be stored on memory module as histogram along with an operator-writable service history log. The pump memory module shall include onboard temperature measurement. 7. The pump monitoring system shall be capable of providing historical data of p.mp sensor information and present it in trend-chart format with minimum resolution of one (1)second. Operator shall be able to select individual or group of sensor inputs to view simultaneously. Sensor information shall be stored in memory as histogram data. Upon alarm condition,sensor data shall be preserved as an alarm log plot at one(1) second resolution, indicating pump conditions nine(9) minutes prior to, and one (1) mi-'ute following alarm event. Up to seven of the most recent alarm log plots shall be stored. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MOTOR CONTROL A. The pump supplier shall be responsible for ordering the motor control center, pump control panel, motor starters, variable frequency drives, sensors, and pump controls. B. The pump supplier shall coordinate the delivery of the motor control center, pump control panel, motor starters, variable frequency drives with the electrical contractor. C. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for the protection, installation, and wiring of the motor control center, pump control panel, motor starters, variable frequency drives. D. The electrical contractor shall install the sensors and control wiring at the direction of the pump supplier. E. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for the wiring of the motor control center, pump control panel, motor starters, variable frequency drives.The pump supplier shall furnish the watertight power and control cables for the pumps and sensors; the electrical contractor shall be responsible for terminating these cables. F. The pump supplier shall be responsible for the startup and commissioning of the pumps, pump controls, and sensors, END OF SECTION E. 6th Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS - 11 FORM OF CONTRACT CONTRACT FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF F.Y. 2010 SIXTH ST. STORM PUMP STATION IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA CONTRACT NO. 716 This contract made and entered into this day of 20 . __, by and between the City of Waterloo, Iowa, a Municipal Corporation, (hereinafter referred to as City), and of Waterloo, Iowa, �hereinafter referred to as Contractor), WtTNESSETH: PAR. T Contractor agrees to build and construct the F.Y. 2010 E. Sixth St. Storm Pump Station Improvements, City of Waterloo Contract No. 716 and furnish all necessary tools, equipment, materials, and labor necessary to do all the work called for in the plans and specifications in a workmanshiplike manner and for the prices set forth in Contractor's proposal, which was accepted by the City, and which is understood and agreed to be a part of this contract. PAR. 2 It is understood and agreed that the resolution adopted by the City Council ordering the construction of the improvement, the Notice to Contractors as published, the Instruction to Bidders, the Form of Proposal, the Construction and Maintenance Bonds, the Council Proceedings relating to this matter, and the Plans and Specifications shall all be considered as forming a part of the contract the same as though they were each set out in said contract. PAR. 3 The Contractor agrees to furnish at its own cost and expense, all necessary materials and labor for said work and to construct said improvements in a thorough, substantial, and workmanlike manner, and in strict accordance with the requirements of this contract, and of the plans and specifications made a part hereof by reference, and to the satisfaction and approval of the City and its engineer. FORM OF CONTRACT PAGE 1 OF 5 PAGES PAR. 4 The Contractor agrees to perform said work and install said improvements on the terms set out in bid or proposal to the City which has been accepted by the City and which is by reference made a part of this contract. PAR. 5 The Contractor agrees to commence said work within ten (10)working days after receipt of "Notice to Proceed" and complete it as specified in the Notice of Public Hearing and Notice to Bidders on or before unless an extension of time is granted in writing by the Council of the City. PAR. 6 Should the Contractor fail to complete said improvements in strict accordance with the terms and conditions of this contract, or the plans and specifications therefor promptly by the date herein specified, the City may pay such additional sums as it may be required to pay by reason of the failure of said contractor and deduct any and all such sums from any amount then due the Contractor. PAR. 7 The Contractor agrees to comply with and obey all ordinances of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, relating to the obstruction of streets and alleys, keeping open passage ways for water, traffic, and protecting any excavations in any street or alley, and maintaining proper and sufficient barricades with lights and signals during all hours of darkness, to see that the back-filling is properly done, and agrees to keep the City whole and defend any and all suits that may be brought against the City by reason of any injuries that may be sustained by any person or property allegedly caused by the Contractor, or his agents, while work is done pursuant to this agreement. PAR. 8 The Contractor agrees that in the event a law suit is brought against the City for damages allegedly sustained by reason of any act, omission or negligence of the Contractor or its agents, or on account of any injuries allegedly sustained by reason of any obstruction, hole, depression or barrier placed or dug by the defendant or its agents, in the doing of the work herein contracted for, that it will defend said suit and save the City and the Engineer harmless therein, and in case judgment is rendered against the City or the Engineer, the Contractor agrees to pay the same promptly. The Contractor agrees to carry public liability insurance in a solvent company in a sufficient amount to protect the City and the Engineer and those who use the streets, trails and public property of the City. PAR. 9 The City shall have the right to appoint one or more construction reviewers who shall review the progress of the work in detail; also, to make any test or any material to be used in such work. No material shall be used in any work until the same has first been approved by the construction reviewer. Such construction reviewer shall have full authority to pass judgment upon all materials and upon the manner of doing the work, and their judgment on rejecting any materials, substance, or manner of work shall be final unless it is revoked or modified by the City Engineer. FORM OF CONTRACT PAGE 2 OF 5 PAGES PAR. 10 Any material which has been rejected by the construction reviewer shall be at once removed from the line of work and shall not be again taken thereon or placed with the material proposed to be used without the written consent of the City Engineer. PAR. 11 The Contractor shall maintain no cause of action against the City on account of delays and prosecution of work, but if said work is delayed by the City, the Contractor shall have such extra time for completion of the job as was lost by reason of the delay caused by the City. PAR. 12 The Contractor agrees to pay punctually all just claims cf labor, material, men, or subcontractors who shall perform labor or furnish materials entering into this improvement. It is agreed that the City need not pay the Contractor until all such claims are paid by the Contractor It is agreed that the City shall not be liable for said labor, material, or men under this contract. PAR. 13 The Contractor agrees to furnish the City, simultaneously with this contract, a bond on a form to be provided by the City in the amount provided by law as stated in the Notice to Bidders, which shall be for the benefit of the City, and any and all persons injured by the breach of any of the terms of this contract. Said bond shall be filed with the City Clerk and seall be subject to the approval of the City Council, and is by reference made a part of this contract. PAR. 14 The Contractor agrees that should it abandon work under this contract or cease the prosecution thereof for a period of thirty (30) consecutive days without reasonable cause, and should it fail to proceed with said work within ten (10) days after a notice to continue or carry it on has been mailed to it at the address given herein by the City, or after such notice has been served on it, then the City may proceed to complete said work, using any material, tools, or machinery found along said line of work, doing the work either by contract or as it may elect, and the Contractor and the sureties on its bond shall be liable to the City for the costs and expenses so paid out. Said costs shalt be retained by the City from any compensation due, or to become due the Contractor, and may be recovered by the City in an action upon Contractor's bond. PAR. 15 In consideration of the full compliance on the part of the Contractor with all the provisions, stipulations, and conditions hereof, or contained in the various instruments made a part of this contract by reference, and upon completion and acceptance of said work, the ty agrees to pay to the Contractor, in the manner set out in the Notice to Contractors, the amount of money due the Contractor for work performed and accepted, at the unit FORM OF CONTRACT PAGE 3 OF 5 PAGES prices set out in the Contractor's proposal, which has been accepted by the City. PAR. 16 The total amount of the contract, based on the Engineer's estimates of quantities and the Contractor's unit bid prices, and for which 100% surety bond is required is $ PAR. 17 After the completion of said work, the Contractor agrees to remove all debris and clean up said streets, and to save the City harmless from any damage allegedly resulting from a failure to clean up and remove the debris or put the work area back in a proper condition. PAR. 18 This contract is not divisible, but in the event of a conflict between this contract and the various instruments incorporated by reference, this contract shall govern. PAR. 19 Before the Contractor shall be entitled to receive final payment for work done under this contract, it shall execute and file a bond in the penal sum of not less than 100% of the total amount of the contract, same to be known as "Maintenance Bond," and which bond must be approved by the City Council, and which bond is in addition to the bond given by the Contractor to guarantee the completion of the work. PAR. 20 The Contractor shall maintain all work done hereunder in good order for the period of two (2) years from and after the date it is accepted by the Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa. Said maintenance shall be made without expense to the City or the abutting property. In the event of the failure or default of the Contractor to remedy any or all defects appearing in said work within a period of two (2)years from the date of its acceptance by said Council, and after having been given ten (10) days notice so to do by registered letter deposited in the United States Post Office in said town, addressed to said contractor at the address herein given, then the City may proceed to remedy such defects. The costs and expenses thereof to be recovered from the Contractor and the sureties on its maintenance bond by an action brought in any court of competent jurisdiction. PAR. 21 The Contractor shall give notice to said City by registered letter directed to the Mayor or City Clerk/Auditor thereof not more than four (4) and not less than three (3) months prior to the expiration of the term during which the Contractor is required to maintain said improvements, in good repair by the terms of its Contract. The liability of the Contractor and of the sureties on its bond for maintenance of the said improvements shall continue until three (3) months after such notice has been given to the City, and, in any event, until two(2)years after the acceptance of the work. FORM OF CONTRACT PAGE 4 OF 5 PAGES CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA Mayor City CJerk Contractor BY: Title: Approved by the City Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, this day of , 20 ATTEST: City Clerk Waterloo, Iowa FORM OF CONTRACT PAGE 5 OF 5 PAGES PERFORMANCE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, � of Principal), and (hereinafter called the of (hereinafter called the Surety), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Waterloo(hereinafter called the Obligee), in the penal sum lawfuoney of the United States, to payment of which sum well and truly made, the Principal here firmly binds himself/themselves, his/their heirs, executors, and administrators, and the said Surety binds himself, his successors, assigns, executors, and administrators,jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDiTION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, WHEREAS the above bounden Principal did, on the day of , 20 , enter into a written contract with the City of Waterloo, Iowa, for the construction of copy of which contract, together with all of its ten-ns, covenants, conditions, and stipulations, is incorporated herein and made a part hereof as full and completely as if said contract were recited at length herein; and WHEREAS, the Principal and Surety on this bond hereby agree to pay to all persons, firms or corporations having contracts directly with the Principal or with subcontractors, all just claims due them for labor performed or materials furnished in the performance of the contract on account of which bond is given when the same are not satisfied out of the portion of the contract price which the public corporation is required to retain until completion of the public improvement, but the Principal and Surety shall not be liable to said persons, firms, or corporation unless the claims of said claimants against said portion of the contract price shall have been established as provided by law. Now, if the Principal shall in all respects fulfill his said contract according to the terms and tenor thereof, and shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred for the same, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the Obligee from all costs and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and shall fully reimburse and repay the Obligee all outlays and expenses which it may incur in making good any such default, then the obligation is to be void and of no effect, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Every Surety on this bond shall be deemed and held, any contract to the contrary notwithstanding, to consent without notice: FORM OF BOND PAGE 1 OF 2 PAGES 1. To any extension of time to the contract in which to perform the contract. 2. To any change in the plans, specifications, or contract when such change does not involve an increase of more than twenty percent (20%) of the total contract price, and shall then be released only as to such excess increase. 3. That no provision of this bond or of any other contract shall be valid which limits to less than one (1) year from the time of the acceptance of the work the right to sue on this bond for defect in workmanship or material not discovered or known to the Obligee at the time such work was accepted. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we have hereunto set our hands and seals this day of , 20 . Principal By: Surety Attorney-in-Fact FORM OF BOND PAGE 2 OF 2 PAGES PAYMENT BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that (Name of Contractor) (Address of Contractor) a ,hereinafter called Principal, (Corporation,Partnership or Individual) — and (Name of Surety) — (Address of Surety) - hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto (Name of Owner) (Address of Owner) — hereinafter called OWNER, in the penal sum of Dollars, $( ) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, — we bind ourselves, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that whereas, the Principal entered into a certain contract with the OWNER, dated the day of — 20 , a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the construction of: NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall promptly make payment to all persons, firms, SUBCONTRACTORS, and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the WORK provided for in such contract, and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials, lubricants,oil,gasoline, coal and coke, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools, consumed or used in connection with the construction of such WORK, and all insurance premiums on said WORK, and for all labor, performed in such WORK whether by SUBCONTRACTOR or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED,FURTHER, that the said Surety for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that no change,extension of time,alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the — WORK to be performed thereunder or the SPECIFICATIONS accompanying the same shall in any wise affect its obligation on this BOND, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the WORK or to the — SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDED,FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR — shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. IN WITNESS HEREOF,this instrument is executed in counterparts, each one of — (number) which shall be deemed an original, this the day of 20 • ATTEST: — Principal (Principal)Secretary (SEAL) By (s) (Address) Witness as to Principal (Address) Surety ATTEST: By Attorney-in-Fact Witness as to Surety (Address) (Address) NOTE: Date of BOND must not be prior to date of Contract. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute BOND.